Home

PLC WorkShop - FasTrak SoftWorks, Inc.

1. 106 IS EI Eo COO err x cc TT TT 262 Error BOUND t Tm T 187 Ethernet uode ees 13 OUR Ve OO MR RE Tm 315 Exporting Documentation 30 External Subroutine Call XSUB pasta aede aras 300 F Fall Re91ster Opulence aie Sn I Eos aiaa 316 Pall Through Register Outi a orina a vo vade oi 318 ef V DE 21 22 69 Fast PLC Connection Connecting to a PLC suse 22 Fast PLC Setup eee 22 55 69 Irak A LU IM 3 16 T TH ERE 130 tutum aie ie mt 113 114 164 EmA aA NeW Kerese e a 112 Network Address or Line Number ccccccssessccccccccaesesecccceeecaeeseeccceeeeaaeeeeeceeesaueeeeecessuaaeeeees 112 Find an or VmboOl a dde e 113 114 TNS GV ON aeui 1
2. 298 283 RSD read slave diaenostle arie 298 BIS 072 E 299 Run C oHtFollGE cree ioo ohne toute ceti 134 Run Controller DiagnosUts nds ibant Desconectado ate esti uic eet oot 134 5 Sample RAe batiment td tue UEM Ut 174 183 Save Prooram As OIDE xoc oes doa EE Uu I UM CDU UU 33 Save Template oo DIS bui RU 120 pave Save As Online c 32 Saving PLO Crain S 21 31 32 33 ODE si od si assests E E 31 31 32 33 Sayma OH den ete E Mer 31 PBN mt duin eat pe cise ta arse vas eta Dene a oo M 31 32 33 SCALE Operi c eost S Conon rr err tere 342 vro HU A E UT 341 Scan Matrix Compare 9M oie ubi OR D Pul SN VER Dur Ebr 264 Scan synchronization Inhibit SSD oin pier vete vt ue do En vx Res dU Uc eU HU VEN PE Ud
3. 80 Word Shit R etster SHREW E 266 408 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Word to 79 Word Table OWTOT NN 284 Word To Fable And WITA encra A a a 285 Word to Table Exclusive Or WTTXO 287 Word to Table Or iit tio a A 286 Working With Logie Piro AMT 22 X PAIN Ln 63 409
4. 85 Clearing a Base 86 Profibus DP I O Configurat N 87 Configuring Modules in COM 88 Importing Configuration Data From COM PROFIBUS Into 505 WorkShop89 Merge CON PROFIBUS riesaa ee t Eee IE oma c pm qd i Ut 90 Updating Online Offline Profibus Configuration 90 Enable Disable Profibus 5 90 Deleting or Adding Slaves a a oia 90 Assigning or Modifying Profibus I O Addresses 91 nel 9 92 93 Conigured Lm 93 6 Programming 95 alme M H 95 Online Versus Offline Programming 95 Using the LOGIC EGIlOF etm 95 96 Insert a New 96 Inserta NeWISOW dde bons uestra 96 Ladder INS MICU O
5. 389 MOO 393 Xi 505 WorkShop 1 Introduction Manual Design Welcome to 505 WorkShop for Windows a powerful Windows based tool for programming programmable logic controllers PLCs Whether you are a novice or an experienced programmer this manual has been constructed to help you begin using 505 WorkShop for Windows quickly We at FasTrak have tried to assume little about you the user except that when you have a question regarding this software you will want it answered by using this manual and the online help Chapter topics use names that point you quickly to the specific information you want to find Titles of Chapters are listed in the following table Chapter Name Description Introduction Outlines manual contents Customer Support numbers and necessary hardware and software to run 505 WorkShop for Windows Installation Guides you through the installation procedures for the software and security 505 WorkShop for Walks you through the nitty gritty by describing 505 Windows Basics WorkShop for Windows features and helps you move through the Windows environment 505 WorkShop for Provides specific guidelines in setting up and Windows Setup Overview customizing the software PLC Configuration Provides directions for configuring your processor to work with 505 WorkShop for Windows Programming Gives a you solid understanding of the 505 WorkShop
6. 364 Data Link Properties 365 Security Administration Dialog 366 Enable Password Security 366 Inactive Passwords Timeout in N Minutes 366 Request User Password xp uin cei impe rem RU UU 367 ALEacn Control PON rc E qoo Urna uec M ios IUE oris 368 Tr ee PS 368 FAO CHING uus veiut dk tose Comas 369 WSClS A 370 SISTING extern UU MTM 370 User Security Setup Dialog 370 Changing the User s Password 371 X FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Switching the conce rt 372 NT Authentication Security 5 373 OVCRVICW bnt pra ne e tutis EE 373 Installing the Security 374 Installing to a Local Machine 374 Installing to a Remote Machine
7. 176 Rate or Change LD00p a 189 RBC Part didis cc 139 Read Slave Dias nosUG SD diei dee obe a cid didi aod 298 Reading or 5 Port ContiburatlOn ton E 28 Real Inte ser Math OODperabtolt 23 52 vtae tos teo ctis tag ipeo UN Cobain dd 325 Remote SEU ONAL 176 185 Reset C OM RS D cuo iier e 248 Reset Immediate Coil 1 249 404 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Reset erate satan ound ot acies es eei Seiad veld 185 IN VIDI 58 Retent Tiner On lay 251 Return from SF Program SUDIOULING eie n SRM aAa 341 Return From Subroutine RET 1 eese emen 291 Reverse ar EIS DM MINI MEM E EMEN E MEE EE 187 Right Mouse Button Pop Up Menus nennen nenne nnn nnn n 111 REC DENS CRUG PCI 283 298 RSD rtur
8. 176 Rate of Change Alarm ds cuc ooa 176 Monitor Broken Transmitter 171 9 PID Loops 179 Gad m RO 179 PID DOCU SICAL OMA sia RM 180 Programmino FD OOD shen tahoe 181 505 Programming Software for Windows cuui batur a bibere 183 Sample TRANG sn ot cute rar aine reset etu a eset Edd 183 Process VvariabDle AdOFeSS u edis RE vto eade RV Mio 184 Low Process Variable Range 184 High Process Variable Range 184 Process Variable 184 Square Root of Process 184 55 et 194 OUIDPUT IS BIDOIAM a aa 184 SOCK ORS Fe tees E 184 Alarm DC AG DANG e tva e dic 185 Monitor Low Low High High 185 TP Pc 185 Process Variable Alarm LOW LOW cccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeeeaees 185 Process Variable Alarm Low ccccccsecceseceeecseccescceecceeeceesceee
9. The operation of the statement is described below and illustrated in Figure 7 36 and Figure 7 37 When the PACKAA statement executes the following actions occur Fora TO Table the value of the analog alarm variable specified in D is written into the table at the address designated by B If additional variables are specified the second variable is written to B 1 the third to B 2 and so on up to eight variables CA N Table LSB 1t DD DD D 101 inininin ininininininininin 20 nnnnannnnmnnnn P mci wins In nininin inininininininininin Figure 11 36 Example of PACKAA TO Table Operation Fora FROM PACKAA writes the word in the table starting address B into the specified analog alarm variable If additional variables are specified the second word in the table is written to the second variable and so on up to eight variables Tab Ta from table tok TabDotz TabzTable address to Tab Alarm numberstak TabDatz 10 lt tok_Tab gt Parameters lt tok_TabDot AACK APY ASP AODA c Mermnar MSB Tahle LSB M HH IHH 0 Figure 11 37 Example of PACKAA FROM Table Operation 331 Pack Loop Data The PACKLOOP statement Figure 11 38 moves loop data to or from a table PACKLOOP is primarily intended for use in consolidat
10. 278 search Table for Equal 279 search Table for Not Equal 280 viii FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Table to Table And CANI dud oa bine 281 Table to Table Or CHOIR oi coset aede tutu 281 Table to Table Exclusive Or 282 Table Complement 282 Text Text Box 283 Table to Word TTOW e eeeeeseeeeeeeeeneen nennen 283 Word to Table WTOT 1 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nnne nnnm nnns 284 Word To Table And 285 Word to Table Or 206 Word to Table Exclusive Or 287 GION Sic o4 secret ead 288 Special Function Program SFPGM 288 Special Function Subroutine 289 ENON eR Ro eee 289 Conditional 290 tire wine m 290
11. 23 Shared Documetitatlol ooo deep eoe demit dn QC HMM EM EM 166 Shift Register Memory RE I LU IT 80 Show OE COS 123 SFIR DE E 80 80 104 ETE 294 Slave SIUS a 89 T re 77 132 133 171 Features ER RORIS m ecce 15 Software Reqiremelhlts UI M I LN E 4 SONS EUIS UL 55 Calculation OI nee iam tiunt aim eie adim adn 186 176 186 Special Function Program Call SFPGM eese 288 Special Function Subroutine nnn nnn nennen sess nsns nenas 289 Speca MeMO Pp 75 77 171 Root SOR D nib sta E utut ped nd tu cM UM 268 Square Root of Process Varlable uoo incesto eo TER 175 184 SOR Bici ipie m 345 Startins 505 WorkShop oe vot Et EAE 9 16 Sams LINE T I T 17 20
12. Tab Dab 1000 Loop Numbers toh TabDobetiring Step on_ Tab Got Tab 2 Loop 1 RA MP S Profle before PACK RS statui ae paint Pamp Rab Tima Desdbsnd Ris Bt unit uni train Mn Unit RampetoH 10 24 0 0 ton Ta be RampetoH 1026 0 iH 0 ton Ta be ton Ta b ton Ta bed ton Tabla In Ham or Ramp ratur 110 94 IEEE ing point repre reris don 0740 0 gt stan 1 value t IEEE foa 1ng point repre 075 0 rtstuabl taddregg v 1025 IEEE fos 1ng polnt repre ofid P 2 values IEEE floating point repre ton of5 0 Situs Se poit Ramp Rab Time Ceadband Bt Unl Mn Unit Ramp tok 1024 Tsbo 4 0 m bh Tsb 5 0 ipH Tate Sogn ton Tab v1 g eto4 Tab ton Tab 19 0 RampetoH 1026 toh Tab 2ebH 0 2102 Ta be Ta be ton Ta bod tok n tilt aram ple Tie for Loop 111 changed after tin PACERS Instruction The Setpoint value In Step 111 modifed from 30 0 to 40 0 and His Time value in Step 2 1 changed 3 0 to 10 0 otier values In tive profile lav
13. 21 50 96 106 Le 3 43 44 45 46 95 108 Paste o ou rot eM E IM LM 43 44 45 46 108 PID prr CE 181 P D Ecc 104 Subroutine mr 104 169 Vodo 47 Editing and Creating New 160 Editing Documentation in Ladder 165 43 240 Editing Drain E 108 deter E 193 8l EBPRONIS eene to nate de n D M M Mud n E 135 El ments 122 123 UTNE 122 123 ELSE FUNC 321 Reale 90 END 11 120 191 193 PAN END 289 End Conditional ENDO 5 t ease do e cautius 290 ISBN CBE E m 32 Entering Special Function Program
14. 240 pH HIDE 243 11 RLL Instructions 245 INSTUCUONS nox buen e 245 Normal Contact 245 Normally Closed Contact 245 Normally Open Immediate 245 Normally Closed Immediate 246 Logical Not Contact INO T iie ci 246 One Deere ditat cfi or 246 CO i ii S EI ti 247 E C TP 247 e rS 247 Immediate Closed Coil eese 248 ecu E 248 Ixeser Coll ES9d cacumine e uii o M UE INQUE 248 vii 505 Programming Software for Windows Set Immediate Coil 248 Reset Immediate Coil RSTI 249 Timers Counters and 249 15 M H 249 dE 250 001S Timer dente 250 Retentive Timer
15. 374 Installation 374 Workgroups and 376 ligo dece TA 376 DONIN 376 Adding Users and Groups to the Operating System 377 Adding Users for Windows 95 98 and ME 377 Adding Users for Windows 377 Adding Users for Windows 2000 and 377 Adding Users and Groups on a Domain Controller 378 Configuring User Rights and Audit Policy 379 Configuring for NT Authentication Security 380 Instructions for 381 Security CONTIOQUI alos odessesct Rt oti 385 Launching the Security Configurator 385 Configuring Users Groups and Security Audit 387 Configuring Users Groups and Security Audit 387 Adding and Removing Users and Groups 387 Setting Permissloris eise a 388 Securty 388
16. Verify Dac Figure 0 4 Documentation is merged into an existing database file attached to a single device Note when the radio button Verify Doc is checked tags addresses and the general file format are verified This action causes the import process to be slightly slower To start the import process click the OK button Documentation can also be exported by selecting File amp Import Documentation from the menu 243 244 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 11 RLL Instructions Relay Instructions Normal Contact STR When the referenced address of a Normal Contact is ON the contact is closed and passes power When the referenced address is OFF the Normal contact is open and does not pass power C1 h Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types STR Bit Address X Y C V KWXWY STW B W TCP TCC DCC DSP DSC DCP Normally Closed Contact STRN When the referenced address of a Normally Closed contact is ON the Normally Closed contact is open and does not pass power When the referenced address is OFF the Normally Closed contact is closed and passes power Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types STRN Bit Address X Y C V KWXWY STW B W TCP TCC DCC DSP DSC DCP Normally Open Immediate Contact When the discrete point of an I O module of a Normal Open Immediate Contact is ON the contact is closed and passes power When the referenced address is OFF the Nor
17. cc ET T 174 mE 174 Process Variable Address 174 Low Process Variable Range 175 High Process Variable 175 Process Variable Bipolar ice csse 175 Square Root of Process 175 Monitor LOwW LOW HIQN HIQN 175 Montor LOWI mte LEE 175 Process Variable Alarm Low LOW 175 Process Variable Alarm 175 Process Variable Alarm High 175 Process Variable Alarm 175 Monitor Remote 175 Remote Me M E 176 Clamp Setpoint 176 IC AG D ANG M RN p TRNRT 176 Special UNCON EE Lt 176 Meuse Mae 176 Deviation Yellow Alarm 176 Deviation Orange Alarm eesseesseeeseeee nennen nennen nnn nnns 176 Monitor Rate of Change
18. 251 Uo Counter Odi ERES 251 Up Down Counter 252 Discrete Control Alarm Timer 253 Motor Control Alarm Timer MCAT 255 Time Driven Drum DRUM eeeeeeeeeeneeee nnne 257 Time Event Driven Drum 258 Miscible Event Drum Discrete 260 Maskable Event Drum Drum Word 261 Compare INSIWUCIONS e 262 Moria 262 Not E guak to 262 Nar n rete d DE T DOE 262 Less Than or Equal To LEQ opc E tieu 262 GI eater OT Is Sta oo 262 Greater Than or Equal To 262 Compare CMP t H M 263 Indexed Matrix Compare 263 Scan Matrix Compare 264 264 Bit Cleat BITO mem 264 BIEPIEK BITP ie iin oda oc Mela Ma 264 BITS ida ecu Mela uM LM aM 265 Bit Shit Axegist r SHRB ate essa ecu 265 Word Shift Register SIAR VV eei peine e B
19. 159 Customizing the DISDplay onec piri ere o e ter ERO ipae Exe inox 159 Editing and Creating New Documentation 160 Cut Copy Paste and Deleting Documentation 161 G0 NH eee 162 se 162 EP 163 Bill 163 Searching for an Address Tag or Description 164 916519 DOIMIGMUS itera 164 I ESOIOOED 165 ASSIN AGS 165 ASSIN AG GNC SS Seine e 165 Editing Documentation in Ladder 165 shared DOCUMENTATION eu er i gea eins 166 Toggling the Display of Documentation 167 Toggling display through Program Setup 167 Toggling display with keyboard hotkeys 168 Edit Tile Page Pint Only cia pee a Qe vetus me 169 8 Analog Alarms 171 COW CIVIC cam 171 Analog eee T 171 Copysarnd Paste Alarmes aa 173 Analg Parame lers e a 173 cie TER 173
20. sees 64 Controlling Ramp Soak Operation 192 T anes 124 Conver DE D To E deo notus tonio Mt ion Polonos once 311 Convert Binary BED 312 ER 9 43 44 45 108 109 133 135 161 162 and Paste Alarms erroe 173 Comelated Data 314 Los Window ook 210 Create New PEOSTAI a UU Tu eee 22 Creating New udo pad a ai odes uh Ri aaa ieee Dus cd toas 22 Creatine Trend Window ed dM EP 224 Creating an Address Used Listing oie odo 126 Cross Referernee oer pate o Praec Edad 15 21 34 41 124 125 126 154 gun e 41 Tapie SEP rc Serre 126 CIR Rc PD ROT TES 78 Customer SUDDOFPE VERRE PRA A 1 2 16 CUSCOMIZING THE ce 121 159 o C EE 3 43 44 95 108 161 162 Copy Paste and Deletins Documentation oet idee SIE Rode en arn 161 D BUCH ONE eT Cm
21. 192 am T 193 omarTune Automatic Loop Tuning 195 The Proportional 195 The Integral 195 The Derivative 196 Start Variable Abort Variable Ack Variable 197 2 198 10 205 ETEOOUOI 205 Configuring FTLogger 205 c 207 Modifying o RR ER EO S 209 Deleting DEVICES cm a 209 vi FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Creating Log VV COW ab Eben b nda itu Ecce 210 htc PP rp 211 Eso rmt MC S P PR 213 Bie EE 215 TME SlaIMD 216 Using Log 217 eel 217 ROW ec RUE 217 Device Name met ET 217 Lor E 217 218 DJeESGEDUOR 218
22. NN uz User Name Figure 14 7 Upon entering a valid user name and password and the security administrator has given this user privileges to this feature the user is granted access to the save feature After saving the user immediately returns to the program makes another change then selects Save from the File menu again Even though the user was just granted access to the Save feature the Password Required dialog reappears requesting the user name and password Once At Startup Alternately user name and password can be requested once when WorkShop is started or after selecting Switch user in the User Security Setup dialog illustrated later in this document Upon entering a valid user name and password the new user can access each password controlled feature to which the security administrator has granted privileges without having to re enter the user name and password The advantage of this selection is that users enter their names and passwords once at startup and are not required to re enter them each time they choose a password controlled feature The disadvantage of this selection is that one user can start WorkShop with a correct name and password but another operator can continue to use the application with all the original user s access privileges 368 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Adding Users Click the Add User button to add a new user to the li
23. Loca E Services Lora Figure 5 14b Right click on My Computer and Select Properties In the Default Properties tab select the default authentication and impersonation levels This dialog resembles the dcomcnfg interface of Windows NT and 2000 from earlier above To set the security and identity properties for FTSecSvr select DCOM Config under My Computer in the above dialog The available registered COM applications will be displayed Scroll and select FTSecSvr Open its properties by right clicking on it The dialog is shown below Component Services o gt EM 8 ere Application n U8AFETE4 23F7 103 8 Author abit Eutbon ED TG 2328 1038 ee ere Blocked 385 1 LCF BE Bagrnunber IESESIO7E ECIIS 3 LD4 COM Event System ped Insta U98DEZBE D7GE 11DH A Come omer imber Exploner DODO OOCOO CI ComEvents Com5ystem M legager PROBS 3 6D099 L101 amp T1LABECPEUS 274D0 3 702 5 Figure 5 14c 382 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop The dialog that opens is identical to the one earlier in this chapter OOM Properties Genera Location um Figure 5 14e 383 Figure 5 14f Figure 5 140 384 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkS
24. OP AU Deme o ccr 315 the ngo o bb DIR ab 316 D LL M M 125 Output is Bipolar ecc 184 en POI EC AE 55 73 95 171 179 Pack Anos Alarm T DT 330 pack nc UU c 326 PACK FROM Operat Mite pax dise n pis qoia dires aden 328 Pack me itd sre aT Meus dcn oup 332 Pack Data aeaiee Er e RE 334 PACK per at Oi a 327 PACRAZUA unn 331 PACKAGE MEM EE MEI MEL 3 e 332 5 tp i sare aa atid Sa eet LN Sc MM SIL ae MOOR 334 Pase SetuD ce ead ID MU s tA M MM LAN LO tea At ue rd 55 70 Parallel Port oim 4 Parameterized Go to Subroutine esee ene enn enne nnn 296 Parameterized Go to Subroutine 0 PGTSZ en nennen nnne nnne 297 Partrab Restart ouaa r etc E eto 153 PASS WOE reek cae RG ede
25. 2 Variable key x 544 Constant Khi emm gt mu a no Bea e vm Dru Date Time xxm zh E bit 04712 Tui Shots K o Figure 5 2 Enter the appropriate ranges for the selected PLC memory type NOTE The processor type must be selected before configuration The various memory types are described in the pages that follow Memory types are classified for RLL programming purposes in the following ways Writeable This memory type is read write It can be used for both input and output fields of RLL instructions Readable This memory type is read only It can be used only for the input fields of RLL instructions No access RLL instructions has no access to this memory Click Accept to save your settings and return to the active logic program FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Controller Memory Types Ladder Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for the RLL program This memory type is called Ladder Memory L Memory Each RLL instruction used in the program requires one or more 16 bit words of L Memory Image Register Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for maintaining the status of discrete inputs outputs This memory type is called the discrete image register A word image register holds
26. Help x Device Name Address T ag IF V1 is gt D read the addresses device vi In the data window Cancel Tags Figure 0 21 An event is set up by choosing an address or tag referred to as the event address from a device Clicking on an item in the Tags list box will display the corresponding address in the Address Tag edit box The Event Range represents an expression involving the event address The addresses in a data window will be updated as long as the expression is true The first combo box and adjacent edit box is referred to as the low trigger range The combo box contains the following operators lt gt lt gt and The last combo box and adjacent edit box is referred to as the high trigger range The combo box contains the following operators gt lt gt and The middle combo box represents the trigger relationship This combo box contains the strings END AND AND NOT OR and OR If END is selected only the low trigger range is used in the expression The text at the top of the edit box describes the complete expression with the event address included Trending method description box The trending method static box will give a description of the trend method that is currently checked This text changes whenever you select a different trend method Trending Options If the box labeled Update only when data changes is checked then address
27. gram mores word into 1000 E CLOD contains value 1900 SSR ES One fime 1900 shite to Lili 100 is reset to D 100 O Bit is turned off Siht reg word 10K Tate Neston prox ram mows APER sed FLOD contains the value nint 1710 contains the value 1900 SB One fime 19080 shits to shifts to 1101 WOO is reset 1000 0 tus Bit Ch is off Of 110016 5 Cir Cir Cir Cir Figure 11 53 Example of SSR Operation 346 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Unscaling Values s Scaled Input Binary Result Low Limit High Limit 20 Offset Bipolar The UNSCALE statement takes an input value in engineering units scaled between high and low limits and converts it to an integer Scaled Input is the memory location of the input Descriptors Integer Address address containing an integer value e g V100 or WX77 or V100 2 Real Address address containing a real value e g V120 WY55 or V100 2 Binary Result is the memory location of the result after conversion Valid Descriptors are Integer Address address only accepts an integer value and Writeable Address e g WY1000 or V23 2 C55 Low Limit is the lower limit of the Scaled Input Valid Des
28. 12 27 2002 IGM SOYAN 2 Figure 14 17b From this application the user may view the Security log If running the Security Configurator from a different machine than the security server FTSecSvr then the security server s machine name must be specified in the event viewer to view the security log entries referring to FasTrak security This can be accomplished by highlighting the Event Viewer in the tree control and then picking the Action menu This is in the figure below E Event Viewer Figure 14 17 Selecting Connect to another computer launches following window 389 Loan Figure 14 17d Use the Browse button for searching for and selecting another computer Once chosen click OK to accept the selection 390 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 391 505 WorkShop Index DATA Menu PFunctionallty 5 ode Ee aves tbe ei uev RU EP Vis e edi balise 238 6 enema saute AS Miele LI DAE M I ALLE 250 MEM rr l9 EE 249 5 505 WorkShop Access 2 d Dus Ves lets hu pte dne pus ed 8 505 WorkShop with H1 Communications sse nnn nnn nennen nnns 59 tete bed 22 23 25 28 58 74 75 83 97 98 104 137 153 154 155 Su Port A Onl SUL ALON nn 26 AD
29. 133 Hal fene m 134 Ladder VLOG cu o ORE it O A 133 DOOD chess sre 171 173 180 181 183 190 193 SEIS a I ELLE i ue LE 95 131 139 PEC Ty E e 73 PEC Type Setup COMME oco oa urat dtd a naa vus 74 EPEC TYDES cente eta UM ELEM MU Ee Ree 75 PII TEE TTA TER J3 Fop Up C2 11 Co a a a 111 164 asin a a 153 Previous AdGF ss oos vete nio DIS dto nist oos equa es RR RE OV REP cedtuca ER 120 wii e 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 55 70 124 Pr t eda E 37 Print Cross RCIereliCe ans 41 Print Documentation 55955 40 Jus dE gm 34 35 36 37 39 Prmt Logic and SES e du nasa 39 Print nck Sce ease 36 NO ru c 339 Print PEC Configuration meer 37 Print Registers oo doo nti uH M MM M HM ME E RM E 30 Print tod Text Bl eoe Sn bte ME
30. Figure 14 1b If the users already on file belong to the Administrator s group then the fields above are filled in and the dialog is used to verify the user s password Clicking OK launches the Security Type Selection dialog seen below 361 Typs Selection Figure 14 1c Clicking on Enable Password Security activates security and the use is free to choose from either FasTrak Authentication or NT Authentication FasTrak Authentication Whereby the application itself regulates user access to password protected areas Management takes place on the local computer only For more on this area of Security click here or go to Chapter 5 of the manual for PLC WorkShop NT Authentication When enabled PLC WorkShop requests permission to access password protected areas from the FasTrak Security Server This server is a separate application which can be installed on the local computer or on any other computer running under MS Windows NT 2000 or XP This server is capable of managing multiple computers from a single central location Click here to go to the chapter on this feature or please see other sections in this chapter of this PLC WorkShop manual 362 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop FasTrak Authentication Security The Authentication Security Dialog is accessible from the Security Type Selection screen please see that section of the manual The dialog is seen below FasTrak Authenticabon Security
31. 125 Jomp JMP sasha ear la ete a a 290 Jomp End er 291 K Keyboard 1 15 95 96 97 98 104 106 108 171 173 180 181 190 193 195 196 L ted ertet 29 30 51 55 120 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 a tola eaten 295 E 21 55 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 IECIT a trem 35 ario EQ 34 35 36 37 39 Ladder Cour err Pp 55 Kcr 1 2 eam n 157 Ladder pales De ara 97 399 Ladder Memor de toten TS T7 Ladder VIO ior 133 Ladder Network Cross Reference 125 oa senses EET 138 138 34 35 36 37 39 Operat ON 324 LESS ea sates aca gas S 175 185 187 Limitine COC P EE 186 IEEE ILS REDDERET
32. 505 WorkShop see 9 Figure 3 5 Display PID Loop Directory Display Analog Alarm Directory Display the Data Window Display FTLogger log data Display FT Trender Display the Cross Reference Display the Documentation Window Add a new network to a program Add a new row to a program Puts the PLC in program mode Puts the PLC in run mode Enter and validate the active program 21 505 Programming Software for Windows Working With Logic Programs 505 WorkShop provides you with a number of different ways of editing programs These include Connecting to a PLC to view logic stored in the PLC Creating a new program offline Loading a file online Loading a file offline Attaching documentation to an online program Before you can perform any editing you must first open a logic program Creating a New Logic Program With 505 WorkShop it s easy to create a new program NOTE Remember you can create new programs in offline mode only To connect to a processor online use Open Program or Fast PLC Connection To create a new logic program and begin programming do the following 1 Click a on the Toolbar or select New Program from the File menu or 1 Press on the keyboard 2 Select the PLC Type 3 Press OK Fast PLC Connection Connecting to a PLC With 505 WorkShop you can connect to a PLC with a click of the mouse You can then view and edit existing logic
33. E 135 Programming POM EOCKOUCG u a 135 system Part 136 Performing Syntax CHECK e cessas ie urea e cao Pa E gU ook D Pura 137 Ladder Status Reste MTS 138 Initiating a Single Sabi ion ctl hs teo esu 138 ae Liz ud EE 139 Task Godes T e an 140 DIAGHIOSIICS ON BaSe m 141 HOCE ACUI ettet rd 141 mici slt HH E 142 Password Operational Modes 143 Online Password Selection and Access Level 146 Offline Password Selection and Access Level 147 PEC Password AGIS otis a p deem a pne pce 148 Powering Up Restart the 153 TE 153 RESIA etm 153 Complete RESTA Tae besos e die hehe ees depu ha een 153 Clearing Memory MR DE 154 Selecting 5 5 ooo ooo dto orto ete tese temm tenens 155 7 Documentation 157 Ladder M CEU 157 NGIWONK aera 158 iv FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 22 e MEAT c 158 Using the Documentation
34. Save g Sae Wendt E Gave Figure 3 11 2 n Save select the parts of the program you wish to load or select Load Complete Program to load all parts 3 fthe program has not been previously saved or you wish to change the file name select the Browse button and type in a name for the program in the File name field 4 Click Save or press Enter to save the program If you select a file name that already exists in that directory a message appears with options Select from the following options YES saves the updated program with the current name overwriting the previous version cancels the save procedure NOTE You must validate logic before saving If you have not done so a message appears stating changes to logic have not been validated or entered Changes cannot be saved until logic has been validated and entered Click Validate Logic on the toolbar or select Validate and Enter Logic from the Program menu Complete necessary changes to logic and try to save the program again 32 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop If you are working online and saving your changes warning message appears stating that logic in the active PLC program has been modified and asks if you wish to save the logic in addition to tags and documentation Click Yes to save logic tags and documentation Click No to save documentation and tags only Cancel aborts the save procedure
35. Montor Dev 5 ample Rate Alam Low Des ev Yellow Alarm Addi Alam High 2 PV Fuss _ Alam Hi Hi High P PV Range eoo be SE Bipolar oe No Ren Ed Ofset 0 VP g x 0 d of cess z onitar Broken Figure 8 4 Alarm Title An eight character title can be entered for each specific Analog Alarm number The title is optional and can be left blank 173 V Flag Address Enter an address C Y V or WY in the ALARM VFLAG ADDRESS field If you select NONE no data is written from the V Flags in the analog alarm The V Flags contains the operational data for an analog alarm The V Flags comprises the individual bits making up the 16 bit word The bits are defined in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Analog Alarm V Flags 1 Bit Analog Alarm Function 1 Enable alarm 1 Disable alarm 1 Process Variable is in high high alarm 1 Process Variable is in high alarm 1 Process Variable is in low alarm 1 Process Variable is in low low alarm 1 Process Variable is in yellow deviation alarm 1 Process Variable is in orange deviation alarm Oo N O A C N 1 Process Variable is in rate of change alarm 1 Broken transmitter alarm 1 Analog alarm is overrunning 12 1 Alarm is enabled 13 16 1 Unused If a word is selected for the analog alarm V Flags bit 12 is wr
36. Figure 6 14f This dialog operates much like the Enter New PLC Password Alias dialog The Password and Verify password entries must match just as the Alias and Verify alias entries must match Note Ifthe PLC password remains the same but the alias changes the original alias is replaced by the new alias The PLC password is now associated with a new alias However if the alias remains unchanged and the password changes the alias becomes associated with the new PLC password and is no longer associated with the original PLC password Q Delete Any or all PLC Password PLC Password Alias pairs may be permanently removed from the list stored on the PC Highlight one or more items single click control click shift click etc from the list box in the PLC Password Aliases dialog and click the Delete button A confirmation message states the selected item s will be permanently deleted When this message is acknowledged the item s are permanently removed from the list 152 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Powering Up Restart the Controller Power Up Restart Use Power Up Restart to clear all unforced X Y and non retentive C elements on power up or restart of the controller Retentive control relays are not cleared The WX and WY elements are not affected If you execute Power Up Restart with controller battery aution switch set to Off all programs residing in the controller will be cleared Be c
37. NOTE The merged information has not been loaded into the controller or the offline program at this stage You must first enter the assignments then use the Write All button on the Profibus DP I O dialog box to load the program Updating Online Offline Profibus Configuration To update bus parameters and any previously configured data slaves to the online controller or the offline program you must use the Write All or Write Slave s button on the Profibus DP I O dialog box To write all configured slaves to the online controller or the offline program at one time click on the Write All button To write selected slaves to the online controller or the offline program click on the Write Slave s You can only Write Slave s with a Match or Match under status in the slave status window Enable Disable Profibus Slaves To Enable or Disable a PROFIBUS slave status you must use the Enable Slave s or Disable Slave s button on the Profibus DP I O dialog box Deleting or Adding Slaves To add or delete slaves or modules you must return to COM PROFIBUS modify your configuration file as appropriate and export it again Follow the procedure outlined in Merge COM PROFIBUS to import the new information by running Merge You can however delete all slaves by clicking on the Delete button on the Profibus DP I O dialog box 90 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Assigning or Modifying Profibus I O Addresses To assi
38. device errors Do not attempt any reads from the device DK Communications Timeout Response Cancel Figure 0 9 The Error Types list box hold all the error situations in which a response be preprogrammed Error situations include communication timeouts device errors log database file errors and status file errors The Error Responses group box lists all the possible responses for the item that is currently highlighted in the Error Types list box If no items are checked in the group box no action will be taken when the corresponding error situation arises The text in bottom right corner gives a more detailed description of the error response for the error type that is highlighted 223 FTTrend FT Trend displays real time data collected from multiple PLC devices or historical data collected from the FTLogger This information is displayed in a graph with up to 256 points per graph You can view different devices on the same graph and control how often the information is gathered and displayed Creating a Trend Window To create a new Trend Window Q First launch FT Trender Click the Toolbar or select New Program from the File menu Result A default trend widow appears figure 0 10 ki FT Trend Untitled File Edit View Setup Mode Window Help gt OI Default Y Axis 3854 150914 For
39. esee nennen nnn nnn nnns 24 Loading Parts of an Existing Logic Program Online 25 Transfer Offline Program to Online 26 Connecting Online to a 575 ret Reese ones uocis Sepp 27 Reading or Writing 575 Port Configuration 28 Importihg Documoenlallon 5 2 2 5 crai Evec iota Ded Uia nue 29 Documentations edes M 30 SAVING LOGIC FOOLING 31 SAVING OMME ans 31 DAVE DAVE AS ma es MUR ate 32 Save Program AS oe rece Te Set Eee MUR Ren 33 Prin ng Eogle TrFOGFSPIS dip aya Qc a deua va dta 34 Printbogicana osse enu Em Ne 35 cR 36 PATIBULO aste C eR 37 505 Programming Software for Windows Print Pc item dte teste e 37 E TIDEISegISIOES gat wire tel tauren estado 39 FFL OC US TILL O I RR OE UM 40 Print Cross Reference 41 Print ioa Text FIG
40. 331 PACK COOP Dalarna a 332 332 Pack oerte idus 334 334 Dra 338 PINUNO ctas 339 PRINT ODSOFAUOFD acus ries oc eee heen leas 339 Return from SF 341 vielem 341 SCALE Operation trono ao mites po aba es S Deo ne queue 342 sequential Data 343 343 oynchronous ShiTE Register INE iens 345 evade pee HE 345 Unscaling Values mecum itta ume 347 COMNEN ee oHm 348 13 Auditing 351 ACUI none ie ee 351 NEC EE 351 Activity Audit Setup Dialog 352 14 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security 359 adl 359 Securty SClUD m 359 Administrator OptionS acie kx 360 Choosing a Security nennen nnn nnns 361 FasTrak Authentication 363 FasTrak Authentication Log
41. OFF D1 Test Station u To m DUG 1 Figure 0 23 Column Layout Each trend window will is in a spreadsheet form with customizable columns Each column can be sized in one of two ways You can click and hold the left mouse button when in between 2 columns By moving the cursor to the right or left a user can increase or decrease the column on the left You can also double click when in between 2 columns This will adjust the left column so that it s large enough to display the largest string within this column If no strings are displayed in the column no adjustment will be made Row Row indicator The number of rows is configurable by you when creating a new trend window Each row represents a single address from a single device that s configured in the server that the trend window is connected to Currently rows are not sizeable Device Name Since addresses in the trend window can refer to any device connected to the trend window s server a device name is necessary When a key is hit in this column or clicked an auto searching floating combo box control will be displayed containing all the device names for the trend window server The control will highlight the current device when clicking in this column Changing the device name in this column changes the current device on the status bar Address When a key is hit in this column an in place edit box will be enabled The addres
42. papa bel F Hirot cce Fie Hame C A mdb Erare kes Mecrosolt Acces ELT C Othe Lies C alie ohy frrough fe Server Figure 22 2 b Click the Write to a database file radio button to record the activity audits to database files These can either Microsoft Access or Structured Query Language SQL files These log files are simply spreadsheet like files and may also be viewed with applications such as Microsoft s Excel Lotus or even text editors Click the Microsoft Access radio button to write Activity Audits to a Microsoft Access file Either enter or click the Browse button to specify the Access file name to which activity records will be written The pull arrow of the New files created 5 combo box can be used to select the format of Microsoft Access files desired Click the Other Database radio button to select the SQL file type as illustrated below 353 Figure 22 2c Either enter the Connection String in the edit box or click the Select button in the Other Databases group box to display the Data Link Properties wizard dialogs below to assemble the SQL file connection string 354 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Data Link Properties Conmection Advanced Al Select the dala you connect da OLE DB Provader s Microsoft Jat 3 51 OLE Provide
43. Documentation Approaching the software in this order will also help you discover 505 WorkShop s powerful features that include Multiple windows view and edit Flexible program setup Access to ladder logic through cross reference Write read and force addresses from the Data Window Multiple documentation options Keyboard support for every function and command 15 505 Programming Software for Windows Starting 505 WorkShop After installing 505 WorkShop start 505 WorkShop by doing one of the following actions Double click the 505 WorkShop icon with left mouse button QO Press Ctrl F6 until the 505 WorkShop group box is active If necessary press the Tab key to highlight the 505 WorkShop icon and press Enter While 505 WorkShop loads the 505 WorkShop copyright screen appears When 505 WorkShop does not detect a FasTrak Key an error message appears SURE Figure 3 0 If you see this message check to see that the FasTrak Key is Connected to a parallel printer port or Connected to a parallel port before printers or other devices Q See nstalling the FasTrak Key section in Chapter 2 Installation for more information Installing 505 WorkShop After you have checked the key s installation load 505 WorkShop from the icon If 505 WorkShop continues to not detect the FasTrak Key please call FasTrak Customer Support at 414 358 8088 immediately When 505 WorkShop has loaded
44. the offline program Match if the configuration matches the online controller or the offline program and the I O assignments do not match online controller or the offline program New if the slave is programmed in the 2bf file but not in the online controller or the offline program QO Mismatch if the slave number exists in the 2bf file and in the online controller or the offline program but has been configured differently Delete if the slave is in the online controller or the offline program but not in the 2bf file When the program is written to the online controller or the offline program the slave will be deleted The Profibus DP I O dialog box allows you to execute the following functions Merge Q Disable Slaves Write All Q Delete all slaves Q Write Slave s Q Edit slave Q Enable Slaves Profibus Q operations online only 89 505 Programming Software for Windows Merge COM PROFIBUS Follow the steps below to merge in the COM PROFIBUS 1 Click on the Merge button to execute the merge function You are prompted to supply the name of the binary file from which you wish to import configuration data 2 Atthe prompt either type in the name of the binary file or click the browse button to search other drives or directories Result The PROFIBUS DP Slave Status screen displays configuration information obtained from the COM PROFIBUS binary file that you have just merged into 505 WorkShop
45. 206 SD I Oper at On ed 343 Searchand Replace Address uso ed te tmb iet Ead e paste onde o eiat eeu i tit ena 114 Search Table Tor Equal ST PE etr ea 270 Search Table for Not Equal S s doo ete ta e Oh t s to ie 280 Searching for AUOESSS ono eorura ope tuens 164 Tag OP DeSCPIDHOI o Nene 164 Secondary XOU Te SOS aridi batir eni 62 Selecane 5 5 Applications 155 Sequential Data tv ccc 343 Serial Communica Hon 58 Serial or Modem Communication 58 2 27 73 79 83 120 133 134 179 186 191 193 Dt ONL E T MUT per 248 Set Immediate Coil SETL cccccscscccccsnsscecessccecnecccccusscecessscecuesccucussceceesscecusesecneseseensscucuesess 248 Setting Up and Using TIWAY in 505 61 Setting Up TIWAY I and UNILINK HOST Adapters sse 61 Vl e 58 Seria 58 SF DUDEN EE ut 35 SF PL CAGED T eS 158 SE Proerani and Subroutine Editor nico a 104 Share Address Documentation
46. 261 Word 261 Master Control Relay 29 MATEL E eae T eas 18 77 174 183 MCA um p S TUN 78 MDRM W 81 Sis SERERE 17 18 19 97 106 Merce COM PROFIBUS dept sm ad bind id 90 Me MO oue nis gE TIT D M MM mu IU Uu leui UN 52 Miseible Event Drihi oe epit e boo tester suse ta aea eed ose cua 260 Discrete MADRID iori er t E ect ti en aca ite ui 260 MOodenr dialog e e e avena 58 Monitor Broken Transmitter 1 177 189 400 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop PARE ae 176 187 Monitor EoW HI9l eod bor ust dta ut duit o decia dt 175 185 Monitor 175 185 Monitor Rate of Chang 176 189 Monitor Remote Setpoint Nl 175 Motor Control A lari o a PI eee 78 Motor
47. 505 WorkShop Text Text Box Description The Text box allows you to place textual information such as copyright software version or other text into your RLL program The instruction forms a single network and takes no action The Text Box s sole purpose is for documentation The text box can hold up to five lines of 40 characters each Characters allowed in the text box are A through Z 0 through 9 space and printable special characters Text must be entered within quotation marks PROGRAM UHIT 6 COHTROL VERSIOH 1 3 COPTRIGHT 1334 AB C IHC DESCRIPTION COHTROL UHIT 6 OF THE WIDGET Table to Word TTOW The Table to Word TTOW instruction copies a word in a table and places it in another location The operation of the TTOW instruction is described below The Reset must be on for the instruction to be executed When the Enable turns a copy is made of the specified word in the table TS The index IN indicates which word in the table is copied The value contained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 when N is the length of the table If 0 lt IN lt N the word is copied If N lt IN or N lt 0 the word is not copied The word is placed in the memory location specified by WD After the word is placed there the value contained by the index is incremented by one If both Enable and Reset remain on one word is duplicated each scan If the Enable turns off while the Reset is on the ind
48. 77 Control Relay MICINOFY hudson anise 77 Special Memory Tem 77 Temporary 77 Variable Memory cccccsecceeecececeeeceeecseeceeesseesaeesaeeseeeseeesaeesasesesesaees 77 Constant D 77 Status Word 77 Timer Counter Memory 78 Table Move nnn nnn nnne nnne nnne nnne nis 79 iusso titio dmn dett suu on ite dte be cutn 79 Shift Register 80 PRU IVICIN ORY 81 PGTS Discrete Parameter 82 PGTS Word Parameter 4 82 User External Subroutine Memory 82 Global Memory 575 ere xiu iei ues 83 57 SONNY sei doen a ina E pa hoe Ca i 83 WO COMO Ui EE TL TEL 94 Controller Functionality in Configuration 94 Configuration 94 Accessing Configuration unite ER 94 Configuring
49. If the Re read box was checked in the Documentation Setup group box of the Add Device or Modify Device dialogs then this combo box would be periodically depending on the update rate flushed and reassigned Description An address and or tag must be present to edit this field Descriptions will be stored in database files containing addresses and their corresponding tags When a key is hit in this column or the user clicks in this column a vertically scrolling multi line edit box will appear containing the current description if one exists Approximately 6 rows can be viewed at one time Unlike other in place edit boxes within the trend window this edit box will accept carriage returns Selecting the tab key or clicking outside this edit box will enter the description into the database A description can be successfully deleted by activating the edit box removing all the text then entering the info by one of the methods described above Editing a description will cause an update of all other columns Value Data Value with format indicator This column enables you to view data values This field is not editable When the trend window is switched to offline mode or online pause mode this field will display the last value read from the server Addresses or tags that are entered while the trend window is offline or online paused will all display a 0 value Time Stamp Time that data value was read and put into the server cache
50. PCT POPE 11 12 Cable Pin for R5 232 POPS n mt Geta fue Deis eared esate 12 SUDEOBCTIO quie uit 313 Call SUDPOUTINE SBR aiios 293 Chanoine Ladder a tnanduei eared 133 Chanem Loop Mode a 134 T E O 75 Clamp Setpoint Te esses ee pe i 176 185 C ee E 43 48 86 108 109 110 120 154 Clear Porced Element bro 123 VLC INO EV 154 Clearmea Base TOC onbrS uFaUOH 86 154 um ETE DT T 113 247 COMIN Do e or ET SOLE 247 CODUTHIT ten ake 48 49 50 55 110 120 126 159 160 Commn ee rere OS 160 COM ET 200 E e Ud 87 ah 58 55 160 165 348 Cable ii es 11 Communications 55 58 61 62 63 64 65 69 COMPILE
51. Read Only does not work without a password Full Access Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for full read write access This option is written to the controller when you perform an Open function Full Access does not work without a password 147 PLC Password Alias Online access to many PLC s can be restricted with its onboard password feature This PLC password is a case insensitive alohanumeric string of up to 8 characters When attaching online to a PLC containing a password the Enter Password dialog below requests the correct PLC password before allowing access to the PLC Enter Password Enter PLC Password Hs Figure 6 14 his PLC password is actually stored in the PLC Therefore programming packages other than 505 WorkShop also request the same PLC password when attaching to the PLC Some administrators prefer using 505 WorkShop but are aware their PLCs can be accessed through other programming packages when users know the actual passwords stored in the PLCs These administrators may place an additional layer of security over the onboard PLC password feature by using PLC Password Aliases Administrators maintain a list of PLC password aliases in 505 WorkShop These aliases are case insensitive alohanumeric strings up to 8 characters long and are stored on the PC on which 505 WorkShop runs Each alias is associated with a PLC password stored in a PLC When PLC password
52. 218 218 oe 218 Data Menu Functionality 219 MMOL RSS 219 DIZO Muri 219 219 E in ti I 219 E DO 221 Select c 221 Log Status VV INGOW is ode eO ei eue Sav eee el eas 221 Log Status Window Creation 222 Log Status Setup Dialog 222 Error Response DISlOQ sus ceci di rcm dee 223 iN Iioc Hm 224 Creating a Trend VVIDdOW uota esi ceo Mp epa E Eae MORS Rota 224 Configuring FT Trend Devies 225 Adding ated yaad een M DL re LIM RE 22 BI i istego de R m CEN 229 Trend Window Graph Setup essere 230 cc ER 231 Trend Window Setup Trend 232 TRENGING IMGEINOGS ct Tec 233 Trend Window Setup 234 Trend Window Setup Time Stamp 235 Erena MANGON Aute T 236 DATA Menu 238 EANO
53. 7 Enterthe share address documentation program name in the Shared File and Path line or select Browse to locate an existing file 8 Click Next and enter the refresh rate time lag between updates from other users of the database Valid times are from 1 to 1440 minutes 9 Click Next and Finish 10 Click OK or press Enter to load NOTE your controller is a 575 refer to Connecting Online to 575 in this chapter for information on selecting Application ID and configuring ports Transfer Offline Program to Online 505 WorkShop allows you to transfer an existing offline logic file to an online 505 controller Editing or modifying a program online may produce unexpected or hazardous results To transfer an existing offline program to online 1 Select Transfer Online from the File menu Ctrl B Result The Open Program dialog box appears Figure 3 6 2 Select OK to Transfer 26 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Connecting Online to 575 When connecting to a 575 controller either from Fast PLC Connect or the Open Program window configure the Application ID and Port Settings before the online connection is made Figure 3 7 120 20 165 Figure 3 7 To connect to a 575 online 1 Type the letter A to Z of the application you want to connect to in the Connect ID field 2 Click on the Set Current Port ID and the Connect button to go online or double click on the highlighte
54. If you are saving documentation to an online logic program and the last network header exceeds the number of networks addresses an error message appears Click Yes to discard the extra network address headers or No to cancel the save procedure oimilarly if you attempt to save a logic program and the number of networks addresses exceeds the saved headers an error message appears Click Yes to continue saving the program Click No to cancel the save procedure Editing or modifying a program online may produce unexpected or hazardous results oave Program As Offline Use Save Program As to save the active logic program with a different program name This is useful when maintaining the original without changes For example open file ABC FTK make changes select Save Program As and save the program as DEF FTK Now you have two files ABC FTK retained its same condition before you opened it and DEF FTK that contains changes made to ABC FTK NOTE You must validate logic before saving If you have not done so a message appears stating changes to logic have not been validated or entered Changes cannot be saved until logic has been validated and entered Click Validate Logic on the toolbar 3 or select Validate and Enter Logic from the Program menu Complete necessary changes to logic and try to save the program again To save a logic program with a new file name 1 Select Save As from the File menu Result The Save As dia
55. NOTE Only validated and entered logic is considered part of the current program Thus logic not entered and validated will not show in the Cross Reference Table See Validate and Enter Logic in this chapter Type in the starting address in the corresponding address box or network number in the corresponding network box if selected Click on the Refresh button The cross reference will display the selected information in the view window The address is displayed on the left side with the network number next to the element The Tag and Description of the selected address are displayed on the bottom left of the screen Select the logic item you want to view from the view window Click the Goto button to jump to the first occurrence of the address you have highlighted or you can double click on the item to do the same NOTE the Cross Reference Table Status is not current the title line gives the current status of the cross reference click the Build Table button to update the table Close the Cross Reference window by double clicking on the Control menu box in the upper right corner of the Cross Reference window NOTE you have Update Cross Ref Table checked in the Program Setup all changes made to segments that are validated and entered are automatically updated in the Cross Reference window FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Ladder Network Cross Reference In both online and offline programming you can track addre
56. Process Variable Alarm High High Enter real number in engineering units must be greater than or equal to high Alarm value and less than or equal to high range of Process Variable Remote Setpoint Select NONE if there is no remote setpoint Otherwise enter an address V K WX WY or LMN in the REMOTE SETPOINT field Clamp Setpoint Low High Enter values for the setpoint limits in the CLAMP SETPOINT LIMITS field If there are no limits enter zeroes in the High and Low fields Loop Gain Enter the value for the tuning constant LOOP GAIN in this field See Note 1 below Reset Time Enter the value for the tuning constant Reset Time INTEGRAL TIME in this field See Note 1 below 185 Rate Derivative Time Enter the value for the tuning constant RATE DERIVATIVE TIME in this field See Note 1 below NOTE tis not always necessary to have full three mode PID control of a loop Parts of the PID equation can be eliminated by choosing appropriate values for the gain Kc reset Ti and rate Td thus yielding a P PD I and even an ID or a D loop To eliminate integral action set Ti to infinity To eliminate derivative action set Td to zero To eliminate proportional action set Kc to zero Freeze Blas Select YES or NO in the Freeze Bias field Select No to have the bias adjusted when the output goes out of range Select Yes to have the bias frozen when the output goes out of range Derivative Gain Limi
57. V W G Bit Operations Bit Clear BITC The Bit Clear instruction clears a specified bit to zero When the input is on the BITC instruction is executed The output is turned on during each scan in which the instruction is executed The operation is as follows Bit N of element A is cleared to 0 is power is passed BITC Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 Parameter A Word Address Form B Parameter N Constant Bit Number 1 16 most significant bit is 1 least significant bit is 16 Bit Pick BITP The Bit Pick Instruction BITP examines the status of a specified bit When the input is turned on the BITP instruction is executed The status of bit N of input element A is checked as follows Q The output is turned on if the selected bit is 1 Q The output is turned off if the selected bit is 0 BITP Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 Parameter A Word Address Form B Parameter N Constant Bit Number 1 16 most significant bit is 1 least significant bit is 16 264 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Set BITS The Bit Set Instruction BITS sets a specified bit to one When the input is on the BITS instruction is executed The operations executed is as follows Bit N of word A is set to 1 if power is passed BITS Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 Word Address Form B Param
58. a ie 292 FUNG I 320 HLYcommiunicatlols PEU EDI 50 selecting network node 59 lab acr c TOR EET 134 Hardware Requirements Pc S ue UE SONOS P TES REN UA 4 High Process Range ANA 175 184 MM OES AC VED uti ND MT Meu M Md md MM M d 141 HOCE e VS tert eat 98 167 MOU OVS 167 1 VO CORSE AO E m 94 85 86 Configuration Guidelines senta nn nnn nennen eene 64 Clearing a Base W O Comm surat OM dps en FM NE 66 I O Configuring Procedure Due 85 398 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop HOT d abate 321 Image Register Memory ood atleast AE A ERE A 77 Immediate Closed 248 Immediate 247 Immediate I O Read Write 302 APO OM PH 52 95 Merse etiem UT heal LL Uem 52 Importing Configuration Data From COM PROFIBUS Into 505 WorkShop 89 Importing
59. 1023 Analog Alarms 128 Configuration 505 Channel Base 1 0 1 15 Profibus OP Slave 1 112 Contig Memory eere Registers O gt Memory 126624 oe Figure 3 12 2 Click on the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to print For each item selected you can choose sort options and the information you want to include for reports The Selected Items window displays the print range of each print item to be printed 34 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Print Logic and SFs Click the Logic and SFs button to print the following All logic ladder SFS and SFP Selected logic ladder SFS or SFP Selected ladder in address or network mode Selected Special Function lines Inline Xref Ladder with Addresses Tags Descriptions or Headers Multiple or single networks addresses per page The Print Logic and SFs dialog box determines which items are printed Figure 3 13 and zn r Ladder Dist m Sis A a d oes E EE C Addgss Mode Wn umn Wi i Figure 3 13 Click the All check box to print the entire range of the item selected To print a selection deselect the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box If you selected ladder to print the ladder reference numbering can be either PLC memory address mode or network address mode The selected radio button below ladder range det
60. 128 On ilu NE 263 Complete Cross en eco uio haste oasis 124 COMPLE TR CS CAP c C 78 81 153 Configuring FTLogger sess avd ocean ods EE oases aes 205 Contmb rihe ET Trend Devices eoo tepida inu hp ts dcm ic ino 225 Configuring I O Modules in COM PROFIBUS 68 Connect the Communications 11 Connect the Module To thes SUNG Ie D cech orante a eb ee Pee e edidic Citi Ped 65 Connect OUr PC 10 63 Connecting Online to 2 979 a tes a esie nM testa tuc m DR 22 23 25 26 27 394 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Connecting 9 Comec 22 Connec iN O POC TT TEENS 21 22 69 Constant E NR t Uu 75 77 Control Relay Rx C a 77 Controller Functionality in Configuration
61. Contents of parameters are stored in PGTS discrete and word parameter areas When you use a parameter in the subroutine refer to discrete points as B n and words as W n where n number of the parameter You must enter the parameters consecutively An error will be displayed if you do not f you do not need to specify parameters it is recommended that you use the GTS instruction instead The GTS instruction uses less L memory While you can still access any memory location from a subroutine the PGTS allows you create a generic subroutine that is called by multiple PGTS instruction varying the parameters Ifyou use an instruction that copies long words into or from the subroutine you need to allocate a parameter for each word of each long word that is copied NOTE void a direct reference in a subroutine to a memory location that is also identified as a parameter in the PGTS instruction If you don t you may create a condition where the value of the parameter and the value in the memory location do not agree PGTS Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Program Number Constant 1 32 IN input Word Bit Form A Word Form C Bit 10 output 296 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Parameterized Go to Subroutine 0 PGTSZ The PGTSZ instruction operates similarly to the PGTS instruction The PGTSZ calls an RLL subroutine for execution and passes parameters to it Unlike PGTS the PGTSZ clears all discrete I O parame
62. If your controller has an RS 422 port you can connect through the RS 422 port on your programming device Use the pin out values shown in Figure 2 4 for the RS 422 cable Signal Pin 1 1 dil 5 GHO Dl 2 7 D ga 3 9 5 0l O Type hale Connector Figure 2 4 RS 422 Pin Values Ethernet Connection For Ethernet connection you need a compatible Ethernet card in your computer a Siemens PPX 505 cp2572 TCP IP Ethernet card installed in your 505 system and the appropriate cabling For more information on setting up your Ethernet connection refer to the Simatic Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP2572 User Manual order number PPX 505 8132 1 13 505 Programming Software for Windows 14 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 3 505 WorkShop Basics Welcome to 505 WorkShop Software Features If you are new to the Windows environment we suggest reading the preceding chapter before continuing with this chapter This chapter will get you started using 505 WorkShop Although you should progress at a rate comfortable for you we recommend following the manual outline in your approach to programming Advancing through the chapters in this order will help ensure a more efficient use of the software The remaining chapters in order include 505 WorkShop Basics Q 505 WorkShop Setup PLC Configuration Programming
63. Jet 4 D DLE DB Mircanit OLE DB lor Indeang Serve Microsoft OLE Prosite bor intere Publi Microsoft OLE bor Dise GLE DB Ir SOL ense DLE DB Singin MS Dass hsps OLE 06 Pecuder for Services Figure 22 2d The activity audit can also be written to the Application Log of the computer running the FasTrak Security Server Click the Write activity through the Security Server radio button the select the Machine Name of the computer on which the FasTrak Security Server is installed The Application Log may also be viewed used Windows Event Viewer More information for this utility is found in Chapter 5 of this manual or by clicking here 355 Figure 22 2e Audits written to Windows Activity Logs may be read with the Windows Event Viewer which is found in the Windows NT 2000 XP Administrative Tools menu 356 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 357 505 WorkShop 14 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security Overview The WorkShop Password Security feature allows one or more security administrators to maintain a list of users and their access privileges Access privileges restrict which functions of the application such as online and offline editing I O forcing loading saving changes to disk etc individual users can perform Additional on line security can be achieved usin
64. Table 9 4 lists the loop tuning errors written to the Status Variable word Table 9 4 Status Code Bit Values r reserved abuses c complete aperatianis compete evo ero camition detected W vABring Comi Condition detected meaningsdependert anc evebits x indevant fo this condition rcew fghi 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 1000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0010 1000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0101 0101 xx01 0101 xx10 0101 01 0101 10 0101 xxx0 11xx 0101 1 00xx 0101 xxx1 01xx 0101 xxx1 10xx 0101 1 11xx 0101 1 0101 1 0101 1 0101 1 0101 1 0110 0110 0000 0000 0000 0110 0001 0110 0010 0110 0011 Description SmarTune in progress or not active Not active Waiting in SmarTune queue Waiting for Loop to enter manual mode Wait 1 PV value stabilize Wait 2 PV value stabilize Wait 3 PV value stabilize Calculating Tuning Parameters SmarTune complete with no errors or warnings SmarTune complete with warning s Data questionable tunin
65. When the count is invalid or any reference data element are undefined bits 6 and 11 in STWO1 are set and STW200 contains a value of 5 The contents of the destination are not changed You can specify the type of the data element to be moved can be a byte 8 bits long word 16 bits or long words 32 bits Q The source can be specified as a constant value signed integer a direct address or an indirect address You can specify an index for the source address using SI as an index into a table when you want to copy elements of a table to a destination SI designates the relative element in the table reference by TS which is to be copied The element TS 0 is the first element in the table SI can be a Constant 0 65535 You can leave the field blank or enter a 0 for no indexing You can enter any readable word defined in the table below that gives the element number of the first element to copy If an indirect source address is used the controller first resolves the address and then it indexes it You can specify a destination address by using the TD field You can specify a direct address any writeable word MOVE copies the source elements into the memory location starting at this address You can also specify an indirect address The long word at this indirect address must contain another address and MOVE copies the source elements into the memory locations start at this second address You can specify an index into the dest
66. ade i tei ne fe 55 165 Assisen an IP Address to the o eer beu Coe fa ehe tui bee esas op Lo GEIL 64 ASSIEH SV MINIONS 2 o Del aec cda D ed Gols 55 165 B irruere Pn CR 165 Assigning or Modifying Profibus 91 ASVIBChEOHOUS dati 87 c 58 BCD DB tiii Eid ixe buda 269 BCDBIN ODCEAIOBs s ota rum eeu agente 311 Binary to BCD CBD Phe Gunn ieee 269 Bib oin EE AN VE AE E EER E A E 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 122 174 183 191 193 E A EE 264 Piek BELE krasen n 264 Dit Seb oM 63 Bit BEIS 265 lip da 80 Shitt Resister ii 265 ll II 79 82 174 183 192 193 IDI AIAG loe desde opo neci 48
67. 2ms 12ms 20s where X is real time in seconds This value should be increased if a SmarTune session takes an excessive amount of time with a status of calculating see Table 9 4 and Status Variable Remember that as this value is increased PLC scan time will increase while a SmarTune session is calculating 202 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 203 505 WorkShop 10 FTLogger FT Trend FILogger collects data from multiple PLC devices to selected database files Addresses are entered in a spreadsheet format with up to 1 000 addresses per log window Data is logged based on a specific time frame or used defined trigger Configuring FTLogger Devices To configure a device you need to set up addresses using the Device Source Configuration screen Only devices from running servers can be configured Opening a log window starts the server and it will continue to run throughout the duration of the application The Device Source Configuration screen is disabled if no servers are running Figure 0 8 Device Source Configuration Doc File Path Delete Devices Batchb5 FOSS erver CONTROLSHO device COM1 FOSS ever H SCONTAOLSH Device Test Station BUSS ever e COMNTAROLSHO TET Configuration File Select Figure 0 8 Q Two different messages are available in the static message box Add delete or modify for running
68. 343 Te pitik Tot 100 X k Tae Tak TabDot Tale Tab TabDot ik Ta Rez tartbite rk TabDot C77 Panier Dez Addrzz 17100 wi value oT anker Table Sbring Address A VH mou 1 ds tom Emir Uu ate Sete unm be m vun rcc 565 vum 9 Wa SEU Rt Riu cm este Va Figure 11 51 SDT Statement Example Res kri Bll Iz OTT Value otes mer wn moued Tom rrr OF errs OF rrr a on errs OF Before the SDT executes the pointer V500 contains 0 zero When the statement executes the pointer increments by 1 and the value in V200 is moved to V100 This process repeats each time the statement executes After the last word is moved the pointer resets to O 344 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop oynchronous Shift Register The Synchronous Shift Register statement builds a table that functions as synchronous shift register The SSR format is shown in Figure 11 52 Register Start Status Bit Hegister Length Aisthe starting address for the shift register Bis the status bit C or Y and is turned on when the register is empty Q Cis the length of the shift register The maximum number of elements stored the register is C If a constant
69. Addresses Tags Descriptions Assign Tags Assign Addresses Column Width Description Rows Tag Rows Use TISOFT Keys Status Thickness Logic Tab Special Functions Instruction Width 56 Displays the ladder grid when selected When selected the current ladder instruction is saved as the cursor You have to manually select the pointer cursor when you are done editing the current instruction If not selected the cursor changes back to the pointer after inserting an instruction Displays ladder network and SF headers when selected Changes the font displayed in the active program Any active Windows font can be selected To change the font 1 Click Font and the Font dialog box is displayed 2 Choose a font font style and font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 3 Click OK in the Font dialog box to save your changes and return to Program Setup Click Cancel to make no font changes and return to Program Setup Description Displays addresses when selected Displays tags when selected Displays tag descriptions when selected When selected a window automatically appears if an address that does not have a tag attached to it is entered in ladder It allows you to assign a tag description and comment to the address When selected a window automatically appears if a tag that does not match any current tags is entered in ladder It allows you to assign an address de
70. Click the PLC Configuration check box from the Print dialog to print the following a 505 Channel Base Q Profibus DP Slave I O PLC Memory Configuration I O Tags and Descriptions To change the PLC Configuration properties click the PLC Configuration button on the Print dialog box The Print PLC Configuration dialog box appears Figure 3 16 2001 UE ater an sme m uc ip MEE UMS E zs 3 d 506 5 Channel Base E o dem F it T Tags ILE 7 7 Portes DP Slave e m Descriptions Figure 3 16 37 505 Programming Software for Windows Click the All check box to print the entire range of items To print a selection deselect the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box To include loop headers with the printout click the Headers check box When entering a range for channel and base numbers the first entry before the comma is the channel number The second entry after the channel number and comma is the base number For Example In Figure 3 16 the printout would start at channel 1 Base and end at channel 1 Base 15 The tags and descriptions can be individually turned on or off To include with the PLC Configuration printout select the appropriate check box under Include 1 Click the Doc Font button to change the Tag and Description printout font in the active program Result The Font dialog box appears 2 Choose a new font
71. Communication Settings IP Part Response Time Out sec Use Packed Path Description Address 192 168 0 14 192 18 014 Add Delete Close Figure 4 7 2 Enter the communication settings Then Click the Accept button Communication Settings Camp Protocol The Use Camp option is for optimizing upload and download of PLC programs specifically to CTI 2772 cards This is defaulted to Yes and should only be turned off if the card does not support the CAMP protocol Packed Opcode The Use Packed option is for optimizing the Ladder Status and Data Window updates This is defaulted to Yes and should only be turned off if the Packed opcode is not supported These settings are held in the computer Registery Path Descriptions When attaching to a PLC using TCP IP the user is given a path description This description represents a specific TCP IP address ifa PLC The description and associated path is entered at the bottom of this dialog IP Port Any number is acceptable as long as it does not interfere with other protocol numbers This number must match the IP port configured in the 2572 Ethernet TCP IP module Response sec Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the software waits for a response from the PLC before returning a time out error Any whole number between 5 and 25 can be used Retries Specifies the numb
72. Enter the user name and current password Then enter and verify the user s new password and click OK If the entered user name is in the list of users previously added by the security administrator the Enter current password is compared to the password already associated with that user If the Enter current password matches the existing password for that user the Enter new password and Verify new password are compared with each other If the two new passwords match then the new password replaces the current 371 Switching User If the security administrator specifies user passwords are requested only once when WorkShop is started the password entered at startup and the access privileges associated with it is in effect until WorkShop is exited Another password is not requested until WorkShop is restarted However the Switch user name and option allows another user to enter another password without requiring the application be exited and restarted Enter the user name and password of the user who will assume operational control of WorkShop If a valid user name and its matching password are entered the security access piede are reset to those of the new user User Security Setup _ E User Security Options II oe Change u n fen E abe 2 m Figure 14 10 372 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop NT Authentication Security
73. Inc 505 WorkShop Using the menu to enter instructions with the keyboard 1 Inthe active Special Function Program use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the spot you wish to place the instruction 2 Typein the character mnemonic for the instruction or Press open the selection Instruction dialog box from the Program menu 3 Use the arrow keys to move up and down the Group and Instruction scroll boxes and the Tab key to move between the boxes 4 Highlight desired instruction and press Enter to insert the instruction 5 Steps 1 through 5 for each instruction you want to enter 107 505 Programming Software for Windows Editing Logic 505 WorkShop uses a number of time saving editing features to help you complete your programming tasks These include Cut Copy Paste Paste with Rewire Insert Clear Delete These editing features are accessed through the Edit menu and keyboard commands Please see Chapter 3 505 WorkShop Basics for a more complete description of the edit ing features Cut Copy and Paste are probably the most frequently used editing features The list below describes Cut Copy and Paste differences Cut Removes the selection from the program and places it in the clipboard Copy Copies the selection and places it in the clipboard Paste Inserts clipboard contents into the program at the cursor location Paste With Insert
74. This column cannot be directly edited Status Status of the data read from the device Any errors reading addresses will be displayed here Since many addresses are read in one packet a status error is usually displayed in multiple rows For example assume we configured 200 V addresses in a 505 PLC and we were displaying them all in Fttrender If a packet can consist of 256 addresses and we enter V201 a status error will be displayed on all 201 rows because the entire packet would have failed by including 1 erroneous address Unlike SoftShop ControlShop does not implement the type of error checking that would prevent a user from entering an invalid address so it is up to PLC device to report these types of errors When offline all the status rows will display the string Offline This field is not displayed by default 237 DATA Menu Functionality Format Selecting a format will display and trend the value that the cursor is on as well as any highlighted values in that format Size Allows you to select a 16 bit or 32 bit format size Next Previous Based on the vender address get the next device register address Based on the vender address get the Previous device register address Fill This will fill the trend window with addresses that are set up in the dialog below Fill Start Address m Start Apply Help Source Destination C End
75. This process continues as long as the input to the RLL SFPGM instruction is on The output remains on until the input to the RLL SFPGM instruction is turned off Q Acyclic SF program is removed from the queue when it completes a scheduled cycle and the SFPGM instruction s input is turned off SFPGM Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types SF Program Number Constant 1 1023 288 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop opecial Function Subroutine SFSUB The Special Function Subroutine SFSUB instruction is used to call a SF subroutine for execution If the subroutine number is 0 on the instruction parameters are evaluated this is a special SFSUB 0 You can use a SFSUB 0 to executed up to 5 expressions without calling an actual SF subroutine or program The programming device may limit the length of the expression that can be placed into the P n fields Multiple SFSUB instructions with the same value of Program Number can be used in your program since your application may require multiple accesses to the same SF subroutine but with different parameters for each access The field P n can be one of the following types Q Constant any integer or real number Discrete or word element Q Expression an expression is a logical group of tokens evaluating to an address or a value where a token is the smallest indivisible unit element address operator constant and parenthesis The SFSUB instruction can be used anywhere within
76. X Y C WX WY K V TCP TCC STW DSP DCP DSC DCC all Gs VMS DRUM MOVE OS TIMER and COUNTER Trace does not work however on expression parameters in SFSUB Invoking Address Trace To create an Address Trace both online and offline 1 Select Address Trace from the View menu The Address Trace window appears Figure 6 09c If you have more than one program loaded the information displayed is for the program in the active window drase Tiare G2 Figure 6 09 The list box has five columns each one holds a location The location consists of rung number and item found The list box displays the locations in order of rung number The GOTO button closes the Address Trace window and places the cursor in ladder logic window at the network number selected in the Address Trace list box 2 Close or ESC or clicking on the X in the upper right corner of the dialog closes the dialog Unique Address Unique determines if an element already exists in your ladder program and if so gives you the location For example if a TIMER is needed for a new feature you can use the Unique function to see if TMRnnnn is already used Since a TMR is a global memory box 505 WorkShop also checks to see if any TMR TMRF CTR UDC MCAT or DCAT has the same nnnn designator NOTE Unique checks only for occurrences of the designated element in L memory It does not search for an element in Loops Analog Alarms SFPGMs SFSUBs Intel
77. mismatch handling and RS 232 port communications consult the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS DP RBC User Manual for a description of the software parameters of the RBC Required You can use either the ID or the Order Number list to select I O module types and assign them to the appropriate slots in your slave device The Comment field is optional Do not fill in the Addr or Addr fields you will assign starting I O addresses to each module in 505 WorkShop and any data you assign to these fields in COM PROFIBUS is overwritten Optional Allows you to add or delete slaves from your configuration later without re entering all data into COM PROFIBUS Required For convenience you can select the disk drive and directory where your 505 WorkShop program is stored and assign the binary file the same name as the program where you intend to use the I O An extension 2BF is automatically assigned to the binary file do not change this extension You are ready to perform configuration tasks in 505 WorkShop Table 5 3 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Importing Configuration Data From COM PROFIBUS Into 505 WorkShop The 505 WorkShop Profibus DP I O dialog box allows you to import configuration data from the binary file that you created with COM PROFIBUS described above The steps you take are the same regardless of whether you are importing data from an entirely new configuration or merely importing selected items that
78. the current step is stored as a 16 bit word in DSC Memory The current count for this step is stored as a 16 bit word in DCC Memory 81 505 Programming Software for Windows PGTS Discrete Parameter Area The Parameter Go To Subroutine PGTS discrete parameter area Figure 5 3 is an area of memory within the controller that is reserved for holding the status of discrete bits referenced as parameters in a PGTS RLL instruction Because up to 32 PGTS subroutines can be programmed the controller has 32 discrete parameter areas each capable of storing the status for 20 discrete parameters When you use a parameter in the subroutine refer to discrete points as Bn where n the parameter number discrete parameter area Values are copied inta the discrete parameter area 10 be used by the subroutine 2 3 4 5 5 Discrete inputs Discrete outputs Control relays When parameters are 5 Specitied read verite changed values are copied back Into appropriate memory areas Figure 5 3 PGTS Word Parameter Area The PGTS word parameter area Figure 5 4 is an area of memory within the controller that is reserved for holding the contents of 16 bit words referenced as parameters in a PGTS RLL instruction Because up to 32 PGTS subroutines can be programmed the controller has 32 word parameter areas each capable of storing the status for 20 word parameters When you use a parameter in the subroutine
79. to the step specified in DSP If the Start input turns off and Enable Reset remains on the drum remains at the current step DSC and DCC holds its current count All coils maintain the condition specified by the drum mask When the drum is at the preset step the output coils follow the states specified by the drum mask for that step even if the Enable Reset input is off ake care to program the mask with a bit pattern that is a safe step for the Preset step The drum advances to the next step immediately if the Jog input transitions from off to on and the Enable Reset input is also on EDRUM Parameter Valid Parameter Types Type Varies with Instruction reference number Refer to controller user manual for number configured supported The assigned instruction number must conform to the requirements of memory drum memory discussed on page 4 7 in Section 4 2 PRESET 1 16 Step to which the drum returns when reset SEC ONT 0 32 767 Time base Amount of time in seconds for one count EVENT Coils 5 Mask next step when count equals zero Y C B or Coils controlled by drum CO represents no coil blank 1 16 Step number 0 32767 Specifies time that drum remains at step Actual time step equals CNT x SEC ONT in seconds 0 1 Mask controls coils turned on 1 or off 0 258 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Discrete point that starts countdown of a step and that advances the drum to the 505 WorkShop Do
80. 11 2 Enter information in the Device Name Communications Type and Server fields Notes The first running server alphabetically appears in the Server field Modification of the device name automatically updates the doc filename so that they mirror one another The Re read file every lt gt minutes field is not available at this time 3 Click the Comm Setup button to initialize vendor specific device settings as shown for Siemens 505 Figure 0 12 207 Communication Setup x Communications Type COM Response sec Cancel Dial Modem Modem Baud 9600 Telephone Dialing Modern Force TES Initialization Command Humber to Dial Use Tw AT NO Address 0 Masimum Secondary 254 Secondary Figure 0 12 4 Click OK to send the configuration to the server Result A connection is made to the doc database file for reading and writing If the database you are connecting to does not match specifications such as a mismatch between table name or field names the Documentation Database Mapping screen appears to map specific fields so that the software knows where various types of documentation reside Figure 0 13 Documentation Database Mapping for nomatch mdb x The Table name andor Field settings are different from our standard Please enter the correct mappings T able M ames
81. 164 165 DocumentationLNetwork 32 158 m Ladder R 165 DRUM E IM MM LM E 75 81 Dron M eDiOr y mer UE M 81 73 Edit3 9 18 21 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 86 95 96 104 106 108 109 110 112 120 133 135 154 159 163 169 171 181 190 193 Siy 89 Edit biduum 169 Print Only T 169 OO Alar MS cus cosa 171 43 86 108 109 110 120 154 ees 9 43 44 45 108 109 133 135 vip M nc ER 3 43 44 95 108 Delete i opti RR 43 108 109 110 120 159 163 171 193 IBI ES Daen e PH 190 Fod Eo iC e TM 112 e ER adic E P E na A EEEE AS 18 43 50 96 106 108 110 193 396 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Ladder EAO i oiii pae del fait dinde ated neo Nene eee 96 NN ETT UT 48 49 50 95 INS GIN SW Oleh 21 50 96 106
82. 18 505 WorkShop You can create tables of addresses store them to a and load them again offline or online To save a list of addresses select Save Template from the Data menu To load a list of addresses select Load Template from the Data menu Select On Off from the right mouse menu to set or reset bit addresses oelect Force On Off from the right mouse menu to force on or off bit addresses Select Force Word from the right mouse menu to force a word address Select Clear Force from the right mouse menu to clear the forced address Use Clear All Forces from the right mouse menu to clear all forced addresses Press Show forces from the right mouse menu to display all forced addresses You will be prompted to enter a starting address and any addresses that are forced will be displayed Press Status On Off from the right mouse menu to turn off the status updates Select Fill from the mouse menu to enter addresses from the current location with the next addresses until the end of the window is reached For instance if your current address location is 3000 in the fifth row pressing Fill will enter the addresses starting in row 6 with address 30002 etc Double click the Control Menu box in the upper left corner of the active window to exit the Data Window Customizing the Display The Data Window can be customized to display Tags Descriptions both Tags and Descriptions or neither These columns can be displayed if
83. 25 pin or 9 pin connector computer end and a 9 pin connector PLC end If your computer has a 9 pin COM port and you have a 25 pin cable you can use a 9 to 25 pin converter to connect the communications cable to the processor If your computer has a 25 pin COM port this converter is not necessary The pin outs for the communications cable are shown in the following figures 11 505 Programming Software for Windows Cable Pin Outs for RS 232 C Ports Connect your programming device to the controller with a double shielded null modem RS 232 C cable Figures 2 1 2 2 and 2 3 show pin outs for the RS 232 C cables Controller FOUL SHIELD Prg Device FOUL SHIELD Bop Transmit TO Receive 2 3 4 5 B DISR T Signal Ground 0 2 Orainwire Orainwire Coppertail Shield Coppertail Shield Connector Shell Connector Shell Pi P2 Transmit TO Receive RO RTS CTS OSR Signal Ground Receive Transmit Signal Ground moo ot On Lo FO LI Dirainwire Coppertail Shield Connector Shell Pi Connector Shell Pz Coppertail Shield Figure 2 2 RS 232 C 9 Pin to 25 Pin Cable 9 D Type Female Connector 9 D Type Female Connector Figure 2 3 RS 232 C 9 Pin to 9 Pin Cable 12 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Cable Pin Outs for RS 422 Ports
84. 3 The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Alarm number 1 512 depending on the processor type Alarm Title and Enable Disable state Figure 8 1 4 Select the Analog Alarm number that you want to enter or edit by using the left mouse button or the Arrow keys on the keyboard 5 To edit the selected alarm number double click on the alarm number or click on the dialog box Edit button or use the keyboard to Tab to the Edit button and press Enter The following dialog box appears Figure 8 2 171 Analog Alarm E dit Ala Tie a z dz Special Fre Dev Yellow Alam 100 0 Dev Orange Alarm 1000 mE PA Al am High E SampleRate Addr Range Pala Hii MenitorChange High PV Monitori jemote SP No Alam DO Monitor Broken mit 4 Em qm m Cn TU m ad Low rre erii BOTDSOLIQCPCBCECIKDROSOROSDUUSCSGCIA Figure 8 2 To delete Analog Alarm 1 To delete an Analog Alarm Click Alarm from the View menu Alt V A The Analog Alarm Directory dialog box appears see Figure 6 10 The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Alarm number 1 512 depending on the processor type Alarm Title and Enab
85. 42 EGINO mui 43 i x EH HD 44 uoo 45 mici NE A 45 laste VV MUIR WIC quiis balcone e Usu 46 EIE OD eut Lt A tren 47 48 Logic Edifor lt ONINE 48 OW 48 DVS rs rtg donis 49 Logic Editor EB ug 49 loda asse tremite betur s N 49 OE NU 50 LOGIC m Gy E 50 COGIC Edt Om P 50 Importing Text or Documentation Files 51 Merge Memo e TT 52 4 505 WorkShop Setup 55 CV OTIC WY ausi 55 Program PC 55 Serial or Modem Communication 58 505 WorkShop with H1 59 Access H1 Devices Using 505 5 60 Setting Up and Using TIWAY in 505 WorkShop 61 Setting Up the UNILINK HOST 61 TIWAY Setup 61 Secondary 5565 62 Using TCP IP in 505 WorkShop and Setting Up Communicat
86. 82 Using the Data ooo eee Music DIE DI 120 Using the Documentation 159 Usmo the Ladder bees ie ota 96 the a re 217 Usine the Losie EOT Wnt sis etis Coda meer nr ae ie 48 49 50 95 Using the SF Program and Subroutine Editor 104 V Enter rcr 111 Validate and Enter Logic 124 Variable Memory oet ERIS SRM NAE SIS SLM VELLE EL ULL 75 77 ORES S pP ex dieu Ue bo 174 183 IVE S UU T UM ETE 63 sus Oll eco din ME EM M I M NEUE 83 W What 18 505 WorkShop for Windows ed dE S 3 Whatis the Fas te Ee ae rere ness Rose du Reus Eu RO a e os Rs 9 Mandow bee t pod tac f oreo adea nates eo aa 17 BARI S m C 4 poate 122 Word And WAND 270 Word Exclusive Or 212 Word SIR ILS m UU MT 271 Nord Rotate WROT toco lola vive ha bas dcs ooa to victu 206 IW Ord ENTM
87. AM 01 06 00 data was successfully logged from LogSheet1 to log1 mdb t 09 59 55 AM 01 06 00 data was successfully logged from LogSheet1 to log1 mdb t 10 00 00 AM 01 06 00 data was successfully logged from LogSheet1 to log1 mdb t 10 00 05 AM 01 06 00 data was successfully logged from LogSheet1 to log1 mdb t 10 00 10 AM 01 06 00 data was successfully logged from LogSheet1 to log1 mdb al 1 Current Device Batch Current Format U16 OFFLINE Figure 0 7 221 Log Status Window Creation This window will be created and hidden upon startup To access this window you must select the Log Status menu under the main menu View A check mark next to Log Status will indicate that we are currently viewing this window Clicking again on this menu will remove the check mark and hide the window Hiding the window will remove all the entries Entries will not be added to this window until is viewable or iconized If this window is full entries will be removed from the top down as new ones are appended to the bottom Log Status Setup Dialog The log status setup dialog can be accessed by clicking on the Log Status menu under the main menu Setup This dialog is shown below Log Status Setup Source Dk Windows Cancel Help th Status Messages Include Successes Text Color Change Color Failures Mise Errors Background Color Change Status File Sa
88. Address Field MSystocessObject Em DESCRIP Field COMMENT po Description Field po Comment Field TN Figure 0 16 For the mapping to be successful you must map to all four fields from one of the tables listed in the Table Names list box The fields that are mapped must be of type Text for address tag and description and Memo for the comment field The lengths of the fields must be less than or equal to FasTrak s lengths for all fields except the comment field The max character length for Address is 64 The max character length for Tag is 32 The max character length for Description is 96 Failure to provide a valid mapping will prevent the device from being added Modifying Devices To modify a device that is already configured select the Modify Device button from the Device Source Configuration dialog and the dialog below will be displayed Modify Device Device Name OK Cancel Communications Type Setup com Help itl Server KOSS p Documentation Setup File Path E Adevicel mdb s Be read file every minute s Figure 0 17 228 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop In this dialog only the device name and documentation setup info can be modified If no trend windows are online with this device then the communication settings can also be modified If the device is
89. Block table used with the PLC Start option in the chapter on nstallation Chapter 2 An easy way to construct this table is to open a Data window see Using The Data Window and enter the desired V memory address For instance the Ladder Logic Example in the TCP IP manual assumes that the command block is located in V memory starting at location V500 From the desired location you can simply key in the values from the Startup Network Command Block example table in the manual supplying the correct IP address IP route address and subnet mask for your network For even more permanency you can put the table into K memory instead of V memory If you use the example ladder program from the TCP IP manual you can just add a MOVW box to move the values in K to V as shown in Figure 4 6 You can also trigger your logic from the first scan flag bit in status word 201 instead of creating a lock with coil C1 Lhe hee bolo mow 1 10 y mmay eee 10 e mk 2 Lage a 3 hipa by a iu a CZ lbg a come on choy al STG 10 Pate ok Tua d unn sid ascen din eae agian m TEILE 2 npe Figure 4 6 Connect the Module to the Ethernet The PPX 505 CP2572 module directly supports 10BaseT UTP cabling If your existing network does n
90. C When the input is on the instruction is executed If the input remains on the instruction is executed on every scan The WXOR has the following properties The word stored in the memory location specified by A is XORed with the word stored in the memory location B The operation is done bit by bit The words in A and B are not affected by the WXOR instruction and will retain their original values AB C 00 0 0 1 1 10 4 11 0 The result is stored in the memory location C Q If C is not zero the output is turned on when the instruction is executed f C is zero the output is turned off WXOR Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 A Word Address Form A B Word Const Form A Const 32767 32767 C Word Form B Move Instructions Move Image Register From Table MIRFT The Move Image Register From Table MIRFT instruction allows you to copy information into the control relays or the discrete image register from a table of consecutive word locations When the input is on the MIRFT instruction is executed The operation of the MIRFT instruction is defined as follows The values of up to 256 words 16 4096 bits are copied starting at the memory location specified by TS The copy is placed in the control relays or the discrete image register The LSB of the first word is copied into the point specified by IR The beginning point in the control relays or the discrete image
91. Clear Delete Insert Append and Select All View Menu Ladder Editor Special Function Editor PID Loops Alarms Documentation Window Symbol Library and Data Window are all view only Program Menu New Network Select Instruction and Validate and Enter Configuration Editing Memory configuration editing set PLC Scan Time 505 I O Edit Profibus Edit Watchdog Timer Edit and Time of Day edit Utilities Menu Diagnostics on bases Task Codes per scan Port Lockout Clear U Memory and Password FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Installing the FasTrak Key What is the FasTrak Key The 505 WorkShop software is copy protected with a device called the FasTrak Key included in your shipment To use 505 WorkShop online and save logic programs connect the FasTrak Key to a parallel printer port LPT1 LPT3 on your computer NOTE Installation of the FasTrak Key must be completed before you can run 505 WorkShop If a FasTrak Key is not detected you can enter 505 WorkShop Demo mode only The FasTrak Key will not interfere with normal port data transmissions nor will it prevent you from creating backup copies of the software Connecting the FasTrak Key To install the FasTrak Key follow the steps below 1 to which parallel port you want to connect the FasTrak Key 2 other security devices or cables attached to that port 3 the FasTrak Key to the port 4 other cables to the FasTrak Key if necessary If the device
92. Documentation unco errem b E RE sae 20 importing Textot Documentation Biles rout em rota E od dan 51 Indexed Matrix Compare IM iniecto es ut i ES chives e m B e M a ttu 263 Initialization rc HX 58 Initiatmio a3 SINGLE SCAN seo i oe ta AE E 138 Insert utm ucc 18 43 50 96 106 108 110 193 Insert New dM exon EE ene M I UU PEDE 96 Insert a NEW ROW nece ot ust Ws tutatus AME LC EA LL LE aM LE UE DUE t 96 106 Inserting an Instruction Bar Item in a 18 c tr a A AD T 3 4 7 9 16 Erak need ead toa rebos incon uale canes 3 16 Installing 505 WorkShop ooi onera ted abi aim tti a bita Mi sd O MEE 7 Installing the PROFIBUS FMS Communications Processor eeeeeeeesssessseseeeeeeeeeeee ener nennen nnns 68 DOE soe RRP ro ent unter DE 17 18 96 106 Instruction Bats ascen IER I tM US dE LEM 18 PILE SEL MATOPE raO 322 Invokinp Address Trace 5 tur tu C M uu 127 PSC SS ERROR n 63 64 65 IP Addres SES ii M EU EN UNDE 67 Aj
93. ER MERI IAS Ep tena Ec p pcd 281 Table to Word TTOW SUE oni on E pce b Fey o tao ea 283 Table P M 124 126 TASK uii psit da Edu ME 88 95 135 Task CodeS Per Sean a 140 TCP IP cos sateeteis 13 TC P IIP COrnmuticdtlonsse iOS sos tase tessa sha tee antc MUI OP 65 Temporary Memory de RM 15 77 Testing Connection with PING 65 TEX m 283 Text Text Box Description 5 283 Text Box documentalloli oo tete o a M Ond ura E E UNO Edd MM 283 The Derivative COmpone ne oco ph sna 196 The Intesral Component 195 eddie eis tumidus uet Pin TRU M 17 505 WorkShop WOBOOW ood e boc Pte cde 17 Ihe C esed aei co ra ea but i entm Prat pai uve ae ao ente eas 195 Time Compare a dioses ocaeca vt Ea diues MERE 304 Time Driven Dru
94. Enable or disable slaves 87 505 Programming Software for Windows Configuring Modules in COM PROFIBUS This section is not intended as a tutorial in COM PROFIBUS The SIMATIC 55 ET 200 Distributed I O System Manual describes how to use COM PROFIBUS consult that manual for detailed information Also COM PROFIBUS has extensive context sensitive help Your objective in creating a configuration file with COM PROFIBUS is to define module types for each slave Once you accomplish that you can export the configuration file in binary form to 505 WorkShop where you assign starting addresses to each module Table 5 3 provides the information you need in order to configure your slave devices in COM PROFIBUS Task Open a file in COM PROFIBUS Select a master Select a host Modify bus parameters Assign slave s Parameterize slave s Configure slave s Save the file Export binary file to 505 WorkShop Exit COM PROFIBUS 88 Comment You can modify an existing configuration file if appropriate or create a new file Required Choose the 505 CP5434 DP Required Choose the appropriate Series 505 CPU Optional You can accept the default settings unless you wish to modify one such as baud rate Required Choose slave s such as the 505 PROFIBUS DP RBC up to 112 Optional Note If you are configuring a 505 PROFIBUS DP RBC PPX 505 6870 you may want to change the settings for I O
95. Expanded Definition button on the Edit base dialog box 4 Use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight the desired slot number to be configured 5 Click on the Edit Slot button on the dialog box or press Enter Result The Edit I O Slot dialog box appears Figure 5 Edit 170 Slot 85 505 Programming Software for Windows Figure 5 6a 1 Enter the beginning I O address 2 Enter the number of points X Y WX or WY required for the type of module being configured 3 Ifa special function module is to be configured click the Yes Special Function radio button 4 Click on the OK button of the Edit I O Slot dialog box 5 The Edit I O Base dialog box becomes the active dialog box Figure 5 6 6 accept the changes click on the Accept button on Edit I O Base dialog box NOTE If you are online and have not yet accepted the changes to the base you can select the Read Base button on the Edit Base dialog box to reset the base display to the readings in the controller All prior changes will be lost Clearing a Base I O Configuration 1 Start from Edit I O Base dialog box Figure 5 6 2 Click on the Clear Base button on the Edit I O Base dialog box You have finished setting up the software and the hardware The next step is programming The Programming chapter discusses 505 WorkShop s many different features for developing ladder logic You can program in online or offline mode 86 FasT
96. FasTrak s Customer Service One 1 505 WorkShop with Com Profibus v5 0 software CD 505 WorkShop for Windows User s Guide this manual to attach to your computer s parallel port Com Profibus Manual 505 Programming Reference Manual 505 Programming Software for Windows System Requirements Hardware Requirements To install 505 WorkShop for Windows on your computer you need the following hardware A personal computer with an Intel Pentium 100 processor or higher 32 Mb or more of RAM An 800 X 600 VGA monitor with at least 256 colors 100 Mb free disk space on your hard drive A mouse 15 recommended but not required 505 WorkShop for Windows may not function properly on systems that are not 100 Intel compatible Certain other hardware components and peripherals can create incompatibility problems Please refer to Appendix B Troubleshooting Hardware Compatibility for a list of devices that cause compatibility problems ooftware Requirements You also need the following software loaded on your computer before you install 505 WorkShop for Windows Windows 95 98 NT 2000 or XP Parallel Port Compatibility Connecting the FasTrak Key to your computer s parallel printer port or USB is required to use 505 WorkShop for Windows except when in the demo mode Procedures for installing the FasTrak Key and 505 WorkShop for Windows are outlined in the next chapter If your
97. Field M ames Address Field Tag Field Description Field Comment Field gt TN Figure 0 13 For the mapping to be successful the fields names must map to the table names The fields that are mapped must be of type Text for address tag and description and Memo for the comment field The lengths of the fields must be less than or equal to FasTrak s lengths for all fields except the comment field The maximum character length 15 Q Address 64 32 Description 96 Failure to provide valid mapping prevents the device from being added 208 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Modifying Devices l 3 505 WorkShop To modify a device click Modify Device from the Device Source Configuration screen Result The Modify Device screen appears Figure 0 14 Modify Device Device Name Communications Iram Setup com Help Server KOSS b Documentation Setup File Path E Adevicel mdb Re tead file every minute s Figure 0 24 Enter information in the Device Name and Documentation Setup fields If the device is offline you can change the Communications Type field Click OK to send the configuration to the server Deleting Devices l To delete a device click Delete Device from the Device Source Configuration screen Result The Delete Devices screen appears Figu
98. File menu Result The PLC Type Setup dialog box appears Figure 5 1 228 Figure 5 1 NOTE to access a 545 1101 extended memory offline the extended memory check box must be selected at this point as shown in figure 5 1a EE bas asini Figure 5 1a 74 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 2 Select the appropriate PLC Type and PLC Memory Size A detailed explanation of each setup option is described on the following table Table 5 1 If shared documentation is to be associated with the new program it must be setup at this stage see Shared Documentation PLC Setup Option Description PLC Type opecifies the type of processor Selection of PLC type determines choices available for remaining setup options in the PLC Type Setup dialog box PLC Memory Size Specifies the PLC s memory size Only the valid memory sizes for the PLC selected in PLC Type are displayed Table 5 1 3 Click OK or press Enter to save your settings and return to the active logic program Changing PLC Types The PLC type can be changed even after programming has been initiated Various error or warning messages can occur when changing from one PLC type to another These error messages indicate the block and segment of the error The errors must be fixed before the new PLC s logic can be validated To change the PLC type 1 Select PLC Type Setup from the PLC Utilities menu Resu
99. If the event goes off after DCC reaches zero the drum output remains on and the MDRMD remains at the last programmed step until the drum is reset When the Enable Reset turns off the drum output is turned off and the drum returns to the step specified in DSP Ifthe start input turns off and Enable Reset remains on the drum remains at the current step DSC and DCC holds its current count All coils specified in the configurable mask maintain the condition specified by the fixed mask When the drum is at the preset step the coils specified in the configurable mask follow the states specified by the fixed mask for that step even if the Enable Reset input is off Be sure to program the mask with a bit pattern that is a safe state for the preset step The drum advances to the next step immediately if the input transitions from off to on and the Enable Reset input is also on You can use the MDRMD in applications that require a configurable on off pattern for the drum coils To do this specify all 1s for the fixed mask for every programmed step of the MDRMD and precede the MDRMD and MDRMDs coils The configurable mask table in memory must then contain the on off patterns that are to be written to the coils for each step MDRMD Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Drum Constant Only Varies with Drum configured ranges Constant Only 1 16 d Constant Only 00 001 32 676 dd Word Address V W G Mask Do not use the
100. Ifthe Enable turns off while the Reset is on the index holds its current value and the AND does not occur If the Reset turns off the index resets to O The WTTA output remains on until the last word in the table has been ANDed with the source word It then turns off The WTTA must be reset after the output turns off in order to be executed again WTTA Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 WS Word Address Form A TS Word Address Form A TD Word Address Form B IN Word Address V W G N Constant Only 1 256 285 10 The Table Or WTTO Word To Table OR WTTO instruction ORs each bit in a source word with the corresponding bit of a designated word in a table The results are placed in a destination table If either bit is 1 a 1 is stored in the destination table Otherwise the resultant bit is set to 0 The WTTO instruction is described below The Reset must be on for the instruction to be executed When the Enable turns on each bit of the source word WS and of the specified word in the table TS is compared The index IN indicates which word in the table is Ored The value contained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 where N is the length of the table lt IN lt the word is Ored IF N lt IN or N lt 0 the word in not Ored Each pair of bits is Ored and the resultant bit is placed in the destination table TD either bit is 1 then the
101. Inc 505 WorkShop To select the second option check the Copy network header check box The Copy address descriptions Check Box The documentation of each address includes the Tag Description and Description Comment The Description portion of the original address can be copied to the address which replaces it Check the Copy address descriptions check box to copy the original address s Description to the address which replaces it The Confirm each replacement Check Box Check the Confirm each replacement check box to force the search and replace process to stop and request user confirmation before performing each replacement Or uncheck this box to allow the search and replace process to proceed without pausing for user confirmation The Skip any errors Check Box oome replacements may be invalid such as replacing addresses which are beyond configured limits or selecting instructions which are not available for the PLC type When these errors occur search and replace may be set to stop display the error and request user confirmation before proceeding Alternately search and replace may ignore any errors and continue its process without pausing for user confirmation Check the Skip any errors check box to allow search and replace to continue past any errors without requesting user confirmation The Replace Button When the desired Search for and Replace with ranges have been entered click the Replace b
102. Level below for details 5 After making your selection click Next Installation begins and a message appears telling you that the 505 WorkShop Installation Utility is loading 505 Programming Software for Windows 505 WorkShop Access Level Workshop Access Level aces the of af mik S hop Ful Funi C Losd Figure 2 0 Full function install allows full access to all features of 505 WorkShop Read only install will not allow the user to access the following File Menu operations New Open Online Save Save As Import Export Merge Edit Menu Undo Cut Copy Paste Clear Delete Insert Append and Select All View Menu Ladder Editor Special Function Editor PID Loops Alarms Documentation Window Symbol Library and Data Window are all view only Program Menu New Network Select Instruction and Validate and Enter Configuration Editing Memory configuration editing set PLC Scan Time 505 I O Edit Profibus I O Edit Watchdog Timer Edit and Time of Day edit Utilities Menu PLC Operations modes PG RUN etc Profibus Operations Diagnostics on base Task Codes per scan Port Lockout Password Clear U Memory and Clear Memory Load only install will not allow the user to access the following File Menu operations New Save Save As Import Export and Merge Edit Menu Undo Cut Copy Paste
103. O modules e g the 386 ATM module the Programmable BASIC module the Servo Axis module or the High Speed Pulse Input module can update outputs even when the controller is in PROGRAM mode if your code permits If an intelligent I O module writes directly to an image register point its write takes precedence even when PGMFRZ PGMOFF is in effect This could cause unexpected control action resulting in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Do not write directly to output image register points from an intelligent I O module Instead write to a control relay or V memory location and have your RLL program copy this location to the output point Run places the controller in RUN mode beginning execution of the ladder program 3 select PROGRAM RUN mode Click on the RUN button on the PLC Operations dialog box The following message appears Run PLC Select either YES or NO 133 Changing Loop Mode When you select Loop Mode you have the following options available NOTE Your loop card cannot be in PROGRAM mode while the discrete CPU is in RUN mode Prog places the loop card in PROGRAM mode and control blocks are neither running nor being queued for running 1 Toselect LOOP PROGRAM mode Click on the Prog button on the PLC Operations dialog box The following message appears Set the loop processor to program mode Select either YES or NO Halt places the loop card in HOLD mode enabled control b
104. Operations Profibus Operations allows you to change the operations mode from Operate to Stop or Stop to Operate You can also select from Synchronous to Asynchronous or Asynchronous to Synchronous The Profibus Operations mode can be selected from the Profibus DP I O dialog box Figure 5 7 by 1 Clicking on the Profibus Ops Button or selecting Profibus Operations from the PLC Utilities menu Result The Profibus Operations dialog box appears Figure 5 9 Profibus Operations Operational Status Stop Synchronization Mode Status Synchronous Figure 5 9 Find Configured To find configured I O 1 Select PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu Result The PLC Configuration dialog box appears Figure 5 2 2 Select the Find I O button under configuration on the PLC Configuration dialog box Result The Find I O Address dialog box appears Figure 5 10 Find 170 Addres L calion oo UU US Figure 5 10 3 Enteran X Y WX or WY address and click on the Find Next button 4 Find will first search 505 I O then search PROFIBUS I O When the address is found you can click on the Find Next button to find the next location of the address 93 505 Programming Software for Windows 94 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 6 Programming Overview In this chapter you will discover how to enter and modify logic using 505 WorkShop s features Re
105. Order Number PPXSS505 8101 1 for all RLL instructions To enter instructions using the mouse and Instruction Bar 1 2 Move the pointer to the Instruction bar If the insruction or Item bar is Click with the left mouse button on the desired instruction on the lower half of the Instruction Bar If the desired instruction is not displayed click the appropriate instruction group on the top half of the instruction bar Move the pointer over the logic program Notice that the instruction is attached to the pointer Position the pointer where you wish to place the instruction Click the left mouse button and the instruction is placed in that location If an instruction cannot be placed in that location an error message is displayed If the sticky cursor has been turned on in the Program Setup under General then the instruction will remain attached to the pointer Click the left mouse button once for each additional instruction you want to insert Click the arrow in the middle of the Instruction Bar or another instruction to remove the instruction from the pointer If the sticky cursor has not been turned on in the Program Setup then after the instruction has been dropped into place the pointer returns to an arrow 97 505 Programming Software for Windows amp To Enter Mnemonic Instructions with the Keyboard 1 98 In the active logic program position cursor by using arrow keys where instruction is to b
106. Result The Log Window Setup screen appears Figure 0 3 Note Selecting OK on the New dialog box without configuring the Data Window 210 Setup will set values to the factory defaults FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Log Window Setup x Log Times Log Data Display Time Stamp m Log Time Setup Selected Log Times m Start Logging Stop Logging Add gt gt Start immediately Stop manually Immediately Manually C Specific time Specific time Edit 5 0648 4M 25 110648 4M 25 Delete After time duration S e Delete ail After one log Start lagging data as soori as addresses are entered into the online lag window Log Days Start D ay 12 21 98 Stop Day 12 21 99 Select day intervals s I Cancel Figure 0 3 Log limes Log Times allows you to set when the log window starts and stops logging data within the window Q Start Logging Immediately Data is logged to the Md logfile as soon as data Is entered into the log window provided that the log window is online and active Specific time Data is read from the server and logged after the time indicated just below the radio button Stop Logging Manually Data is logged to the Md logfile as long as the log window is open Deselecting the Online menu or selecti
107. SFS check box must be selected In the Search box identify where you want to start the search from either the Beginning of the program or Current position of the cursor If the Search Wrap check box is not checked The search will start from the defined starting position to the end of logic If it is checked the search will wrap around to the starting position In the Address box type the address or tag you wish to find If no address or tag is entered the Find will locate all instruction identified in the Instruction selection box NOTE The last five address tags searched for are saved Click on the down arrow within the address field to display and or select them In the Instruction field select the instruction group to search on Contact coil timer etc for ladder If no instruction is selected the Find will locate all instruction items with the selected address or tag Click OK to begin the search If the item is found the Find box disappears and the cursor is positioned over the address Click Cancel to disregard the search and return to the active logic program Find Documentation String The Keyword Search checks each Tag Description and Documentation Comment for the text string entered The text string can be up to 100 characters in length l Click on the toolbar or select Find from the Edit menu Ctrl F and the Find dialog box appears Figure 6 6 2 Inthe Header Keyword Search group select th
108. Server Overview The FasTrak NT Authentication Security uses Windows NT security NT Security is a feature that is part of the Windows NT Operating System and is also found in Windows 2000 and XP The server must therefore be installed on a machine running Microsoft Windows NT 3 1 or later Windows 2000 or Windows XP The following hardware requirements are recommended A personal computer with an Intel Pentium 100 processor or higher 32 MB or more of RAM An 800 X 600 VGA monitor with at least 256 colors 100 MB free disk space on your hard drive Both the FasTrak Security Server FTSecSvr exe and the FasTrak Security Configurator FTSecCfg exe must be installed and configured prior to activating and utilizing these features The Security Server Application FTSecSvr EXE handles all client requests to access secured FasTrak features The server grants or denies access to a feature request depending on the configuration provided by FTSecCfg When security is enabled for FasTrak applications all secure features are unaccessible unless security is configured FTSecCfg and the security server is running All NT auditing including security and application audits are handled by the server Security audits are configured in FTSecCfg and application audits are configured in the FasTrak applications that support security The following breakdown of steps will aid the user as they go through the installation configuration and use of thes
109. TO BIDS Vs eite me tne DE e LE ee bee oe aee e Cope dee 311 det 311 Convert Binary Inputs To 312 siege 312 313 Correlated Data Table enne 314 WO T TT 315 Operation Of the E x oe ees 315 Fall Through Shift Register 316 Operation of the FTSR IN sito t ees eerie ee 316 505 Programming Software for Windows Fall Through Shift Register 318 Operation of the 318 Goto FUNGUO ge PIERDE 320 etr TR 321 Ee FUNCION 321 Pr 321 Integer Math Operation 322 Lead Lag nnne nnne nnns 324 Real Integer Math 325 oriri qgodu V 325 PAGO 326 PACK T ERR 327 328 PACK Analog Alarm Dala 330 PACKAA OPET atio e a
110. The index IN indicates which word in the table is Exclusive Ored The value contained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 where is the length of the table lt IN lt N the word is Ored If N lt IN or N lt 0 the word in not Ored Each pair of bits is Exclusive Ored and the resultant bit is placed in the destination table TD If the bits compared are the same the resultant bit is set to a O If the bits compared are different then the resultant bit is set to 1 After a word in the table is compared the value contained by the index is incremented by one If both Enable and Reset remain on the source word and a word in the table are Exclusive Ored each scan If the Enable turns off while the Reset is on the index holds its current value and the Exclusive OR does not occur If the Reset turns off the index reset to O The WTTXO output remains on until the last word in the table has been Ored with the source word It then turns off The WTTXO must be reset after the output turns off in order to be executed again WTTXO Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 WS Word Address Form A TS Word Address Form A TD Word Address Form B IN Word Address V W G N Constant Only 1 256 287 Control Instructions opecial Function Program Call SFPGM The Special Function Program Call SFPGM instruction is used to call a SF program for execution The SFPGM instruction can be used anywher
111. WY55 or V100 2 Optional the field can be left blank P5 is a value or constant to be passed between the SF subroutine that is called and SF program or the SF subroutine that contains the Call statement Valid Descriptors are Integer Address or Value address containing an integer value e g 3642 V100 or WX77 or V100 2 Real Address or Value address containing a real value e g 33 642 or V120 or WY55 or V100 2 Optional the field can be left blank 313 Correlated Data Table The Correlated Data Table statement compares an input value the input to a table of values the input table and locates a value in the input table that is greater than or equal to the input The CDT then writes the value located in a second table the output table that is correlated with the value located in the input table to an output address the output The CDT format is shown in Figure 11 10 Output Input T able Output Table T able Length Input is the input address Output is the address to which the output value is written Input Table is the starting address for the input table Output Table is the starting address for the output table Table Length is the length of each table and must be a value greater than zero When CDT is executed the CDT compares the value of an input Element specified in INPUT to a pre exist in table of values having a starting address specified in Input Table The
112. a variable that has a 096 offset set option E to N o The result is stored in the address specified by B The low and high limits specified in C and D determine the range of the converted number Values of C and D may fall within the following limits Range An error is logged if the input value is outside the low limit to high limit range and the output is clamped to the nearer of either the low limit or the high limit You can use the SCALE statement to convert an input signal from an analog input module to a value in engineering units For example consider these conditions The input is a 4 20 mA signal that is converted by the analog input module to a value between 6400 and 32000 unipolar 20 offset and sent to WX33 You want the result of the SCALE statement to a real number ranging between 0 and 100 and be placed in V100 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Sequential Data Table The Sequential Data Table statement moves words one at a time from an existing table to a destination address A pointer designates the address of the next word in the table to be moved Each time the statement is executed one word moves and replaces the word at the destination address The SDT format is shown in Figure 11 50 Input T able Output Table PTH Table Length Hestart Bit is the starting address for the table B is the output address to which the words are moved C is the address of the poin
113. above point Configuration location differs depending on the operating system your on In Windows NT enter the User Manager and choose User Rights from the Policies menu If interested in generating security audits select the Audit option from the Policies drop down menu in the User Manager From this dialog check the Success and Failure buttons next to File and Object Access In Windows 2000 and XP users rights can be modified under Administrative Tools under Local Security Policy While on a domain controller users rights may be modified under Administrative Tools which is under Domain Controller Security Policy From either application right click on the User Rights Assignment to list all user rights To enable security audits click on Audit Policy from within Local Security Policy under Local Policies Double click on the Audit Object Access policy and check both Success and Failure boxes The computer s operating system must have the latest service pack installed as this fixes auditing problems with earlier releases The following table may assist a user in determining what rights must be given to a user on the machines involved in FasTrak s NT Authentication Security Remote Server Machine Local Server Machine Client Machine Access this computer from the network Generate Security Audits N A Generate Security Audits Manage auditing and security log Manage auditing and securitylog fT Note tis mandatory that you reboot th
114. allocated for display of Special Function instructions on each line Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 and 80 Column one determines the width allocated for display of SF first column variables after the instruction Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 and 300 Column Two determines the width allocated for display of SF second column variables after the instruction Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 and 300 The ladder grid addresses tags descriptions and headers can all individually be turned on or off to be included with ladder printout To include with the ladder print out select the appropriate check box under Include Ladder Font changes the font displayed in the active program Any active Window s font can be selected To change the font 1 Click on the Ladder Font button Result The Font dialog box is displayed 2 Choose font font style and font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 3 Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to cancel your changes Result The Print Logic and SFs dialog box appears Print Loops Click the Loops check box from the Print dialog box to print the following All PID Loops PID Loops and Headers To change the PID Loops properties click the Loops button on the Print dialog box The Print Loops dialog box appears Figure 3 14 2 Range from Figure 3 14 Click the All Loop
115. and make up the header of the shift register The first word of your data is shifts into address Register Start 4 Register Start Integer Writeable Address NOTE Do not write data to the header fields The shift register does not operate correctly if any of these fields is modified by an external action These fields may be redefined in future software releases Register Length is the length of the table If a constant is used in must be greater than zero The total length of the shift register is Register Length header Register Length Integer Address or value otatus Bit is the status bit and can be C or Y The bit specified by Status Bit turns on when the register is full The bit Status Bit 1 is automatically reserved as a second status bit The bit specified by Status Bit 1 turns on when the register is empty Status Bit Bit Writeable Element Operation of the FTSR IN The operation of the FTSR IN statement is described below 316 FTSR IN is used in conjunction with an FTSR OUT you must use same corresponding values for register start register length and status bit in the two FTSR statements Input is the input address from which the words are moved into the shift register The starting address Register Start determines the memory area in which the shift register is located The first word of your data shifts into address Register Start 4 The four words Register Start through Register Start
116. and modify PLC operations while online To access PLC Operations 1 Click PLC Operations from the PLC Utilities menu Alt U The PLC Operations dialog box appears Figure 6 12 2 When you have S memory configured you receive a display with three fields as shown in Figure 6 12 to change operating mode Use the mouse or arrow keys to select the desired field PLC Operations Paume Figure 6 12 132 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Changing Ladder Mode Without S memory configured the LADDERS field is the only option for changing program mode Freeze places the controller in PROGRAM FREEZE mode All outputs are frozen in their current states However intelligent I O modules still can update outputs 1 To select PROGRAM FREEZE mode Click on the Freeze button on the PLC Operations dialog box The following message appears Stop the PLC with outputs frozen Select either YES or NO Prog Off places the controller in PROGRAM OFF mode Discrete outputs are set to zero and all word outputs are frozen However intelligent I O modules still can update outputs 2 To select PROGRAM OFF mode Click on the Prog Off button on the PLC Operations dialog box The following message appears Stop the PLC with outputs cleared Select either YES or NO When you elect to go to PROGRAM OFF mode you receive the message Stop the PLC with outputs cleared Select Warning either YES or NO Intelligent I
117. au Ed E E M M MM EE I LE 42 POSS 124 Cros um EU PO n oT D 4 Documentation tae dedo 40 40 ene oe 40 cr cmm 55 70 Printer band ahve tag a a 55 70 bros oem eo ott ve aaa detec eae ee 34 35 36 37 39 SUmbDOols E MD Teer tart eer 40 Femer SUP E m 55 70 feck 21 34 35 36 37 39 339 Printing Losie Prora S NUI NM MN M SE MICI MM MEE 34 Process Variable Address Da ee ied i descen E UI ESL ad 174 184 Process Variable Alarm Hiph od tcr Up EI mte epo vico hein S cR I UIS 175 185 Process Variable Alarm 175 185 Process Variable Alarm LOW eese 175 185 Process Variable Alarm LOW LOW 0 cccccccccceeccecceccecceccecceccecceccescesccsccescscescescesscsccsscscesceecs 175 185 Process Variable 175 184 PLIOCOSSOE sn tme abad soia tuit 130 Proce
118. based LRSN contains 0 when the profile is on step 1 1 when the profile is on step 2 etc Using the Ramp Soak Flags Each loop ramp soak profile has a corresponding 16 bit variable LRSF that contains operational and status information for the profile When you program a ramp soak profile you may optionally specify a RAMP SOAK FLAG ADDRESS When you enter an address into this field the controller writes the ramp soak data from LRSF to this address You can use TISOFT or APT or design your RLL program to write to the first three bits at the specified address The controller reads these bits and then writes their status over the corresponding bits in LRSF This enables you to change the ramp soak operation by setting clearing the three bits as needed The controller ignores changes that you make in bits 4 16 You can also monitor LRSF with a SF program and write changes to bits 1 3 with a SF program NOTE The step number is zero based LRSN contains 0 when the profile is on step 1 when the profile is on step 2 etc 192 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Editor 505 WorkShop The Ramp Soak Editor allows you to Edit or Delete an existing programmed step or Insert a new one To access the Ramp Soak Editor 1 Click PID Loop from the View menu The PID Loop Directory dialog box appears Figure 9 1a The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Loop number 1 64 Loop Title and Enable Disable state Select the PID Loop n
119. be written into the table When the first word of the table is full PACK begins to fill the second word Words are written sequentially into the table as illustrated in Figure 7 29 You can also PACK multiple blocks of words Word ima re gister Wes Figure 11 29 Example of PACKing Words Into Table You PACK blocks of words and blocks of bits into a table with one PACK statement See Figure 7 30 The data are PACKed according to these rules Discrete points are PACKed into the next available bit in the table Words are PACKed into the next available word in the table Unused bits in the previous word fill with zeros when a word is written to the table ccococcccccccccc 14 15 15 1T 15 19 2D 21 22 23 24 25 2621 Mem ory HEH waa Figure 11 30 Example of PACKing Bits and Words Into Table 327 The operation of the PACK FROM statement is described below For a FROM Table data are read from a table This read operation begins with the table starting address and reads the specified number of points or words from the table PACK then writes this data starting with the address designated in the Data Start Address Bits are written sequentially as illustrated in Figure 7 31 Figure 11 31 Example of PACKing Bits from a Table You can specify multiple blocks of data to be PACKed from the table as illustrated in Figure 7 32 You cannot skip sections of t
120. bit signed integer in B The quotient is stored R and the remainder is stored in R1 When the input is on the DIV instruction is executed IF B is non zero the division is done and the output is turned on Otherwise the output is turned off and the contents of and 1 do not change DIV Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Number Constant 0 32767 A Word Address or Constant Form A or Constant 32768 32767 B Word Address or Constant Form A or Constant 32768 32767 Word Address Form B Absolute Value ABS The absolute value instruction calculates the absolute value of a signed integer When the input is turned ON 1 the absolute value instruction is executed If the input is OFF 0 the instruction is not executed and there is not power at the output The absolute value function is executed with the parameter A as follows If A gt 0 A is not changed If 32768 lt lt 0 is replaced with the value 0 IfA 32768 A does not change ABS Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Parameter Word Address Form B Square Root SQRT The Square Root instruction SQRT finds the integer square root of a 32 bit Ing word positive integer stored in memory locations AA and AA 1 The result is stored in memory location B The SQRT instruction has the following properties If the result of the square root is not an integer the SQRT reports only the integer portion of the
121. change the elements address at the same time To access the rewire feature 1 2 3 4 Move the cursor to the desired location Paste clipboard contents into the new location Select Paste with Rewire from the Edit menu Choose the appropriate options You can select the number of copies you wish to copy and or you can select to offset each address by a certain value If the addresses you select have descriptions or tags associated with them you can choose to paste those also NOTE When pasting with rewire valid addresses for instructions are not checked until 3 you Validate and Enter Logic Validate and Enter Choose OK NOTE When pasting with rewire clipboard contents are inserted before existing items For example if you are pasting a network and the cursor is positioned at Network 2 click paste and the clipboard contents become Network 2 The previous Network 2 becomes Network 3 109 505 Programming Software for Windows Clear Use Clear to clear an item without removing the space it occupies To clear an item or items 1 Select the item or items you want to clear by clicking holding and dragging the pointer over the desired logic 2 Select Clear from the Edit menu or press the Delete key 3 Click the items you want to clear 4 Click OK or press Enter and the selected items are cleared Editing or modifying a program online may produce unexpected or hazardous results Delete Us
122. data changes Log addresses on an individual basis only if the address value including format or status has changed When this box is not checked the addresses are logged every time they are read from the server Go offline when idle Allows the devices in the corresponding log window to be offline When offline with a device the port is only closed when no other log windows or clients are using the ports for their own data FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Display Log Window Setup Log Times Log Data Display Stamp Columns to Display Address Tag M Description Time Stamp Status Maximum Rows Tips to Display Address Description 505 WorkShop Figure 0 6 Columns to Display Turns on and off columns in the log window see Log Window Appearance All the columns are checked by default except for Value Time Stamp and Status Tips to Display Scroll through the Tag combo box in a log window to display the corresponding address and description if it exists of the highlighted tag The address and description are referred to as doc tips and can be turned on and off with these boxes All tips are checked by default 215 Time Stamp Log Window Setup x Log Times Log Data Display Time Stamp Time Format Date Format Display Format date 04 37 10 510 PM 2000 01 05 05 Jan 00
123. des NR 142 148 Password alis TIT 148 3 43 44 45 46 95 108 109 161 163 Paste With RewIE sas accede M NE nM 43 44 45 46 108 109 402 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Performing Syntax es epos duode dex deo eei 137 338 uod H 32 PGES Discrete Parameter A Ted ooa oe reap Rp daa RA aO HR isque tox HA I AUN 92 PGIS Word Parameter etant Peste be MIS a ce OE pues 92 PED Documentallol O 180 PID mw 180 184 189 190 191 192 193 PID Loop 181 Docamentatom ETE 180 Ramp Soak a 194 189 190 191 192 193 EOOD 1 179 180 181 PIN Gere P 00 65 PLC onion toii ono o0 accio atate acetate sent buteu treats opio ecce ud 89 91 92 93 Conl9uUrdatiol ttai ibo Ee ous 19 75 PLC Operations 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 146 147 153 171 173 180 181 183 190 193 7A Cerna
124. enabled only when either FasTrak Security or NT Authentication Security are in use When these controls are clicked a valid security administrator password must be entered Use Aliases When attaching to a PLC which contains a password the Enter Password dialog requires the correct PLC password before granting access to the PLC If the Use Aliases check box is unchecked the actual password stored in the PLC must be entered If his check box is checked the PLC password alias associated with the PLC s actual password must be entered instead Aliases The list of PLC passwords and the aliases with which they are associated can be access by clicking the Edit Aliases button Clicking this button displays the PLC Password Aliases dialog below PLC Password Aliases Click the Edit Aliases button above to display the PLC Password Aliases dialog below The list box contains the PLC password and PLC password alias pairs already entered 150 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop PLC Password Aliases Passwords Aliases Figure 6 14d New Click the New button to enter new PLC Password PLC Password Alias pair The Enter New PLC Password Alias dialog below appears Enter Hew PLC Password PLC Password Password Verf password PLC Password Alias Alias Cancel Figure 6 14e In the PLC Password group box enter the actual PLC
125. first value in the input table that is greater than or equal to the input is located A value in a second pre existing table starting address specified in Output Table that correlates with the selected value in the input table is written to an output address specified in Output The input table must be in ascending order That is the lowest value is located in the lowest memory location and the highest value is located in the highest memory location Table length Table Length depends upon the memory location that you choose and how much memory you allocated if the memory is user configurable Q Both tables must have the same number of entries The input address V1 contains the value 40 The value in the input table that is greater than or equal to 40 is 43 contained in k68 The correlated value in the output table is in 88 The value written to the output address v2 is 72 314 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Exit on Error The EXIT statement allows you to terminate a SF program or SF subroutine and have an error code logged The EXIT format is shown in Figure 11 12 Errcode contains the value of the error code and can range from 0 255 Errcode Integer Optonal Literal Constant Operation of the EXIT The operation of the EXIT statement is described below When the SF program encounters the EXIT statement program execution terminates If an SF subroutine encounters the EXIT st
126. font style or font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 3 Click OK to save your changes Result The Print Loops dialog box appears 4 Click Cancel to make no font changes Result The Print PLC Configuration dialog box appears 38 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Print Registers Click the Register check box from the Print dialog box to print the following V Memory K Memory Q Register Tags and Descriptions To change the Register properties click the Register button on the Print dialog box The Print Register dialog box appears Figure 3 17 mee d uus c uu uu T T m Print EE Figure 3 17 Click the All check box to print the entire range of items To print a selection deselect the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box The tags and descriptions can be individually turned on or To include with the Register print out select the appropriate check box under Include 1 Click on the Doc Font button to change the Tag and Description printout font of the active program Result The Font dialog box appears 2 Choose a new font font style or font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 3 Click OK in the Font dialog box to save your changes Result The Print Loops dialog box appears 4 Click Cancel to make no font changes Result The Print Register dialog box appears 39 505 Programming So
127. for Windows easy to use programming features Documentation Shows you how to add description to your logic programs Alarms Details the 505 WorkShop for Windows easy to use programming of Alarms features PID Details the 505 WorkShop for Windows easy to use programming PID Loops features FTLogger FT Trend Shows you how to program the data Logger and Trender Appendices Provides a quick reference to keyboard commands and troubleshooting guide 505 Programming Software for Windows Customer Support From time to time you may find that this manual and the online help cannot answer your question FasTrak Customer Support staff will gladly help you find the answers to your questions To obtain assistance in the United States call FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 1 414 358 8088 Technical Support 1 414 358 8088 Technical Support Fax 1 414 358 8066 You can also send questions comments and suggestions to Attention Technical Service FasTrak SoftWorks Inc PO Box 240065 Milwaukee WI 53224 or you can visit the FasTrak Home Page on the World Wide Web at http www fast soft com For detailed information on Siemens 505 CPUs and Instructions set refer to the following manuals Manual Name Part Number 505 System Manual PPX 505 8201 X 505 Programming Reference Manual 505 8204 ET200 Distributed I O Manual PPX 505 8206 X Updating the Software License Key Security of this WorkShop product is protected by use of a security
128. has TISOFT 5 0 or greater format Mode 1 If the controller and the selected program on disk do not have a password you will not be prompted for a password Save and Open functions will be allowed No password will be written to the selected program on disk or to the controller Mode 2 If the selected program on disk has a password and you enter a password for the selected program on disk at the online prompt you will be able to use Save and Open functions Mode 3 If the selected program on disk has a password and you do not enter a password for the selected program on disk at the online prompt you will not be allowed to use the Save function You will however be able to use the Open function but only if the controller supports password You will also have full access to the controller and the selected program on disk Mode 4 If the controller has a password and you enter a password for the controller at the online prompt you will be able to use the Save and the Load functions Save writes the controller password to the selected program on disk Open retains the controller password You will also have full access to the controller and the selected program on disk Mode 5 If the controller has a password and you do not enter a password for the controller at the online prompt you will not be able to use the Save and the Open functions Depending on the controller password access level you will be allowed partial to f
129. has been searched the STFE must be reset in order to be executed again STFE Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 WS Word Address Form A TS Word Address Form A IN Word Address V W G N Constant Only 1 256 279 Search Table for Equal STFN The Search Table for Not Equal Instruction STFN locates the next occurrence of a word ina table that is not equal to a source word The position of the non matching word is shown by an index and the value of the non matching word is copied into a specified memory location The STFN has the following properties The Reset must be turned off to initialize the index setting it to 1 The Reset must then be turned on before the STFN can operate When Enable turns on the index is incremented by one and specifies the next word in the table to be compared with the source word The value contained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 while the STFN is being executed N is the length of the table The source words WS and the word in the table TS specified by the index are compared Ifthe two words are not equal the STFN output turns on for one scan then turns off The value of the non matching word is copied into another memory location specified by WO The index contains the position of the non matching word in the table for the duration of the scan The contents of the index must be used or saved during the scan since the SRFN loo
130. have been modified from a previous configuration session in COM PROFIBUS The Merge function performs a comparison between the current configuration information and the contents of the selected binary file exported from COM PROFIBUS Only new information is written to 505 WorkShop pre existing unchanged configuration information e g addresses is not lost To import and or configure data from the COM PROFIBUS software you must be running 505 WorkShop and the binary with its 2BF extension that you created with COM PROFIBUS must be in a known location Follow the steps below to execute 1 Select PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu Result The PLC Configuration dialog box appears Figure 5 2 2 Select the Profibus I O button under I O configuration on the PLC Configuration dialog box Result The Profibus DP I O dialog box appears The Profibus DP I O dialog box dialog box Slave Status window shows the following information 1l Slave numbers programmed from 1 to 112 or 1 to 32 for the 545L 2 The Enabled state 3 he Assigned state Yes if all slave modules have I O addresses assigned to them No if some or all slave modules do not have addresses assigned to them Online Q Yes if in operate mode and PROFIBUS slave is connected Q No if in stop mode or PROFIBUS slave is not connected 2 Status Match if the configuration and the I O assignments match the online controller
131. instructions Assigning the same number can cause unpredictable machine operation Word Rotate WROT The Word Rotate WROT instruction operates on the 4 bit segments of a word rotating them to the right When the input is turned on the WROT instruction is executed IF the input remains on the instruction is executed on every scan The WROT instruction has the following operation Each 4 bit segment of the word specified in memory location A is shifted to the right Asegment may be shifted up to 3 positions as specified by If Ais not zero the output is turned on when the instruction is executed If A is zero the output is turned off WROT Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 A Word Address Form B B Constant 1 3 266 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Math and Logic Instructions Add ADD The Add instruction adds a signed integer A to a signed integer B and stores the result in R When the input is ON 1 the ADD box is executed If the input remains ON 1 the instruction is executed on every scan The ADD operation is executed as follows A B If the sum is between 32768 and 32767 the output is turned ON 1 Otherwise the output is turned OFF 0 indicating an addition overflow and the R result contains the truncated sum 16 bits ADD Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Number Constant 0 32767 Parameter A Word Addres
132. is positioned If box instructions prevent insertion an error message appears 50 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Importing or Documentation Files Import allows you to import tags descriptors text files or 505 WorkShop fss files For example you can import tags descriptors text created in a word processor You can merge tags descriptions from another 505 WorkShop fss program into the currently opened program To import tags descriptors from a text file l 4 5 Select Import from the File menu Result The Import dialog box appears Figure 3 27 Select the type of program you want to import Type the program name in the Filename line or click Browse to search from valid program names Select either Comma Delimited or Tab Delimited Click OK to import the program To import tags descriptors from another 505 WorkShop fss program into the currently opened program 1 Select Import from File menu Result The Import dialog box appears Figure 3 27 Select FasTrak 505 WorkShop Documentation fss from the Import Documentation dialog Format drop down window Type the program name in the Filename line or click Browse to search from valid program names select Tags Descriptions or Headers from Include to merge in Click OK to import the documentation Figure 3 27 51 505 Programming Software for Windows amp Merge Memory Merge allows you to merge external
133. key This key may be a 25 pin connector that is provided when a new purchase is made of the product The key may also be provided in the form of a USB Universal Serial Bus connector For Site License Users security is key less in that it is built in to the product For more information on site licenses please contact your WorkShop distributor or sales representative For users with a security key a license code is provided per each Maintenance Agreement by the manufacturer s of this product FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Upon renewal of a Maintenance Agreement a new license code may be obtained by contacting your distributor or sales representative 2 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 505 WorkShop for Windows Overview What is 505 WorkShop for Windows 505 WorkShop for Windows is one of the world s most powerful and exciting programmable logic controller PLC programming software offerings 505 WorkShop for Windows is the universal solution offering features that will save you time and money such Symbolic Programming Cut Copy amp Paste Instruction Toolbar and Mnemonics Multiple windows view and edit Flexible program setup Write read and force addresses from the Data Window Multiple documentation options Generous Online Help Package Contents Your 505 WorkShop for Windows package includes the items listed below If any of these items are missing or damaged please contact
134. lines to 3 Copy your selection to clipboard with one of the following on the toolbar or Copy from the Edit menu NOTE f the start and ending networks adaresses or SF lines are known then the copy from and copy to range can be entered directly into the Copy dialog box If a partial network is selected the Copy Range dialog box is not displayed The items selected are copied without warning Logic Network 2 dv Addess 0 Caneel s trom r Figure 3 21 4 Click OK Result The range of networks addresses or SF lines displayed are copied and placed into the clipboard Paste To access the paste feature 1 Move the cursor to the desired location 2 Paste clipboard contents into the new location with one of the following Click 8 on the toolbar Select Paste from the Edit menu Q Press Ctrl V 45 505 Programming Software for Windows amp Paste With Rewire Paste With Rewire provides you with a number of timesaving editing features These include Paste multiple copies Paste with address offset Q Include tags and descriptions in the paste Q The ability to Rewire change address on an individual basis To access the rewire feature 1 Move the cursor to the desired location 2 Paste clipboard contents into the new location by Selecting Paste with Rewire from the Edit menu The Paste With Rewire dialog box
135. listed under the protocol section of your network settings it needs to be added You may be asked to insert a Windows disk or CD ROM After it has been added click on properties and enter an IP address subnet mask and possibly a default gateway See your network administrator for more information on these fields if you are not sure what to enter Every machine on your network must have a unique IP address At this point the 505 TCP IP Ethernet board needs to be configured see the following section Make sure the IP address does not conflict with other devices on the network A sample configuration appears below Devices IP Address SubNet Mask PC 1 201 98 1 1 255 255 255 0 PC 2 201 98 1 2 255 255 255 0 505 TCP IP 1 201 98 1 8 255 255 255 0 505 TCP IP 2 201 98 1 9 255 255 255 0 To use 505 WorkShop over an Ethernet network with the TCP IP protocol you need to purchase and install the PPX 505 CP2572 module in a Series 505 base Refer to the SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP2572 User Manual PPX 505 8132 x for instructions 63 505 Programming Software for Windows Assign an IP Address to the Module There are two ways to configure the IP address for your PPX 505 CP2572 module Each procedure has different advantages as outlined in Table 4 2 Procedure Pros Autostart PLC Start Communications are functional any time CPU GOOD LED is on Can re use same ladder logic program for mu
136. lt Select address prefix and enter 12 after it This indicates the starting address of this search and replace range is C12 116 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop The Search for through Edit Boxes The numeric values entered in the Search for through edit boxes specify the address at which the search and replace range ends This value must be greater than or equal to the address number entered in the Search for combo box Continuing the example above entering 47 in the Search for through edit box indicates this search range starts with address C12 and ends with address C47 The Replace with Combo Boxes The Replace with combo box specifies the address type and number which will replace the address range entered in the Search for combo box The items in the drop list are based upon the address type chosen in the Search for combo box If a bit address type was selected in the Search for combo box the Replace with drop list contains only bit address types Similarly if a WORD address type was selected in the Search for combo box the Replace with drop list contains only WORD address types But when box instructions are selected in the Search for combo box an instruction of the same type only is allowed in the Replace with combo box So if an EDRUM instruction is entered in the Search for combo box only an EDRUM instruction can be entered in the Replace with combo box Continuing the example a
137. not use same reference number more than once for timer counter up down counter and discrete motor control alarm timer instructions Using the same reference number can cause unpredictable operations 259 Miscible Event Drum Discrete MADRID The Discrete Miscible Event Drum MADRID instruction operates similarly to the event drum but is capable of specifying a configurable mask for each step which allows selection of the coils to be under the control of the fixed mask in each MADRID step When the Drum begins to run it starts at the step specified by the Drum Step Preset which is stored in DST memory The current step is stored in D Sc memory The counts per step set in the CNN field is stored in DIP memory The current count is stored in BCC memory The MADRID operates as follows The drum is enabled when the Enable Reset input is on When the Enable Reset is on and the Start input turns on the drum beings to run The drum begins at the step specified by DSP and advances to the next step based on operations of the timer and or event When the drum advances a step coils are turned on off according to the fixed mask and the current bit pattern in the configurable mask The drum output comes on and remains on after the last programmed step has been executed The last programmed step is the last step having an event programmed or having a non zero CNT preset value The event must be on and DCC must be zero
138. of control of a JMP not having power flow logic in the JMP zone of control changes the status of the outputs The JMP supports these features Dscrete outputs between a JMP and its corresponding do not change when the JMP loses power flow marks the end of the zone of control for the JMP having the same reference number If you do not use the JMPE the remainder of the program is placed under the control of the JMP You can make the JMPE conditional by placing a contact on the same network as the JMPE When a MCR loses power flow JMP instructions within the MCR s zone of control are overridden This means that all outputs in the MCR s zone of control are turned off when the loses power flow even when the outputs are frozen in an ON state by a JMP This includes network outputs with the network 290 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Master Control Relay The Master Control Relay is used to turn off blocks of outputs controlled by segments of RLL programs This is done by clearing the discrete image register points of the controlled outputs to zero Although the MCR controls the coils and discrete outputs of box instruction within its zone of control it does not control the power rail This means that box instructions will continue to operate normally In order to disable a box use an MCR controlled coil output as a normal contact on the same network that cont
139. on a process variable the result is stored in V Memory where the Loop accesses it If you select NONE the PID Loop does not read an address to obtain the Process Variable Low Process Variable Range Enter the low value of the process variable in the Process Variable Range Field You must specify the engineering values that correspond to the lower range of the input span High Process Variable Range Enter the high value of the process variable in the Process Variable Range Field You must specify the engineering values that correspond to the upper range of the input span Process Variable Bipolar oelect YES or NO to specify analog inputs as bipolar or not Bipolar inputs span have spans of 5 to 5 volts or 10 to 10 volts Square Root of Process Variable Select Yes if the input for the process variable is from a device such as an orifice meter that requires a square root calculation to determine the correct value to use Loop Output Address Enter an address V or WY in the Loop Output Address field Select NONE when you do not want the loop to write the output to an address Use the LOOP OUTPUT ADDRESS field to specify the address into which the loop writes the value of the output You can select NONE in situations such as cascaded loops in which the outer loop does not require an output address Output is Bipolar Select YES or NO in the OUTPUT IS BIPOLAR field If you Select Yes the output range is 32000 to
140. online then the communication settings can be viewed but cannot be modified by selecting the Comm Setup button Unlike the Add Device dialog when we modify the device name here the doc filename does not change Deleting devices To delete a device select the Delete Devices button in the Device Source setup dialog to bring up the dialog below Delete Devices Server AOS erer Cancel Device Names Select Help Figure 0 18 Clicking on Select All followed by will delete all the devices for a selected server You can also click in the Device Names list box to manually select which devices to delete 229 Trend Window Graph Setup To setup the graph settings 1 Select Graph from the Setup menu Hesult The Graph Settings tab dialog box appears Figure 0 19 Graph Settings x General Ais sis Key Pens Database Refresh Rate il Sec Background Color Change Axis Color Change Grid MW Show x Grid M Show Y Grid Grid Color E Change Title Cancel Apply Help Figure 0 19 There are six pages on this property sheet 230 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop General Trend Times allow you to set when the trend window starts and stops trending data within the window If Immediately is checked under the Start Trending group box data will be read from the server and logged to the Md tren
141. parallel port is not 100 IBM compatible you may experience problems with the FasTrak Key which will prevent 505 WorkShop for Windows from functioning properly In most cases you can correct the parallel interface incompatibilities by replacing the parallel port with a 100 IBM compatible port or by adding a second printer adapter NOTE FasTrak is not responsible for problems that result from using an incompatible parallel interface 4 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 505 WorkShop 2 Installation Installing 505 WorkShop Before you begin installation you should review the System Requirements section in the Introduction chapter To install 505 WorkShop turn your computer on and start Windows You may need to provide a user name and password to log in to a computer network If you are unsure contact your company s System Administrator or IT representative Follow these steps to install the software 1 Insert the 505 WorkShop Disk in your computer s CD ROM drive 2 The CD should autostart if not click the Windows Start button Then Click Run and type x setup exe where x is the letter for the CD ROM drive 3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen 4 After clicking Next a 505 WorkShop Access Level Read Load Only Install box appears From the install window entitled 505 WorkShop Access Level you can decide if you want Full function Read only or Load only install See 505 WorkShop Access
142. programs and SF subroutines with designated elements and identifiers Find a Specific network number network address address tag instruction or instruction number Use the following steps to conduct a search for the desired item Find a Network Network Address or Line Number 4 Click amp on the toolbar or select Find from the Edit menu Ctrl F and the Find dialog box appears Figure 6 6 T 7 Traucan ix m cae Number Figure 6 6 5 Inthe Go to group select the Network SF Line Number radial button to find a specific network number or special function line number Select the Network Address radial button to find a specific network address 6 Inthe Network SF Line Number or Network Address enter box type the number of the network network address or line number you wish to find 7 Click Find to begin the search If the item is found the Find box disappears and the cursor moves to the network network address or line number you wanted to find 8 Click Cancel to disregard the search and return to the active logic program 112 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Find Instruction Address Tag 1 7 Click Bl on the toolbar or select Find from the Edit menu Ctrl F and the Find dialog box appears Figure 6 6 By default 505 WorkShop only searches the current program environment for the Instruction Address or Tag entered To search the entire program the Global Ladder SFP
143. register must be on a eight point boundary 1 9 17 25 Q All words are copied into the control relays or the image register during each scan The output is turned on when the instruction is executed MIRFT Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 TS Word Address Form A IR Bit Address X Y C B N Constant Only 1 256 272 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Move Image Register to Table MIRTT The Move Image Register to Table MIRTT instruction allows you to copy information from the control relays or the discrete image register to a table of consecutive word locations When the input has power the MIRTT instruction is executed The operation of the MIRTT is defined as follows The On Off state of up to 4096 bits 256 words X 16 bits is copied from the control relays or the discrete image register starting at the bit address specified by IR The starting point must be on a eight point boundary 1 9 17 etc bits are copied in groups of 16 bits The copy begins with the lowest numbered bit address and is placed into work locations beginning with the LSB of the word specified by TD Q All bits are copied into the work locations during each scan There must be a sufficient number of discrete points to copy all bits into the table of N words Q The output is turned on when the instruction is executed MIRTT Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Consta
144. root The operations is valid if 0 lt 232767 32767 If the result is valid the outputs turned on when the operation is executed Otherwise the instructions turned off and the contents of B does not change SQRT Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 1 32767 A Word Address Form A B Word Address Form B 268 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Binary to The Convert Binary to BCD instruction converts binary representation of integer BIN to an equivalent Binary Coded Decimal BCD value It converts a 16 bit integer into a 32 bit BCD word A BCD word is made up of 4 digits 0 9 with each digit represented by groups of 4 bits Values up to 327667 can be converted into BCD CBD is described as follows IF BIN contains an integer 0 32767 the value is converted to BCD stored in BCD and 1 as shown below and the instruction output is turned on MSB LSB MSB LSB Ten Thousands Hundreds Ones Thousands BCD BCD 1 Q If Ais not within the range 0 32767 BCD and BCD 1 not changed and no power is passed CBD Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Instruction reference Constant 0 32767 Parameter BIN Word Address Form A Parameter BCD Word Address Form B BCD to Binary CDB The Convert BCD to Binary Instruction CDB converts a BCD element into its integer equivalent When the input is O the CDB instruction is executed The CDB opera
145. selected in the Program Setup To modify the display select Options Program Setup P In the Data Window Tab dialog section click on Tag to include tags and or click Descriptions to include Descriptions De select both if you do not want to include Tags and Descriptions For more Data Window display options See Program Setup in Chapter 4 121 505 Programming Software for Windows Data Format 1 Data Format is available for byte word and double word addresses Select Format from the Data menu while in the Data Window The Data menu is available only while in the Data Window The Format dialog box appears Figure 6 8 Data i Load Template Save Template Unsigned Dec Size Signed Dec Display Stringz On Hex Octal Off Binary Force On ASCII Force Force Memory Show Forces Clear Force Clear All Forces FS Previeus Status Fill Figure 6 8 2 Click the desired data format For the String field you can enter the number of characters to be displayed from 1 64 3 Click OK to select the format and return to the Data Window Forcing an Element As a troubleshooting tool control relays can be forced The force attribute bit also shown in Figure 6 8a provides a single bit memory location for storing the forced status of control relays If a control relay has been forced the control relay retains that forced status during a po
146. set to 1 The TXOR instruction is described below When the input turns on a comparison is made between each bit of each word in the first T1 and the second T2 tables An Exclusive OR is executed on each pair of bits and the resultant bit is placed in the third table TD If the bits compared are either both 1 or both 0 the resultant bit is set to a O If the bits compared are unlike 1 and 0 the resultant bit is set to 1 Exclusive OR is executed on the bits in all of the words of the two tables each The is turned on when the instruction is executed TXOR Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 T1 Word Address Form A T2 Word Address Form A TD Word Address Form B N Constant Only 1 256 Table Complement TCPL The Table Complement TCPL instruction inverts the status of each bit in a table and places the results in another specified table The TCPL instruction has the following operations When the input turns on each bit in the source table specified by TS is inverted and stored in the destination table specified by TD A 0 is inverted to 9 A 1 is inverted to 0 Q The bits in ALL words of the table are inverted each scan Q The output is turned on when the instruction is executed TCPL Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 TS Word Address Form A TD Word Address Form B N Constant Only 1 256 282 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc
147. small probably would never happen size 33 increase STEP or decrease NOISE PV output inconsistent 1 Noisy PV output signal PV output inconsistent 2 Noisy PV output signal PV output inconsistent 3 Noisy PV output signal PV output inconsistent 4 Noisy PV output signal PV output inconsistent 5 Noisy PV output signal Table 9 5 lists the value parameters used by SmarTune with the default values and the ranges possible for each Table 9 5 Value Parameters Name Max Time Noise Band Step Change Wait Time PIN Automatic Download Calculate Derivative Safe Output High Stop Low Stop Largest Gain Smallest Gain Largest Reset Smallest Reset Largest Rate Smallest Rate Activation Time Slice Calculation Time Slice Default Value 30 0 minutes 0 005 of PV range 0 07 of PV range 0 5 minutes 0 PIN not required TRUE FALSE use Previous Output 0 8 of PV range 0 2 of PV range 8000000 0 95 96 0 0000008 95 95 8000000 0 minutes 0 0000008 minutes 8000000 0 minutes 0 0000008 minutes 0 0 Table 9 5 Value Parameters 200 Range 0 to 71582 minutes maximum is about 49 days PV range engineering units PV range engineering units same as Max Time 0 to 32767 TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE Previous Output 0 to 32000 PV range engineering units PV range engineering units real real real real real real 0 not configured here 1 to 255 ms 0 not configured here 1 to 255 ms FasTrak Sof
148. soe o EREENEJDEENNEBEEEEER 5 1 Soak step Point 000 C control da t Page Mumber 514 11 7542 Offset 514 1 modulo 512 1 2 Figure 11 43 Long Form Address Example Figure 11 44 shows an example of the PACKRS instruction moving values from a ramp soak profile to a V memory table PACKRSTo from Tablestok 852 44 abDot 100 Loop NMurmberstok eei epstok TabDbot 2 of Stepgstok TabDot 2 RAMP SOAK Profile status Setpoinfzamp Ratioak Step FS Bit Units Units Mlini hin Unita Rampstok 5 soakstok TabzC33 tok Tabzstok Tab tok Tab 1 5 512 lt Tab 55 D tok 6 soakstok TabzCc513stok 9 Tab tok Tab 210 stok Tab23 5 Rampestok Tab Cc1 z5s tek 45 Tab 5 Table after execution of PACKRS instruction Table from Loop 2 Packing 3 steps starting at step Table in Memory lenak step status bit address C3 0 floating point representation 2 s alues Figure 11 44 Example of PACKRS to a Table in V Memory Figure11 45 shows an example of the PACKRS instruction moving values from a V memory table to a Loop Ramp Soak profile changing two of the values in the profile and leaving the remaining values unchanged 336 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop POCKRE Tabla iph Tab
149. than once for the SHRB and SHRW instructions Assigning the same number can cause unpredictable machine operation 265 Word Shift Register SHRW The Word Shift Register Instruction SHRW copies words from a memory location into a shift register The shift register is located in V memory and can be up to 1023 words long The SHRW instruction has the following features The Enable Reset inputs must both be on for the SHRW instruction to be executed When the Clock transitions from off to on the word currently in memory location is shifted into the shift register at the memory location specified by B The shift occurs as follows Word B N 1 is discarded Word B N 2 is then copied to word B N 1 word B N 3 is copied to word 2 etc Word B is copied to word 1 word A is copied to word B After each shift is completed the output is turned on for one scan If the Enable tuns off but the Reset remains on all words currently in the SHRW are retained but no words are shifted Ifthe Reset turns off all words in the shift register are cleared to zero The instruction is not executed and there is no power flow at the instruction OO O SHRW Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Register Number Constant Only Varies with configured Shift Register ranges A Word Addr Form A B Word Addr V W G N Constant 1 1023 Do not use the same reference number more than once for the SHRB and SHRW
150. that is equal to a source word The position of the matching word is shown by an index The STFE has the following properties The Reset must be turned off to initialize the index setting it to 1 The Reset must then be turned on before the STFE can operate When Enable turns on the index is incremented by one and specifies the next word in the table to be compared with the source word The value contained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 while the STFE is being executed N is the length of the table The source word WS and the word in the table TS specified by the index are compared Ifthe two words are equal the STFE output turns on for one scan and then turns off The index contains the position of them attaching word in the table for the duration of the scan The contents of the index must be used or saved during this scan since the SIFE looks for the next match on the next scan as long as the Enable and Reset remains on Ifthe two words are not equal the index is incremented by one and the next word in the table is compared to the source word Q If no matches are found in the table the output remains off The index contains the position of the last word in the table Q The entire table is searched ruing one scan until one match or no match is found Q Ifthe Enable turns off while the Reset is on the index holds its current value If the Reset turns off the index resets to 1 After the entire table
151. the COM5434 Configuration software NOTE Make sure to select the bus parameters the baud rate and the highest station address HSA that match those of all the other modules on the network Also be sure to select a unique station address for each FMS CP module on the network Once each FMS CP module has been configured to operate on the network connect each FMS CP station and the CP 5412 card in your PC to the PROFIBUS network using the PROFIBUS cables and connectors described in the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS FMS Communication Processor 505 CP5434 FMS User Manual 68 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Fast PLC Setup The Fast PLC Setup allows you to configure a single PLC Connection when using Fast PLC Connection To access the Fast PLC Setup 1 Select Fast PLC Setup from the File menu Result The Fast PLC Setup dialog box appears Figure 4 17 Fast PLC Connection Setu Es Figure 4 17 2 To configure and select your serial port or board for communication with PLC Select the appropriate Communication Port from the list in the Fast PLC Connection Setup dialog box If you need to configure a port click Serial Ports Refer to Communications Setup for more information Click OK or press Enter to accept the settings Click Cancel to disregard changes NOTE The connection options for your Fast PLC Connection is stored in the 505 registry If you attempt to use Fast PLC Connection and the Fast PLC Setup has n
152. the RLL program that a box instruction can be used When power flow to the SFSUB instruction transitions from off to on the output from the FLL SFSUB instruction is examined to determine subsequent actions If the instruction is not currently executing then the instruction is placed in one of the SFSUB queues for execution There are two SFSUB execution queues one to handle SFSUB 0 instructions and the other to handle all other SFSUB instructions When SFSUB 0 instruction is pulled off from its execution queue the instruction parameters are evaluated and the instruction output is turned on When SFSUB instructions are pulled off from the other execution queue the instruction parameters are evaluated statements in the corresponding SF subroutine are executed and the instruction output is turned on SFSUB Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Program Constant Only 1 1023 Address Blank C Y WY V or Blank zi Const Bit Word Expression Form A complex expressions refer to sec 7 8 Constants P2 etc End END The END instruction unconditionally terminates the scan The instruction does not have any parameters The END instruction should always be used to terminate your program When a controlled executes the END instruction the program scan is terminated Any instruction after the END are ignored The END instruction must be the only instruction in the network Do not use the END instruction to separate RLL
153. the menu select the type of forcing action you would like to do 2 From the Ladder Editor select the element to force 123 505 Programming Software for Windows Complete Cross Reference In both online network mode only and offline programming you can track addresses in a program by viewing the Cross Reference table l 124 Click 8 on the toolbar or selectCross Reference from theView menu The Cross Reference window appears Figure 6 80 If you have more than one program loaded the information displayed is for the program in the active window The cross reference can be based on address or networks by checking the desired radio button on the cross reference dialog box Cross Current 555 Offline jo x 016103 1 016264 45 E D16316 016365 016371 4 016488 5 016494 016595 5 016591 016619 5 016627 zs 016820 5 016899 5 016905 1 000599 014209 4 2 014225 014631 014642 014868 015000 1 015016 015019 1 015021 4 015024 4 015026 015063 4 015480 015531 4 015532 015577 015621 015865 15905 016032 016033 016068 1 016110 016287 4 016288 016337 4 016338 016376 4 016502 4 016503 1 016637 016827 4 016829 016910 4 014818 014882 5 014942 014942 i3 015105 4 015107 e Figure 6 8b
154. the width allocated for display of SF second column variables after the instruction Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 and 300 Description Turns on and off the Address columns in the data window Turns on and off the Tags columns in the data window Turns on and off the Descriptions columns in the data window Turns on and off the Time Stamp columns in the data window Turns on and off the Status columns in the data window As you scroll through the tag descriptions combo box in a data window the corresponding address and description if it exists of the highlighted tag will be displayed to the left and right respectively of the combo box These are referred to as documentation tips and can be turned on and off by checking and un checking these boxes The maximum number of data window rows to display Default is 100 minimum is 10 maximum is 1000 Select Tags descriptions both or neither when the Data window is displayed Description Select either Tags or Descriptions or both for display in the Documentation Window oelect Address Tag or Description order for display in the Documentation Window Description The colors of Ladder Ladder Grid Ladder Background Edited Ladder Background Address Foreground Tags Foreground Description Foreground Rung Header Foreground File Header Foreground Status Foreground Status Optimize Foreground and Parameter Cursor Foreground can be changed when select
155. thermal loading on a temperature zone increases the magnitude of the steady state error is increased Setpoint LN Steady state error Figure 9 8 Steady State Error Thermal loading is induced by energy losses to the surroundings conduction through the machine as well as the process A proportional only controller can resolve this error only to a limited degree The Integral Component The integral term of the PID expression provides a means to eliminate the error in the proportional band This term is defined as the Error integrated over time Thus in the case of the steady state error the output would be increased or decreased depending on the sign of the Error over time The amount of the integral adjustment is determined by the magnitude of the Error and the Integral gain Excessive Integral gain would cause an oscillation about the setpoint Likewise minimal Integral gain would not reduce the Error in a timely manner and be ineffective 195 The Derivative Component The Derivative term of the PID expression provides a mathematical means for limiting the rate of change of the process variable As the rate of change becomes larger the derivative term reduces the output resulting in the reduction of the rate of change of the process variable The Derivative gain defines the magnitude of the output reduction as a function of the rate of change of the process variable Excessive Derivative gain would result in an undesirable out
156. turns off The WTOT must be reset after the output turns off in order to be executed again WTOT Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 WS Word Address Form A TD Word Address Form B IN Word Address V W G N Constant Only 1 256 284 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Word To Table And WTTA The Word to Table AND WTTA instruction ANDs each bit in a source word with the corresponding bit of a designated word in a table The results are placed in a destination table If both bits are 1 a 1 is stored in the destination table Otherwise the resultant bit is set to O The WTTA instruction is described below The Reset must be on for the instruction to be executed When the Enable turns on each bit of the source word WS and of the specified word in the table TS is compared The index IN indicates which word in the table is ANDed The value contained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 where N is the length of the table If 0 lt IN lt N the word in ANDed If N lt IN or N 0 the word is not ANDed Q Each pair of bits is ANDed and the resultant bit is placed in the destination table TD If both bits are 1 the resultant bit is set to 1 Otherwise the resultant bit is set to O After a word in the table is compared the value contained by in the index is incremented by one If both Enable and Reset remain on the source word and a word in the table are ANDed each scan
157. value is entered it must be greater than zero SSR Operation The operation of the SSR statement is described below and illustrated in Figure 11 53 The starting address designates the memory area in which the shift register is located The register length C determines the size of the shift register Size depends upon the memory location that you choose and how much memory you allocated if the memory is user configurable The maximum number of elements stored in the register is C The first position of the register Register Start A is empty until an element moves into A from another source Each time the SSR executes the element currently in memory location A shifts to A 1 The element in A 1 shifts to A 2 Elements move down the shift register to A 3 A 4 etc and A resets to zero After the register is full shifting in a new word causes the loss of the last word in the register at location A C 1 The register is considered empty when it contains all zeros The status bit B turns on when the register is empty NOTE f the register contains the value 0 0 the register is not recognized as empty and the status bit does not turn off 345 R DK EEr atik Tab Regier bgt TabDot Siht reg state moued Ii ores m word into the SSR from Wai Siit reg ker state application prog ram moes word Ii SR kar
158. values of your addressees in the PLC by using Status Status can be displayed for Ladder networks Status is an online feature only otatus will continue to update when you scroll and cursor within the program To display Ladder status 1 Click Status on the Diagnostics menu S The Status menu item displays check if Status has been turned on Ladder status is indicated by the following features Contacts and Coils when on are displayed in Red Addresses box instructions indicate the current value for each address NOTE Status mode is automatically exited when an attempt is made to edit a network When the network is validated and entered Status is automatically displayed again Click Status on the Diagnostics menu to stop displaying status Initiating a Single Scan Using a single scan allows you to view a single execution of your program You must have the controller in program mode in order to execute a single scan To perform a single scan of your program complete the following steps l 2 138 Place the controller in program mode Click Single Scan Setup on the Diagnostics menu 1 The Single Scan Setup menu dialog box is displayed Figure 6 12dd If your programmable controller supports the Single Scan pop up task box for more than one task you can select which tasks to execute during the single scan Single Scan Setup MiTask 9 Task 2 Ta
159. word Copies bytes words or long words from a source location to a destination location Copies words from one location to another Multiplication Move word from table Copies words from one location to another using indexed addresses Copies bits of a word to the discrete image register or the control relay memory Copies a word to a table Normally closed contact Not equal to Normally open contact No operation Inverts power flow Turns on output for a single scan Immediate coil Immediate closed coil Coil Coil Normally Closed Calls an RLL subroutine and passes parameters to it Calls an RLL subroutine and passes parameters to it Discrete parameters indicated as outputs are cleared when the subroutine is not executed Transfers a PROFIBUS DP slave s current diagnostic to user memory Reset coil bit Immediate reset of a coil bit Designates the beginning of an RLL subroutine Returns control from an RLL subroutine to the main RLL program FasTrak SoftWorks Inc SET SETI SFPGM SFSUB SHRB SHRW SHT SKP SMC SQRT 55 STFE STFN SUB TAND TASK TMR TMRF TOR TSET TTOW TXOR UDC UNLCK WAND WOR WROT WTOT WTTA WTTO WTTXO WXOR XSUB 505 WorkShop Set coil bit Immediate set of a coil bit Calls a special function program from RLL Calls a special function subroutine from RLL Bit shift register Word shift register Selectively enab
160. 00x improvement A compiled SF program or subroutine can be executed in line to the user RLL program This means that when the enable input to the SFPGM or SFSUB box instruction 15 on the program or subroutine is executed immediately and its result is available for use in the next rung of the current RLL scan There are several reasons to choose interpreted mode for a SF program The primary reasons are as follows If the program has or more statements that are not allowed in a compiled program or if it calls a subroutine that is not compiled then it may not be compiled A compiled program requires both S Memory and Compiled Special CS Memory while an interpreted program requires only S Memory As a rule of thumb the compiled code for a SF program requires twice as much CS Memory as S Memory For example a SF program that uses 1 Kbyte of S Memory also uses 2 Kbytes of CS Memory A second SF program or subroutine on the same execution queue cannot pre empt a compiled SF program or subroutine This may present a scheduling problem for a cyclic loop or analog alarm queue For example if a compiled program is executing on a loop setpoint a higher priority loop will not execute until the compiled program completes This is not a problem if the program s execution time is small However if the program requires significant execution time this could cause unnecessary loop overruns NOTE Most SF programs and subroutin
161. 05 Programming Software for Windows Instruction Bars The instruction bars appear along the sides and the top of the 505 WorkShop window when you are programming ladder logic Figure 3 1 Instructions are divided into groups To display the instructions for a group click the group button For example to display the math instructions click the Math Logic button The instructions for that button appear and you can move the window anywhere on the screen The Math group button remains selected until another group button is pressed Inserting an Instruction Bar Item in a Program 1 Click the desired instruction group button on the upper half of the Instruction Bar Result Instructions for that group appear on the lower half of the bar 2 Click the button showing the item you want to insert in the program Result The item attaches to the pointer when you move to the ladder editing area 3 Move the pointer to the item insertion point on the ladder editing area and click the left mouse button Result The instruction is dropped into place 4 Repeat Step 3 each time you want to add the same item 5 Click on the arrow button in the middle of the Instruction Bar to return the pointer to an arrow 18 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Menu Bar The menu bar located just below the title bar identifies the names of the available 505 WorkShop functions To display the menu options for each function click on the function na
162. 05 WorkShop Importing Documentation Use the following procedure to import documentation 1 Type the program name in the File name field or click Browse to search from valid program names Figure 3 9 2 Click OK to import the program Figure 3 9 Use the Tag Description Text File to merge Tags or Descriptions from the ASCII text files exported by WorkShop for Windows into the currently opened program The default file extension is TXT but alternate extensions are allowed You must also select comma or tab delimited records with the following format Characters 1 6 could be greater with Loops or Alarms contain the 6 digit Siemens address Character 7 is the comma or tab character Character 8 and beyond is the variable length tag followed by the comma or tab character followed by the variable length description followed by a carriage return 29 505 Programming Software for Windows Exporting Documentation Use the following procedure to export documentation 1 2 5 Select Export from the file menu Select a file format to export the documentation to Figure 3 9a Type the program name in the File name field or click Browse to search from valid program names Select the parts of documentation to export Tags Descriptions or Headers Then determine which delimiter format to use The delimiter is used to separate the types of documentation Tags D
163. 122 Dato Menu EuncbornalDy tuos iR ates LM pua ai esque etiain 2 19 IBE ER dU ELT 3 15 21 48 49 55 120 121 122 160 Brice gri MET Tm 122 OBLUOHS oco aisi otn pads Erotismo 55 Forcie 122 Load Template en I NL EAEE 120 Next Address tovt f dais Guest i usate c bates dud 120 Previous Address Ranae unto NM an POR d iM M CD ees 120 Save Template 120 Date Compare DCM P oe asit tas editado Lor E Loin n de Pv debat ipi 303 Date 79 Dat Set DSE MM events 303 ta 78 RI ur rc nen ee eee ee 43 49 108 109 110 120 159 163 171 190 193 Delete TUL tinte 89 90 Blots om TTE 190 BIO ETE T T TU TE 190 Docone malome 161 SLAVES easain A 90 Derivative Gain Lmin T saneca PED 186 Deviation Orange Ala
164. 13 Addes or ur 113 Fmd Comme ure 93 Find Documentation SEEIHS SPEO EE iacent 113 Imi ia Mos cnet Hrcn 113 Address OE Sy IDOL uie 113 114 HQ A 113 Finde PHI RE 112 FMS Profibus Communication out e Ota eaten terti eta eU toco o ante revo EE Ue I OE Pa 69 Force nC UOI inc pe eee utto tenet oe E EAE DE RD ER 122 123 dlnfogol Doro 122 123 uv en HIE MORET 58 Force Role Swap ERS 308 Porcm an Fiemme RICE MM 122 BC RM 133 Freeze ices cm ccc cT 186 I TEOSSGE cu cnet tonat aude E I M M A I M M S 205 am dua ZR TU MT ES 205 cd cea 224 BD Sid OV CVC Wy ee rcc 224 G INGE A ttc 231 Glopa MEMO nee CaP ee ee 63 STS BITTE PEE E 63 SUD OUNTE OTT 62 Goto subroutine GUS poses tress
165. 156 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 7 Documentation 505 WorkShop provides simple way to document ladder while you are creating or editing your program The maximum number of characters you can enter for each header is 16K Double click the Ladder Header icon in the active logic program window see Figure 7 1 The Ladder Header dialog box is displayed see Figure 7 2 Type in your header Select OK when you re finished Figure 7 1 To see ladder headers in the active logic program select Program Setup from the Options menu Click Ladder Headers in the Logic Editor box and click OK Ladder Header E UU I gt THIS 15 AN EXAMPLE OF amp LADDER IT 15 SPECIFIC TO THE FIRST NETWORK OF LADDER AND BE UP 16 000 CHARACTERS Figure 7 2 157 Network Header 505 WorkShop provides a simple way to document networks while you are creating or editing your logic program The maximum number of characters you can enter for each header is 16K The network header is tied to the corresponding network output If a XCALL PGSTS OR PGTSZ are the outputs the header is tied to the first occurrence of an X Y or C address Double click the Network Header Input icon in the active logic program window see Figure 7 1 The Network Header Input dialog box is displayed see Figure 7 3 The drop down box paging preference in the top left hand corner of the header input box Controls the page pri
166. 21 96 106 Status Word VIeOEy 15 77 BLUT 1 ETE 35 SUB EI MEL MU MR LM E Lb ME LE 73 83 SUENE N ED 63 64 65 SUT OUUINE SOUCO 55005 ces tein i Oe dead 298 RSD o 298 mE EM 267 Symbol BIILOE ipeo od i ads ao tame os 21 55 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 SymDOL ROWS resyn to m 55 23 32 34 35 36 37 39 55 69 108 109 121 124 125 154 159 165 SUXDCHEOHDIS ou 87 93 5ynchronous SIM RESIST Ds Bas 345 5ystenr Part NUIDGE Mott E bt 136 Table Complement IC PL sena Lut sae Loaded pae 282 406 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Table Move Memory tiem ei dote tem dn 79 Table to Table And TAND diio ecards ai t edt oerte to quae te eee 281 Table to Table Exclusive Or TXOR eese nnne nennen nennen nis 282 Table to Lable OF TOR ovr tau be ta ets ER Rein
167. 291 Master Control Relay 291 Return From Subroutine RET 291 GO tO SUDON rm 292 Call SUDFOULING SBR Jeske a E 293 SKID SKP Jaciara a a A 294 es 295 Scan Synchronization Inhibit 58 296 Parameterized Go to Subroutine 296 Program the Instruction dre ge ex cua tecum a up au qu SO 296 Parameterized Go to Subroutine 0 54 297 Read Slave Diagnostic RSD aie aped sioe 298 ISSD ODGFaloFiususetesunE eum iau MEME 299 External Subroutine Call 5 300 NEW TASK TASK ec 301 Special InstrielloliSs iiio a A a A 302 Immediate I O Read Write IORW 302 NG Operation NOP d E 303 Date Compare este E 303 Date E 303 304 Time 304 Load 305 Load CONS ane Veesi 306 LOCK MEMORY EOC IR 307 Unlock Memory UNLOK 307 Force Swap FIRS 308 12 Special Function Instructions 311 Defining Special Function Programs 311 Convert BCD
168. 3 are automatically reserved for the operation of the shift register Register Start contains the Count which equals the current number of entries in the shift register Register Start 1 contains the Index which acts like a pointer to indicate the next available location of the shift register into which a word can be shifted When Index equals one the next available location is Register Start 5 and 50 Register Start 2 contains the Length which equals the maximum size of the shift register in words Register Start 3 contains the Checkword The checkword is used internally to indicate whether the FTSR is initialized FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop The register length Register Length determines the size of the shift register The register length depends upon the memory location that you choose and how much memory you have allocated if the memory is user configurable The status bit specified by Status Bit is turned on to indicate that the register is full The bit Status Bit 1 is automatically reserved as a second status bit and turns on whenever the shift register is empty Use the same status bits for FTSR IN that you use for the FTSR OUT FTSR IN sets Status Bit 1 when the register is empty FTSR IN clears this bit If the shift register is empty status bit Status Bit is off and Status Bit 1 is on When the FTSR IN executes the following actions occur The word currently in memory loc
169. 3 or TF 1613 software drivers using Simatic Net Software CD Configure the CP 1413 or 1613 hardware and software using COML TF and Setting the PG PC Interface from Siemen s Simatic Net Software CD 59 505 Programming Software for Windows Access H1 Devices Using 505 WorkShop To access the H1 network with 505 WorkShop From the File menu chose Fast PLC Setup 1 Select H1 from the Fast PLC Connection Setup dialog box 2 Click OK on the Setup dialog box 3 From the File menu chose Fast PLC Connection H1 communications can also be established via open program Result The H1 Network Names screen appears Figure 4 14 4 Select anode name These are the node names you configured using the COML TF software prior to rebooting Using the arrow keys or mouse select an H1 network node name and Click Result 505 WorkShop is online forces Figure 4 14 NOTE The CP1413 and CP1613 drivers do not run in protected mode When using either of these drivers only one application may be used at a time 60 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop oetting Up and Using TIWAY in 505 WorkShop There are two versions of the host adapter hardware for TIWAY TIWAY Host Adapter and 1 NOTE Since the Network Interface Module does not support some task codes when the controller is in run mode you cannot perform the following functions communicating through a Fo
170. 32000 Ramp Soak for SP Select YES or NO in the RAMP SOAK FOR SP field to indicate whether a ramp soak program for the loop is to be executed 184 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Alarm Deadband Enter a value in engineering units for the Alarm deadband in the ALARM DEADBAND field When you specify an Alarm deadband the controller can provide hysteriesis on all Alarms except the rate of change Alarm to prevent them from chattering when the process variable is near one of the Alarm limits The loop does not exit the alarm condition until the process variable has come inside the alarm limit minus the deadband Monitor Low Low High High oelect Yes to have the controller monitor the Low Low High High Loop otherwise select No The Low Low High High can be entered as values requiring critical action Monitor Low High Select Yes to have the controller monitor the Low High Alarm otherwise select No The Low High Loop can be entered as values requiring remedial action Process Variable Alarm Low Low Enter a real number in engineering units must be less than or equal to low Alarm value and greater than or equal to low range of Process Variable Process Variable Alarm Low Enter a real number in engineering units must be less than or equal to high Alarm value of Process Variable Process Variable Alarm High Enter a real number in engineering units must be less than or equal to high high Alarm value of Process Variable
171. 4 words to represent the actual date These are defined as follows Date Year CDB 0000 0099 Date 1 Month BCD 0001 0012 Date 2 Day of Month BCD 0001 0031 Date 3 Day of Week BCD 0001 0007 303 Time Set TSET The Time Set TSET instruction sets the time portion of the real time clock to the values contained in designated memory locations When the input to the TSET instruction transitions from off to on the time portion of the real time clock is set to the values contained within the three consecutive V memory locations designated by TM and the output is turned on for one scan TSET Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant Only Varies with configured One shot range TM Word Address V W G The TM parameter uses 3 words to represent the actual time These are defined as follows Hour BCD 0000 0023 TM 1 Minute BCD 0000 0059 TM 2 Second BCD 0000 0059 Time Compare TCMP The Time Compare instruction TCMP compares current time in the real time clock with values in the designated V memory locations When power is passed to the input the instruction is executed It compares the current hours minutes and seconds in the real time clock to the values in the designated memory location TM If a match occurs the output of the instruction is turned on If the time represented by the memory location is less than the real time value in the clock th
172. 401 Normally Closed Contact 245 Normally Closed Immediate 246 Normally Open Immediate 245 NOT 4 9 10 11 16 19 20 33 55 65 69 70 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 95 96 97 106 109 121 125 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 146 147 153 154 160 165 174 175 184 185 186 187 193 Offline Password Selection Access Level eric ue ETD ahi 147 One shot Contact OS 2 todo rote eor i saben o scuba Qaod oa cocco Fade 246 One Shop MOMOE oto IM EM UE 79 Online Password Operational Tur IS 143 Online Password Selection and Access Level uo esses etu ERE R RETE DER Fas V VHS 146 Online Versus Offline Programming 95 ODE 19 22 23 25 27 33 34 55 69 70 95 106 159 Open an Existing Logic Program Offline or 23 Open Propra e toeicevdedis e 22 23 25 20 27 Online che RET star he 22 23 25 20 21 DLP oer E EE 325
173. 505 Programming Software for Windows 505 WorkShop Version 3 50 By FasTrak SoftWorks Inc MN Copyright 2004 FasTrak Softworks Inc 505 Programming Software for Windows 505 WorkShop 1 Introduction 1 trc 1 Customer Suppor arain coemeterio Deb en ee cds 2 Updating the Software License 2 505 WorkShop for Windows 3 What is 505 WorkShop for 3 Package tes ic os cU ML 3 ovstem iedulreitTellis eet oe geet aoe ce qua asta ee 4 Software Requirements Dci ut denote dace 4 Parallel Port Compatibility 4 2 Installation 7 505 VVOIKOSDOD vo Puncta ae area aes ee Deos ied 7 205 WorkShop Access 8 Installing th amp Fas TTaKe IKGy goo aan 9 Wnatis the FasTrak Key ipea e eeu EE n 9 Connecting the 9 Troubleshooting the 10 Connect the Communications Cable 11
174. 9 83 Multiple W Wis een pa Aha deu Mo sd e EO NE e LUN DNE 19 Moliph MULD cc p HP 267 AIRE rere r 79 MWT E Eni ues M MES IM MM AME E ME 79 N Navigation 1 4 15 18 20 22 85 95 96 97 98 104 106 108 111 132 164 165 171 173 180 181 190 193 195 196 Keyboard 1 15 95 96 97 98 104 106 108 171 173 180 181 190 193 195 196 Mouse 4 18 20 22 85 95 96 97 98 104 106 111 132 164 165 171 173 180 181 190 193 BIOS m 111 164 Network Header REATO TER ONREK m 32 158 Siu T 23 Ney Losic Propra TP 22 IM 21 50 96 106 New em 22 NEW ROW d 21 50 96 106 New Task CLASSI i ete entm aiiis uut Miu I M MC 301 Next A baba Dantes ia uai GE 120 p HT ee 58 Normal Contact S ER as od Devas pe Ea nere 245
175. AT to replace several networks of logic that are required to time the field device s operation and generate alarms in case of failure The MCAT timer times down from the preset value specified in Timer which is stored in TCP memory The time current time is stored in TCC memory When the Open input transitions from off to on and the close and Stop inputs are both off the OO turns on and the timer starts Once triggered OO remains on independent of the open input until one of the following event occur The timer times to 0 The OA is turned on and the OO is turned off The OF turns on while the CF remains off The OO is turned off and the timer resets to 0 If OF turns on and then turns off the OA comes on immediately no time delay the next timer the box is executed Q The Stop input turns on The OO CO OA and are turned off and the timer stays where is was when STOP was received If the Stop inputs turns off while the Open was when Stop was received If the Stop input turns off while the Open input is on then the timer starts at the preset value again not at the value when the Stop input turned on Q The Close input turns on after the Open turns off The CO is turned on and the timer starts counting at the preset The OO is turned off When the Close input transitions from off to on while the Open command and Stop command inputs are both off the CO turns on and the timer starts CO should turn on the motor that closes
176. Address NEN Count zl Attributes Increment f Format Device Name Test Station Figure 0 24 Start Address will hold the first address in a range of addresses Start Row will hold the starting address location in the current trend window Destination can be in the form of an end address or a count For example a start address of 400001 and an end address of 400003 will display 400001 400002 and 400003 in the trend window oelecting a count of 3 instead of an end address will give the same results However if increment is set to 2 and end address is selected addresses 400001 and 400003 will be displayed while addresses 400001 400003 and 400005 will be displayed if count is selected The format will determine how to display the data values for the addresses selected Clicking on the Apply button will fill the trend window with the addresses specified in the Fill dialog without closing the dialog Pre existing addresses in the trend window that fall within the fill range will be overwritten if OVR is enabled in the status bar After clicking on Apply the following fields will be modified Start Address This will now indicate the address at the new start row Start Row This will now indicate the first empty row after the last address in the fill 238 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Fill Example Below is an example of how you might set up the fill dialog Start Address 400001 Start R
177. Alt U The System Number dialog box appears Figure 6 12b The part number and release for each card along with the slot number and name of the card displays as shown System Software Part Numbers ple Slot Part uber Release 2 596626 O0401 4 0 1 Beta 1 2 596626 0310 3 1 Beta 4 Figure 6 12b 136 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Performing Syntax Check Use the Syntax Check to check your RLL program for errors that will prevent the controller from entering RUN mode such as UNKNOWN INSTRUCTION LADDER ELEMENT OUT OF RANGE NO CORRESPONDING PAIR or OUT OF MEMORY Syntax Check is currently available only on 545 555 and 575 controllers To execute the Syntax Checker 1 Click Syntax Checker on the Diagnostics menu Alt D Y The Syntax Checker menu dialog box is displayed Figure 6 12 gt Tata Eos Success _ Figure 6 12 Up to 16 errors can be displayed on the Syntax Check screen if more than 16 errors are detected the prompt line announces ADDITIONAL ERRORS DETECTED To display the additional errors use the scroll bar on the dialog box If no errors are detected Syntax Check reports No errors detected on the bottom line If errors are detected they will be listed within the dialog box The logic errors can be viewed by selecting the error and pressing the go to error button on the dialog box 137 Ladder Status Online You can display the
178. CMP compares signed integer value in A with a signed integer value in B Based upon the comparison the coil or relay addresses may be turned on or off If the input is ON then the compare instruction will be executed on every scan The CMP instruction works as follows The value in A is compared against the value in B A and B are not affected If A lt B LT is turned on 1 GT is turned off 0 there is no power flow If A B GT is turned on LT is turned off and there is no power flow If A B GT and LT are turned off and the output is turned on If the input is off the GT and LT coils are turned off CMP Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Number Constant 0 32767 Parameter A Word Address Form A Parameter B Word Address Form A Parameter LT Bit Address Y C B Parameter GT Bit Address Y C B Indexed Matrix Compare IMC The Indexed Matrix Compare IMC instruction compares a predefined 15 bit mask pattern to the status of up to 15 discrete points The mask to be compared is selected from a field of up to 16 masks by the step number currently located in Cur Ptr If a match is found the output is turned on The IMC instruction is described as follows The Enable input must be on for the instruction to be executed When Enable is ON and the Start input is turned on the instruction is executed The current status of up to 15 X Y and C points is checked against the pre
179. Cable Pin Outs for RS 232 C 12 Cable Pin Outs for RS 422 Ports 13 Ethernet Connec hosanna T o 13 3 505 WorkShop Basics 15 Welcome to 505 WorkShop rk p Febre nuns esa ee a a bts 15 Software Features eco toi cet te esie a desee 15 Starting 505 WorkShop 16 The Landscape 505 WorkShop Window 17 Window 17 I SITIO HOT deals M 18 Inserting an Instruction Bar Item in a Program 18 B OT Is dtes Lk orb crees o Paetus 19 Multiple Program Windows seeeseeseeeneeenennnnnnn nnn 19 Sas ene ne cae Lote 20 20 21 Working With Logic Programs 22 Creating New Logic Program 22 Fast PLC Connection Connecting to a PLC 22 Open an Existing Logic Program Offline or Online 23 Address Network Mode
180. Change the size or position of the window The following buttons appear in the corner of the title bar f 5oftShop 505P 1 nlix E xl Figure 3 4 Button Location Function Title Minimize Left box Click the dash button to reduce window to an icon Maximize Middle box Click the window button to enlarge the entire screen Close Right box Click the X button to exit WorkShop 20 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Toolbar The Toolbar displays a row of buttons Each button represents a frequently used option oelect the option by clicking on its button saving you the steps of selecting several options from a series of menus Notice that when you click on the button its purpose appears on the Status Line at the bottom of the window Figure 3 5 AMS 6 10 0 10 0 m e Fast PLC Connection Create a new program See Creating New Logic Programs Open an existing program See Opening Logic Programs Save the active program See Saving Logic Programs Print See Printing Logic Programs Cut the highlighted section to the clipboard See Editing Logic Programs Copy the highlighted section to the clipboard See Editing Logic Programs Paste a section from the clipboard See Editing Logic Programs Find a network address or tag Find the next occurrence of the found address or tag Display Ladder Editor Display Special Functions Editor ESI sc e S EB
181. Configuration E E st ui each contol pent Once Et M d aed an fine Privdeges ser Lest E Iz paul laii F j Prredeger E _ Adila Eck User Delete Uns Save _ ea Figure 14 2 In addition to controlling user access this security mode also can record each attempt made by a user to the parts displayed above To enable this click on the Enable Security Log check box Note f when exiting this dialog with the check box checked but having not setup the security log PLC WorkShop will warn the user that no log file had been configured and the check box selection will not be retained To learn more about setting up the FasTrak Authentication Log please refer to this chapter or click here 363 FasTrak Authentication Log Setup The following dialog is launched from the FasTrak Authentication Configuration dialog by clicking on Log Setup FasIrak Authentication Security Audit Setup Figure 14 To write the local security log to a Microsoft Access database file click the Microsoft Access radio button Enter or Browse the name of the Access file and select a File Format from the group box To write the local security log to an SQL database file click the Other Database radio button Enter the file Connection String in the edit box 364 F
182. Control Alarm Timer MCATD eee e eem 255 Mouse 4 18 20 22 85 95 96 97 98 104 106 111 132 164 165 171 173 180 181 190 193 MOVE oiu dos RO EE d 1 19 20 21 45 73 79 83 97 98 106 109 120 165 173 179 191 NOVO DVI P PPP 274 Word Element VIVES e 274 Move Image Register From Table MIRFT sssseeeeeeennnnnenemmmenennnnn 212 Move Image Register to Table MIRTT esses nnne 273 Move Image Register to Word MIRW ccccccccccccccccessseececccecaaeseeccceeeeaeeeeeecceeessaaaseeecceeeeaaaensess 273 79 Move Word MOVW a samen 2712 Move Word From oett o Do rate o oat Donati a ntu de ET enti OU ME 79 Move Word From Table eee emen 276 Move Word Image Register MWIB 278 Move Word to T Able 79 Move Word to Table 277 Move Word with Index 278 E
183. Element Used Table X WX C K TC SHR OS Y WY V STW DRM MWT 125 505 Programming Software for Windows Creating an Address Used Listing To create an element usage listing both online and offline programming you can track addresses in a program by viewing the Address Used Listing l 126 Select Address Used Listing from the View menu The Address Used Listing window appears Figure 6 09b If you have more than one program loaded the information displayed is for the program in the active window The Address Used Listing uses information from the Cross Reference Table If the Cross Reference Table is not current a warning will appear to build the table NOTE Only validated and entered logic is considered part of the current program Thus logic not entered and validated will not show in the Address Usage Listing See Validate and Enter Logic in this chapter mcm I E UM m ee Ed a ERR UDDUZQU Figure 6 09 Type in the address or tag in the corresponding Address box The starting address will default to C1 or the last address selected in the active program window Whether Address or Tag is displayed is determined in the Program Setup The box below the Address Tag input box contains all addresses used in the active program Elements are shown on the display in increments of 10 CO C10 C20 etc Usage of the points between is shown in the adjacent column from 0 through 9 C1 u
184. FIBUS FMS in 505 WorkShop Installing the PROFIBUS FMS Communications Processor The SIMATIC 505 CP5434 FMS Communications Processor module referred to hereafter as the FMS CP module provides the interface required for a SIMATIC 505 programmable logic controller system to communicate with other devices over a common PROFIBUS network To install the FMS CP module in a SIMATIC 505 base follow the installation instructions in the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS FMS Communication Processor 505 CP5434 FMS User Manual The FMS CP module must be configured with the COM5434 Configuration software included with the module The COM5434 Configuration software operates in Windows 95 or Windows NT only To install the software follow the installation instructions in the S MATIC 505 PROFIBUS FMS Communication Processor 505 CP5434 FMS User Manual Each FMS CP module in a 505 base must be configured to communicate over the PROFIBUS network The module local configuration for each FMS CP module identifies its station address and the network communication parameters it uses to operate on the network NOTE You must define the module local configuration for each FMS CP module using the RS 232 port with the standard 505 WorkShop programming cable before you can communicate with it using the PROFIBUS FMS port Refer to the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS FMS Communication Processor 505 CP5434 FMS User Manual for complete information on configuring the FMS CP module with
185. Figure 3 22 appears Choose the appropriate options 3 Click OK Paste with Rewire Clipboard Contents NetwsiLines ibaa d _ Addiesses s 1 B tu m Figure 3 22 NOTE When pasting clipboard contents are inserted before existing items For example if you are pasting a network and the cursor is positioned at Network 002 click paste and the clipboard contents become Network 002 The previous Network 002 becomes Network 003 46 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Use Undo to reset networks addresses a segment to their original data Any modified or inserted rung can be reset Deleted rungs cannot be reset To access the Undo feature 1 Select Undo from the Edit menu or press Ctrl Z Result The Undo Logic window appears Figure 3 23 d Select the segments to reset and press OK or press Undo All to reset all networks addresses displayed 3 Click Cancel to close the window Undo Logic b Network Numbers Figure 3 23 47 505 Programming Software for Windows Clear Use Clear to clear an item without removing the space it occupies Access Clear from the Edit menu using the Logic Editor in either offline or online mode Clear can also be accessed from the Data Window To clear items 1 Select the item or items you want to clear by clicking holding and dragging the pointer
186. Helpies F1 Figure 0 10 224 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Configuring FTTrend Devices Before any addresses can be inserted into a trend window devices must be configured so that the servers know where to read the addresses This is done by selecting Device Source from the Setup menu list Only devices from running servers can be configured Opening up a trend window starts a server for the selected server Once a window is opened and the server starts running it will continue to run throughout the duration of the application The menu Device Source will be disabled if no servers are running When this menu item is selected or when a trend window is created with no devices attached to the server the dialog below will be displayed If the dialog was prompted by a new trend window the text in the box at the top will read One or more devices must be configured for server name before any addresses tags can be entered into the active trend window Device Source Configuration Doc File Path Delete Devices Batch5 BOSS erver CONTROLSHO devicel COM1 FOSS H SCONTAOLSH Modify Device Test Station RUSS TW Configuration File Select Figure 0 11 All the configured devices for all the servers will be listed here sorted by device name The name of the recently selected configuration file will be di
187. January 5 2000 Cancel Figure 0 7 Time Format Displays the current time at which the page was activated in a standard format or military format The default is standard format Date Format Displays the current date date at which the page was activated in four different formats The default is format 1 I Imonth day year each represented by 2 digits month day year each represented by 2 digits year month day The year is displayed in 4 digits while the month and day are displayed in 2 digits day month year The day and year are displayed in 2 digits while the month is displayed a 3 character abbreviation month day year The month is completely spelled out the day is displayed in minimal digits and the year is displayed as 4 digits 216 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Using Log Sheet The Log Sheet displays information about the devices such as address tag description value timestamp and status You can change the way the data is presented and determine your status online or offline i FTLogger File View Setup Messages Window Help LogSheet1 505Server 1 Test Station U16 device1 U16 devicet oo devicel OFF D1 5 Test Station i OUB Figure 0 56 Column Layout Each log window is a spreadsheet wi
188. M mee rc EH 97 To enter instructions using the mouse and Instruction Bar 97 To Enter Mnemonic Instructions with the Keyboard 98 HOUR GV c M SCENE MPO 102 Using the SF Program and Subroutine Editor 104 insent a New ROW ide pfit 106 Entering Special Function Program Instructions 106 soli gro Bore O a PEE T m ET 108 CUL iet c MEA M D i M iic tu UI Ei Me 108 Soo A 108 ml TH 109 Paste WIN INC WING 109 ss ecu 110 Bri 110 505 Programming Software for Windows n E PEE T cR MESTRE 110 Right Mouse Button Pop Up 111 ENa EST E T 111 FMANG op 112 Find a Network Network Address or Line Number 112 Find an Instruction Address or 113 Find Documentation String seesseessseeeseeeneeennenene nnn 113 RC 113 Search and Replace 114 search and Replace 115 Using
189. OMS To perform the following EEPROM tasks your controller must be in PROGRAM mode 1 the contents of RAM to EEPROM 2 Copy the contents of EEPROM to RAM 3 Erase the contents of EEPROM To execute the above EEPROMS tasks 1 Click on one of the above EEPROM tasks from the PLC Operations dialog box 2 When you receive the message Do you want to copy EEPROM to RAM Select either YES or NO Programming Port Lockout Use Port Lockout to prevent program changes from being made at different ports simultaneously If the controller is unlocked the Port Lockout button will display Locked If the controller is locked the Port Lockout button will display Unlock To execute Port Lockout 1 Click Port Lockout from the PLC Utilities menu Alt U The Port Lockout dialog box appears Figure 6 12a Click Lock or Unlock from the Port Lockout on the Port Lockout dialog box Port Lockout Unlocked oe oS Pon Figure 6 12a NOTE Programming devices connected through the same Dual Communication Port DCP cannot lock each other out 2 When you receive the message Lock or Unlock communication ports Select either YES or NO 135 oystem Number Use System Part Number to read the software part number and the release number of the cards installed in your controller To execute System Part Number 1 Click System Part Number from the PLC Utilities menu
190. Open dialog box appears 6 Type the program name in the Program Name line Change drives and or directories if necessary to find the program you wish to open You can open FSS 505 WorkShop 32 bit files FTK 505 WorkShop 16 bit files or VP5 TISOFT V5 0 files NOTE For TISOFT V5 0 files vp5 loads a new offline program is created with the logic and documentation always imported Synonyms for JMP GTS and SBY are not imported However their associated comments are imported as Headers 7 Click on the program name in the File Name scroll box and click OK Result The name of the program appears in the Program Name line of the Open Program dialog box 23 505 Programming Software for Windows 10 11 12 13 The selected program s name is put into Address Documentation Path If a different documentation program is desired it must be linked via Share Address Documentation When a file is configured you can specify a database file that holds and sorts all documentation Multiple users can simultaneously modify documentation for the same file thus regular updates can be scheduled to get the latest documentation within the database Documentation can be imported from FSS 505 WorkShop 32 bit files comma or tab separated Conversely you can export from the database file into a text file or a VP5 file TISOFT V5 0 files with Headers and Tags To set up shared documentation click the Advanced button
191. P 305 PER 306 Load Program 19 22 23 25 27 33 34 55 69 70 95 106 159 Load MESI ITE E Nm 120 Loading Parts of an Existing Logic Program 25 ME 20 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 146 147 153 186 Lock Auto Manual uet 186 L ck Occ qc c T 186 Lock Memor Lb OCK du e M D Mii Mia LT 307 MOCK CUP ONG iu 186 Lot Dalan eect ead latte cea cd 213 Los Blu 211 os Rr o o TRO TT ERE 34 35 36 37 39 Logic Editor Online iue A iss t tM INE 48 49 34 35 36 37 39 Logical Not Contact oou t dE b bai Nea bass Rx MM IESU i turc Eus 246 Ern eripe eR 185 Loop poe to aeter 171 173 180 181 183 190 193 Loop Output AddEGSS debent a ia tae 184 Low Process Variable Range 175 184 C TTE 1 Maskaple
192. PID Loop number that you want to enter or edit by using the left mouse button or the Arrow keys on the keyboard To edit the selected PID Loop number double click on the Loop number or click on the dialog box Edit button or use the keyboard to Tab to the Edit button and press Enter or Alt E The following dialog box appears see Figure 9 2 181 PID E dit d E EC jus B en us oo Bipolar Figure 9 2 NOTE view or edit documentation of a selected address Click on the Modify Doc button PID Title An eight character title can be entered for each specific PID Loop number The title is optional and can be left blank PID Algorithm Select POS for the position algorithm or VEL for the velocity algorithm in the PID Algorithm field For the position algorithm the position of the device being controlled is computed based on the error The velocity form of the PID algorithm computes the change in the device position based on the error 182 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop V Flag Address Enter an address C Y V or WY in the LOOP VFLAG ADDRESS field If you select NONE no data is written from the V Flags in the PID Loop You can still control the loop mode by using a SF program to change the control flag bits in the Loop V Flag The V Flags contains the operational data for a PID Loop The V Flags corresponds to individual bits making up the 16 bit word The bits are defined in T
193. PIN Variable PIN Variable and PIN are provided to force a two step procedure to be followed before a loop is tuned To use this feature PIN Variable and PIN must both be set If PIN Variable is a null or PIN is zero then SmarTune activation is a one step procedure dependent only on Start Variable If both are specified then PIN Variable must equal PIN or a SmarTune session will not be started or queued Previous Mode If Previous Mode is used SmarTune sets it to a value which will switch a loop to its pre session mode when written to a loop s LVF This was conceived for use when Automatic Download has been configured as false but may be used for other purposes If Automatic Download is false a loop is left in manual mode with its output set to Safe Output when a tuning session has completed When Automatic Download is true a loop is switched back to its previous mode and is assigned its previous SP on completion Previous SP Previous Output Previous Gain Previous Reset Previous Rate You can use these five parameters to record the prior SP Mn Kc Ti and Td of a loop before a SmarTune session starts See Previous Mode for a short discussion on why they would be configured 198 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Calculated Gain Calculated Reset Calculated Rate You can use these three variables to record the tuning values calculated by SmarTune oee Previous Mode for a short discussion on why they would be configured
194. Password Allows you to enable password protection for the controller Disable Password Allows you to disable password protection for the controller If you have not already entered a password for the controller 505 WorkShop prompts you for the current password If the password you provide is not correct 505 WorkShop does not disable the password protection This function does not work unless you provide a password FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Offline Password Selection and Access Level Access Level Full Access Eull Access Read Only Access Password Aliases Figure 6 12e The buttons in Figure 6 12e are defined below Close Allows you to return to the ladder display screen 505 WorkShop Q Enter Password Allows you to enter or change the password for the selected program on disk WorkShop prompts you for the new password twice If the new passwords are not the same the password is not changed To delete a password or to make the selected program on disk unprotected enter a null password or press clear and enter a new password Access Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for no access This option is written to the controller when you perform an Open function No Access does not work without a password Read Only Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for read only access This option is written to the controller when you perform an Open function
195. RIP OOSELCT 00 ON D1 Ofline 3 3 fine 10 SYSTM nDDAUTO DDSTART OFF D1 Ofline 11 Cil EYSTM nnsTOP ao ON D1 Offline 12 OFF D1 Ofline 13 C13 MCCI nnLOCAL DD OFF D1 Ofline 14 C14 MCCI OO ON D1 Ofline 15 616 2 OLOCAL Oo OFF D1 Ofline 16 MCC2 OOREMOT ON D1 Ofline 17 Ci PRE BPROD OOMODE OFF D Ofline 1B 18 OOPROD OOMODE OFF D1 Ofline 18 OOSTRIF HIBMODE ON D1 Offline CUM FA rir3 Ih MOC m4 Figure 6 7 Press Enter to accept the Press Ctrl L on the Description or Tag column to bring up the documentation editor Type an address or tag in the address field p qoe M Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each value you want to view After entering a value use Next Address F5 to move down one cell and fill in the next address or tag or Previous Address F6 to move down one cell and fill in the previous address or tag Both Next Address and Previous Address are located in the Data menu or by clicking the right mouse button 7 Select Clear from the Edit menu if you want to clear a row or rows Select Delete from the Edit menu to delete a row or rows subsequent rows will move up 8 Windows selection techniques can be employed here See Chapter 3 Some Things You Should Know About Windows 120 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
196. S tons E 187 Absolute ABS 0 0 cccsssccsvscecsscecsvsccnvsvensevensvsceavscenvscensnsenavsceavscensevenscsenavsceuvsvenssvensvsseavsvenses 268 Accessing Configuration m 64 Accessmie PLC C sasora a OA E 76 ADD i debe 1 17 18 83 165 CADID S 2d dus tede fub 267 Address Documentation 5 obesse 23 Address nte tom uet ater E ADAM 127 Address USO ERR E T UE 125 126 Addiess NeEWOEK Mode n ctor muerte eer m t uide NU M Heu stu uma qnd M C dead 23 Alarm ce wanes a as hea ess aed o ADD CR coe E Dm c 176 185 PAA AMG END R GLO vice EA EN 173 Alarni EIE 1 75 77 174 176 179 183 184 185 148 77 171 173 174 175 Analog Alarm Editor eM d 171 Analog ullus n A a 173 ASSIM ACE CS SCS tu hare i ont i ipai nasa cud anon
197. To see SF headers in the active logic program select Program Setup from the Options menu Click All Headers in the Logic Editor box and click OK 158 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Using Documentation Window In both online and offline programming you can view and edit tags descriptions and comments in your program using the Documentation Window The Documentation Window allows you to view create edit and delete tags descriptions and comments for the active logic program The maximum number of characters for each item is defined below Descriptions 96 Tags 32 Comments 2048 To open the Documentation Window click amp the toolbar or select Documentation Window from the View menu Figure 7 6 Ei SoftShop FASTRAK z um OB 2 ASMELET OF 2 CSIIELCT 2 SSIELCT 09 HEAD SEIP ASIIELCT CSIELCT SSIIELCT 2 HEADMUIP ASMELET 1 CSIIELCT I 15 aH HEADBLIP ASHELCT BE The window is displayed with all of the addresses tags and descriptions in the current program The first column indicates the method of sorting NOTE Only one 1 documentation window can be displayed per program The window also can be sized and moved to another location within the viewing area using the standard window features Customizing the Display The Documentation Window can be cus
198. Trak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Using in 505 WorkShop and Setting Up TCP IP Communications Connect Your PC to Ethernet Your system administrator must determine what type of cable is best suited for your installation because it affects your choice of Ethernet card for your PC NOTE The PPX 505 CP2572 module directly supports 10BaseT UTP cabling If your existing network does not use UTP but the cabling medium is IEEE 802 3 compliant you can purchase a transceiver that connects that media to the AUI port on the module If you are installing a new network discuss your cabling requirements with your network administrator or your local Siemens distributor Your Ethernet card purchase should be guided by the type of cabling medium that is best suited for your network There are really only three PC card options 10BaseT UTP 10Base2 Thin Ethernet and AUI oome cards are combinations The most commonly used are either 10bT or AUI with Fiber Optics cable 10Base2 is not as widely used and is not recommended as highly because of the potential network problems 10Base5 Thick Ethernet cable which also requires the use of transceivers is sometimes used and can be obtained through your oiemens distributor In order to communicate to a 505 PLC which is connected to a TCP IP network a TCP IP stack needs to be installed on your Windows machine Windows 95 and Windows NT ship with a TCP IP stack WINSOCK DLL If TCP IP is not
199. User Password Once password security is enabled PLC WorkShop requests users to enter their passwords at various times to operate the software Passwords can be requested each time users attempt to enter a password protected portion of the application Alternately passwords may be requested only once when WorkShop is first started 367 At Each Control Point Password control points are designated as privileges within the User Security Settings group box illustrated in the following pages Specifying that passwords are requested at these control points requires users to enter their name and password every time they attempt to use these features The advantage of this selection is that multiple users can operate WorkShop without having to exit and restart the application under another user name and password Once a user has completed a password protected operation and exits that function other users can access password protected operations by entering their own user names and passwords The disadvantage of this selection is that it requires users even the same user to re enter user names and passwords each time they attempt to access one of the password controlled features For example saving a program to disk is one of these control points Assume a user edits a ladder program The user then selects Save from the File menu to write the changes to disk The Password Required pictured here appears requesting the user
200. able 9 1 Table 9 1 PID Loop V Flags 1 Bit PID Loop Function 1 12Go to manual mode 2 12Go to auto mode 3 12Go to cascade mode 4 amp 5 45 0 0 Loop is in manual mode 1 0 Loop is in auto mode 0 1 Loop is in cascade mode 6 1 Error is positive 1 Error is negative 7 1 Process Variable is in high high Alarm 8 1 Variable is in high Alarm 9 1 Variable is in low Alarm 10 1 Process Variable is in low low Alarm 11 1 Process Variable is in yellow deviation alarm 12 1 Process Variable is in orange deviation alarm 13 1 Variable is in rate of change Alarm 14 1 Broken transmitter alarm 15 1 PID Loop is overrunning 16 1 Unused Sample Rate Enter a time in seconds in the SAMPLE RATE field The sample rate determines how often deviation Alarm bits and associated math are evaluated Sample rates are programmable in 0 1 second increments with Alarms checked at least once every two seconds The sample rate can be any floating point number between 0 1 and 1 6772 x 106 seconds 183 Process Variable Address Enter an address V WX WY or select NONE in the PROCESS VARIABLE ADDRESS field A process variable must be specified for each PID Loop The process variable can be taken from the following A word input or output module The programming table uses a WX WY address Q Alocation in V Memory Uses an address in V Memory in the programming table When a special calculation is performed
201. ad from the server is displayed Addresses or tags entered while the log window is offline or online pause display a zero value Time Stamp This column allows you to view the time that the data value was read and put into the server cache Status Status of the data read from the device Any errors reading addresses will be displayed here Since many addresses are read in one packet a status error is usually displayed in multiple rows For example assume we configured 200 V addresses in a 505 PLC and are displaying them all in FTLogger If a packet can consist of 256 addresses and we enter V201 a status error is displayed on all 201 rows because the entire packet has failed by including 1 erroneous address Unlike SoftShop ControlShop does not implement the type of error checking that would prevent a user from entering an invalid address so it is up to the PLC device to report these types of errors When offline all the status rows display the string Offline This field is not displayed by default 218 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Data Menu Functionality The following options are available from the Data menu Format Displays and logs the value where the cursor is located as well as any highlighted values Size Two sizes 16 bit or 32 bit Next Previous Based on the vender address displays the next device register address Based on the vender address displays the previous device register address Fill Fills th
202. address X Y WX WY Points Constant Number of points to move 1 64 NOTE 7he number of points to move must be a multiple of 8 All points must reside in the same module 302 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop No Operation Date Compare DCMP The Data Compare instruction DCMP compares the current date of the real time clock with the values contains in the designated memory locations When power is passed to the DCMP instruction the current date in the real time clock is compared to the date stored in the memory location in the instruction If the dates match the output of the instruction is turned on DCMP Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 Date Word Address V The Data parameter uses 4 words to represent the actual date These are defined as follows Date Year CDB 0000 0099 Date 1 Month BCD 0001 0012 Date 2 Day of Month BCD 0001 0031 Date 3 Day of Week BCD 0001 0007 Date Set DSET The Date Set DSET instruction sets the date portion of the real time clock to the values contained in the designated address When the input to the DSET instruction goes from off to on the date portion of the real time clock is set to the values in the memory locations designated by Date and the output is turned on Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 Date Word Address V W G The Data parameter uses
203. ains the Call statement Valid Descriptors are Integer Address or Value address containing an integer value e g 3642 V100 or WX77 or V100 2 Real Address or Value address containing a real value e g 33 642 or V120 or WY55 or V100 2 Optional the field can be left blank P2isa value or constant to be passed between the SF subroutine that is called and SF program or the SF subroutine that contains the Call statement Valid Descriptors are Integer Address or Value address containing an integer value e g 3642 V100 or WX77 or V100 2 Real Address or Value address containing a real value e g 33 642 or V120 or WY55 or V100 2 Optional the field can be left blank P3S3isa value or constant to be passed between the SF subroutine that is called and SF program or the SF subroutine that contains the Call statement Valid Descriptors are Integer Address or Value address containing an integer value e g 3642 V100 or WX77 or V100 2 Real Address or Value address containing a real value e g 33 642 or V120 or WY55 or V100 2 Optional the field can be left blank P4is a value or constant to be passed between the SF subroutine that is called and SF program or the SF subroutine that contains the Call statement Valid Descriptors are Integer Address or Value address containing an integer value e g 3642 V100 or WX77 or V100 2 Real Address or Value address containing a real value e g 33 642 or V120 or
204. ains the box The MCR operates as an output enable instruction with the following features The must have power flow and not be nested within the zone of control of an MCR not having power flow for discrete outputs in the MCR zone of control to turn on or stay on The MCR controls the coils and discrete outputs of box instruction in its zone of control marks the end of the zone of control for the MCR having the same reference number If you do not use the MCRE the remainder of the program is placed under the control of the MCR You can make the MCRE conditional by placing a contact on the same network as the MCRE Make user that the contact that controls the MCRE is not controlled by the MCR Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 1 8 Return From Subroutine RET The Return from Subroutine RTN instruction ends the execution of a RLL subroutine and returns program execution to the network following the GTS instruction A RLL subroutine is executed until a RTN instruction is encountered When an active RTN is reached in the subroutine execution is returned to the first instruction following the GTS instruction in the RLL program The RTN instruction can be either unconditional or conditional The conditional RTN can be used within a subroutine to satisfy a condition that requires termination of the subroutine The unconditional RTN must be use d as the last instruction in a
205. aliases are used a PLC password is requested as seen in the dialog above But instead of entering the password actually stored in the PLC the password alias is entered 505 WorkShop looks up this alias in its list of password aliases to find the associated PLC password This associated PLC password is then used to grant online access to the PLC Note PLC password aliases can be used only when either FasTrak Security or NT Authentication Security are in use 148 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Accessing PLC Password Alias Feature PLC password aliases are maintained through the PLC Password dialog Select Password from the PLC Utilities menu below to display this dialog E SoftShop 5 5Program Edit View Prograri agnostics PLC Utilities Iptior outs DEEST TR puras su Ga Figure 6 14b 149 The PLC Password Dialog The PLC Password dialog below retains its original functionality which allows entry and modification of the actual PLC password setting the access level full read only or no access within the PLC etc However the addition of the controls within the Password Aliases group box offers access the PLC password alias feature Password Mode ENABLED Enable Password Enter Password Access Level FULL ACCESS Full Access Read Only Ma Access Password Aliases Figure 6 14c The controls within the Password Aliases group box are
206. and an error is declared see Table 9 4 Low Stop If a PV goes below Low Stop Mn is set to Safe Output and an error is declared see Table 9 4 Largest Gain Largest Reset Largest Rate If a calculated value is larger than a configured value then it is reduced to a configured value and a warning is declared see Table 9 4 Smallest Gain Smallest Reset Smallest Rate If a calculated value is smaller than a configured value then it is increased to a configured value and a warning is declared see Table 9 4 Activation Time Slice Calculation Time Slice These two values set how much impact SmarTune will have on PLC scan time If zero in all configurations a default will be used 2 milliseconds Otherwise in each category the largest value specified will be used Activation Time Slice controls how responsive SmarTune is to tuning session requests Increase this value if SmarTune is taking an excessive amount of time to start a tuning session Remember that as this value is increased PLC scan time will increase Calculation Time Slice determines how much real time it will take to calculate tuning parameters It is possible a calculation might take 20 seconds or more of PLC time If a PLC has a scan time of 10 milliseconds and Calculation Time Slice is 2 milliseconds then a 20 second calculation would take about 120 seconds in real time 10ms 2ms 2ms 20s 120s The above formula is an algebraic simplification of Xs
207. are shown below 385 When launched from the Start menu the Security Server Location dialog will prompt the user to select the machine that the server will run on E a aim Se Les ati gf ENGINEERING 9 OPERATIONS Figure 14 15c 386 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Configuring Users Groups and Security Audit After having configured security and chosen a server location individuals Users Groups of Users and permissions may be set from within the FTSecCfg utility The dialog below will be referenced in this manual with regards to these features BLELTIN HT AUTHORITY di gem Frane PLC LO persbon C mrd The selected server machine appears in status bar in lower right portion of the application window In the tree control on the left most pane pick PLC Workshop 32 for Modicon In the Users and Groups list box two names System and either the administrators group or the current user will exist by default with access to all features Adding and Removing Users and Groups To Add or Remove individual Users or Groups use the pushbuttons on the far right of this dialog Add additional users and or groups by selecting the button Remove users or groups by highlighting the name and selecting the Remove button Users and groups that are not displayed in the list box are automatically denied access to all features The list box i
208. ariables Figure 3 6a In the Load Program by Parts dialog box select the parts of the program you wish to load or select Load Complete Program to load all parts 13 To enter a different file name Click Browse The Open dialog box appears Type the program name in the Program Name line Change drives and or directories if necessary to find the program you wish to open You can only open FSS 505 WorkShop 32 bit files programs Click on the program name in the File Name scroll box and click OK Result The name of the program appears in the Program Name line of the Open Program dialog box 25 505 Programming Software for Windows The selected program s file name is put into the Address Documentation Path If a different documentation program is desired it must be linked via Share Address Documentation When a file is configured you can specify a database file that holds and sorts all documentation Multiple users can simultaneously modify documentation for the same file thus regular updates can be scheduled to get the latest documentation within the database Documentation can be imported from FSS 505 WorkShop 32 bit files comma or tab separated Conversely you can export from the database file into a text file or a VP5 file TISOFT V5 0 files with Headers and Tags 6 Tosetup shared documentation click the Advanced button on the Open Program dialog box Result The Share Address Documentation dialog box appears
209. asTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Data Link Properties Dialog If choosing a database other than Microsoft Access and the user does not provide a Connection String click on Select and the Data Link Properties dialog opens This dialog is the first in a series of tabbed dialogs which help the users create the necessary string of the local security log file IAM 1 1 DLE DB Pririder Microsoft Jet 151 OLE DE Jet DLE DB DELE DB lor OLE DB Proevier bor SOL Sene GLE Simple Prosicke Misso 3 0 OLE Pradai hape DE Pacers Mascon 5 Figure 14 3b 365 Security Administration Dialog Security administrators control the password security feature of WorkShop through the Security Administration dialog below l asTrak muthenkicatian Security Configuration Audit Sings Request user password Usar chass B each contol pont C nite ak Hartu Ei e up an Reque charge B 5 mht Privdeges User Lizi E m E F Garaik Pr g g F nigu Figure 14 6 The security feature can
210. at a time Clear is accessed through the Edit menu or by pressing the Delete key 48 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Delete Use Delete to delete an item and remove the space it occupies Access Delete from the Edit menu using the Logic Editor in either offline or online mode Delete can also be accessed from the Data Window To delete 1 Select the item or items you wish to delete 2 Select Delete from the Edit menu Result The Delete box appears Figure 3 25 3 Click the items you want to delete 4 Click OK or press Enter le ond E Figure 3 25 Ladder Delete The following table describes the deletion items Item Function Network Deletes a network or a range of networks addresses To delete a range of networks addresses enter the number of the first network to delete in the From box Then enter the number of last network to delete in the To box Row Line In Ladder selecting a row deletes all instructions and branches from the row where the cursor is positioned Logic below the deleted row s moves up When box instructions prevent a deletion an error message appears Column Deletes instructions and branches from the column where the cursor is positioned Logic to the right of the deleted column s moves left When box instructions prevent a deletion an error message appears Logic Editor Online Using Delete in the Logic Editor while online works the same as in offline mode However a row or c
211. at you will use Use the following modem parameters eight bits no parity one stop bit and the highest baud rate that your equipment will support Baud Rate The rate of communications between the computer and modem Telephone Dialing Specifies which type of dialing to use Specify pulse dialing only if this is the only type your phone line supports Force NITP Specifies ASCII communications for the 545 555 and 575 Initialization Command The initialization commands sent to the modem Consult your modem manual for a list of appropriate commands Number to Dial Specifies the phone number to be dialed The number format can be dash 414 358 8088 space 414 358 8088 period 414 358 8088 or none 4143588088 Commas may be used if a pause is needed to gain access to an outside line before the number is dialed For example if 9 is used to gain access to an outside line and there is a pause between the time 9 is pressed and a dial tone then the number entered should be 9 414 358 8088 Click OK or press Enter to accept the settings Click Cancel to disregard changes and return to the Communications Setup dialog box FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 505 WorkShop with H1 Communications Before H1 Communications can be established with 505 WorkShop the following procedures must be completed Install CP 1413 or 1613 card Select I O range Select unique interrupt address Select dual port ram address Install TF 141
212. ated If both are true a session is deactivated and Start Variable must transition before session will be activated lfaSmarTune session is already queued or in progress Start Variable transitions are ignored Ack Variable acknowledges that SmarTune has detected that Start Variable or Abort Variable is true It is used to synchronize Start Variable and Abort Variable program logic with SmarTune If not used Start Variable and Abort Variable should remain true for a relatively large amount of time What constitutes a large amount of time depends on program size and time slice assignments See the discussion for Activation Time Slice for further guidance SmarTune Restart If this discrete variable is true then SmarTune is restarted completely SmarTune will act as if a run program run transition occurred If SmarTune Restart is specified in more than one configuration all are tested for true and acted upon 197 Status Variable This word variable reports on the current state of a session Three bits are used in the word to allow easy use by an RLL program Bit 2 is set when a SmarTune session is completed with or without errors or warnings If bit 3 is also set then an error was detected Similarly if bit 4 is set then a warning condition occurred If only bit 2 is set then a SmarTune session completed with no errors or warnings See Table 9 4 for a complete listing Note that entries with X s represent ranges of values
213. atement control returns to the statement in the SF program following the SF subroutine call Q If you use the EXIT statement in conjunction with an IF statement you can terminate the program under specific conditions You can leave A blank and the current error code is written to the ERROR STATUS ADDRESS that you specify in the SF program header IF this address is a discrete point it turns on You can define an error condition and assign it an error code 200 255 codes 0 199 are reserved When the EXIT statement executes the program terminates and this error code is written to the ERROR STATUS ADDRESS If this address is a discrete point it turns on 315 Fall Through Shift Register Input The Fall Through Shift Register Input statement operates an asynchronous shift register The shift register is essentially a table of 16 bit words The FTSR IN moves a word into the shift register each time the statement executes The FTSR IN is used in conjunction with the Fall Through Shift Register Output statement FTSR OUT tat moves words out of the shift register The FTSR IN format is shown in Figure 11 13 Input Register Start Hegister Length Status d Input is the input address from which the words are moved Input z Integer Address Register Start is the starting address for the shift register Four words Register Start through Register Start 3 are automatically reserved for the operation of the statement
214. ation A is shifted into the location specified by the Index The Count and the index are each incremented by one otatus bit Status Bit 1 turns off Each time the FTSR IN executes another words moves into the next available location the Index and the Count increment by one When the Index equals the length it resets to zero after the next execution by the FTSR IN When the shift register is full another word cannot be shifted in until one is shifted out by the FTSR OUT statement When the shift register is full status bit Status Bit turns on If you attempt to shift in another word an error generates error 87 You can use FTSR OUT to remove words from the shift register before all locations are full You can use FTSR IN to shift more words into the shift register before all words are removed 317 Fall Through Shift Register Output The Fall Through Shift Register Output statement operates an asynchronous shift register The shift register is essentially a table of 16 bit words The FTSR OUT moves data out of the shift register each time the statement executes The FTSR OUT is used in conjunction with the Fall Through Shift Register Input statement FTSR IN that moves words into the shift register Figure 11 15 shows the FTSR OUT format Register Start Output Hegister Length Status Register Start is the starting address for the shift register The four words Register Start through Register Sta
215. atus word bit as the input to the RSD instruction Do this in order to execute the instruction whenever there is a diagnostic for the slave corresponding to the bit NOTE The format of a slave s diagnostic buffer is dependent upon the PROFIBUS DP slave type See the user documentation for your slave s 299 External Subroutine Call XSUB The External Subroutine Call XSUB allows you to pass parameters to a subroutine that is developed offline in a non RLL programming language such as C or Pascal and then call the subroutine for execution The operation of the XSUB is described below Parameters must be numbered consecutively When the input is turned on the parameters are pushed on the user stack in order from the last parameter to the first parameter and then the subroutine is called When a discrete data element X Y C B is specified as an IN parameter the discrete value is passed in the least significant bit of a long word All other bits of the long word are unspecified When a discrete data element is specified as an I O parameter the address of the data element is passed The actual value of the data element is contained in the least significant bit of the byte at this address Other bits of this byte are unspecified When a word data element V K is specified as an IN parameter the value of the long word at this specified data element and the specified data element 1 is passed The addressed word is in the most signif
216. backup configurations The role swap may be the result of programmed diagnostic processors that detect a switch over convert You can also use the instruction to allow routine maintenance processors The role swap may be initiated by having a switch close in the I O or by using a timer to trigger the swap The FRS instruction depends upon the current power flow the power flow on the previous scan and the current state of the controller This instruction will only work in online only If no standby controller is preset the active controller interprets this instruction as a If the active controller with a standby detects an off to on transition on the input it queues a role swap to occur at the beginning of the next scan Upon completing the swap both controllers write the instruction reference number in the assigned memory address This value can be used to indicate why the role swap occurred On each scan the FRS address is compared to the specified memory location The output turns on independent of its input whenever the memory location contents match the instruction reference number FRS Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Instruction Reference Constant Depends on configured One shot memory configuration ST Word Address V 308 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 309 505 WorkShop 12 Special Function Instructions Defining Special Function Programs Convert BCD To Binary The Convert BCD to Binary statement c
217. be enabled and disabled and the places at which user passwords are requested can be specified through this dialog The list of users and their rights to access specific features within WorkShop can be managed within this dialog Enable Password Security The password security feature is disabled in WorkShop by default The security administrator can turn this feature on by checking Enable password security When this box is checked users are requested to enter their passwords either once each time WorkShop is started or each time they attempt to enter a password protected section of the application The current security mode is indicated in the status bar at the bottom of the WorkShop window as seen in the example below Security Enabled appears when security is enabled Security Disabled appears when security is disabled Inactive Passwords Timeout in N Minutes Once users enter their passwords they can operate PLC WorkShop indefinitely within their access privileges However if PLC WorkShop runs unattended for a designated number of minutes without user interaction the password under which the application is running can be timed out Click Inactive passwords time out after N mins to activate this feature Enter the number of minutes PLC WorkShop may remain inactive before the current password times out The default number of minutes is 30 but the valid range is 1 to 999 366 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Request
218. between the IF and the ENDIF are treated as THEN statements If an ELSE statement is used then any statements between IF and ELSE constitute by default a THEN section An ELSE statement indicates the end of the THEN section and the beginning of the THEN section and the beginning of the ELSE section in an IF THEN ELSE structure Statements between ESLE and ENDIF constitute the ELSE section in the IF statement IF ELSE and ENDIF statements may be nested to any level ELSE Function There is no data needed in this field When the ELSE is used between an IF and ENDIF statement any statement between IF and Else constitute by default a THEN section An ELSE statement indicates the end of the THEN section and the beginning of the ELSE section in an IF THEN ELSE structure ENDIF Function There is no data needed in this field The ENDIF indicates the end of an IF THEN ELSE structure 321 Integer Math Operation The Integer Math statement executes integer arithmetic computations The IMATH format based on the functions in Table 11 5 is shown in Figure 11 22 NOTE Non PowerMath CPUs do not support the following operators lt gt lt gt gt NOT gt gt lt lt ABS AND OR and the ABS intrinsic function Unary Not The expression NOT X returns the one s complement of X Shift right arithmetic Shift left arithmetic Multiplication Integer division Any remainder left over after the di
219. bit and word modules but not for word only modules the number for the address must begin on an 8 point boundary An 8 point boundary is n 8 1 e g 1 9 17 etc Addresses not starting on an 8 point boundary are changed to do so when you write the values WorkShop does not flag duplicate I O points However the Find I O functions under the PLC Configuration dialog box can be used to search for duplicate 1 points To Edit the 1 Address 1 92 Select the slave module number address to be edited by double clicking on the module number or by highlighting the module number and then clicking on the Edit button Enter I O address that is a multiple of n 8 1 After entering the I O address click on the Accept button then the Close Click on the Write button to send the configuration for all the slaves to the online controller or the offline program Or click the Write Slave s button to send the selected slave number configuration to the online controller or the offline program NOTE The standard for PROFIBUS DP I O DIN 19245 Part 3 stipulates certain bus parameters that cannot be changed while communications are in OPERATE mode If you modified those bus parameters when you set up your configuration file in COM PROFIBUS set communications to STOP mode before you execute Write All or Write Slave s in order to prevent bus errors FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Profibus
220. bove entering X4 in the Replace with combo box indicates the Search for addresses starting with C1 will be replaced with a range of addresses starting with X4 The Replace with through Static Boxes The numbers displayed in the Replace with through static boxes are automatically calculated based upon the ranges entered in the Search for and its through boxes Continuing the example above the Search for range starts at C12 and ends at C47 This is a range of 47 12 z 35 or 35 addresses of the C type Since the starting address entered in the Replace with combo box is X4 the last address in the replace range is 4 35 39 or X39 The number 39 is displayed in this Replace with through static box When the search and replace process begins any occurrence of C12 is replaced with X4 Any C13 is replaced with X5 and so on as illustrated below C12 is replaced with X4 C13 is replaced with X5 C14 is replaced with X6 C15 is replaced with X7 C16 is replaced with X8 C45 is replaced with X37 C46 is replaced with X38 C47 is replaced with X39 117 505 Programming Software for Windows Performing Multiple Search and Replace Operations Any or all of the 32 Search for and Replace with ranges can be used to perform multiple search and replace operations in one continuous process However once an address is changed during a given process it will not be changed again even when another Search for and Replace wit
221. can enter values directly into V Memory with a programming unit Constant Memory A block of memory within the controller may be allocated for constants unchanging data This memory type is called Constant Memory K Memory You can use a programming unit to load a table of data into K Memory and read the table during run time whenever you need the data for an operation otatus Word Memory A block of memory within the controller is allocated for storing status information relating to controller operations This information is stored in one or more status words STW 1 STW2 etc These status words can be used in the RLL program to signal and or correct alarm conditions 77 505 Programming Software for Windows Timer Counter Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for the operation of the timer counter group of RLL instructions including the following Timer TMR TMRF Counter CTR Discrete Control Alarm Motor Control Alarm Timer MCAT Timer DCAT Up Down Counter UDC When you assign a number to a timer counter up down counter Warning or discrete motor control alarm timer be sure that you do not use that number for any other timer counter up down counter or discrete motor control alarm timer For example if you configure a Timer 6 TMR6 do not configure any other operation e g a counter CTR or a discrete control alarm timer DCAT with the number 6 Assigning the same number more tha
222. click here for more details on the Event Viewer A Success audit will appear in the security log when a user is given access to a secure feature and the Audit Success box is checked for that feature A Failure audit will appear in the security log when a user is denied access to a secure feature and the Audit Failure box is checked for that feature All security changes in FTSecCfg are accumulated and do not get committed to the server until confirmation upon exit of FTSecCfg 388 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Event Viewer The Event viewer is a Windows application for displaying application security and system logs FasTrak uses and writes to this log to hold audits It is launched from within the Security Configurator To launch the Event Viewer click on View Event Viewer as shown in the figure below The Event Viewer is also accessible from the Administrative Tools of Window s Control Panel PT Moin Figure 14 17a The following window opens Double clicking an entry in the right most pane above will display more information for the item TII im E S BHLMAM 2 oomen Zensyssry 12 20 2002 10044134 Zensyssry Aimons 1203072002 LF AM Teray iems zjz7 2002 AZ PM Me retaler 120272002 1 4X00PM 12 27 2002 11 11 26
223. completely the 505 WorkShop window appears as described and defined in the next chapter 16 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop The Landscape 505 WorkShop Window The 505 WorkShop window is the starting point for all your work The key features of the window are designated with arrows on the sample illustrated below Definitions of each feature are next followed by more detailed information m S oftShop 505Program PLC Uthtes Options Window Help T C Drum Compare Bit ps Contral Special Program Windows instruction Bar Status Line For Help press F1 Figure 3 1 Window Description The key features of the 505 WorkShop window shown in Figure 3 1 are defined below More detailed descriptions follow Window Feature Function Instruction Bars Use to add instructions new rows and new networks addresses to a logic program See nstruction Bars Menu Bar Use to select 505 WorkShop functions See Menu Bar Multiple Program Displays view and edit windows of multiple logic programs at the Windows same time limited only by the size of your computer s memory See Program Windows Status Line Displays information about the operation in progress See Status Line Title Bar Displays the name of the application Buttons in the upper right corners change the window s size and position See Title Bar Toolbar Use to quickly access frequently used menu options See Toolbar 17 5
224. configuring ports Address Network Mode l 24 If there is no file transferred online when the program first opens then the ladder rungs are referenced in the old TISOFT Address Mode When the complete program has been load the program can be converted over to network mode To accomplished this select Switch to Network Display from the Options Menu The rungs are now displayed in Network and Address Mode Once rungs have been converted Network Address mode they cannot be converted back to Address Mode only FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Loading Parts of an Existing Logic Program Online 505 WorkShop allows you to load parts of an existing logic file to an online 505 controller One or more of the following parts can be loaded Configuration opecial Function Programs Profibus opecial Function Subroutines V Variables PID Loops K Constants Analog Alarms Word I O Force States U Memory Documentation Tags Descriptions Comments and Headers Editing or modifying a program online may produce unexpected or hazardous results To Load parts of an existing program you must first established an online connection with the PLC see Fast PLC Connection Connecting to a PLC Then 1 select Load By Parts from the File menu Ctrl B Result The Load By Parts dialog box appears Figure 3 SEE by Parts be Finibus 1 fee Load V
225. criptors are Literal constants Less Then or Equal to the High Limit Literal constants High Limit is the upper limit of the Scaled Input Valid Descriptors are Literal constants Greater Then or Equal to the Lower Limit Literal constants 2096 Offset indicates if the output is 2096 offset yes or 096 offset no If the output is a variable that has a 2096 offset range from 6400 to 3200 set option E to Y es If the output is a variable that has a 096 offset set option to N o Bipolar indicates if the output is bipolar yes or not no If the output is a variable that could range from 32000 to 32000 the variable is bipolar Set option to Y es If the output is a variable that could range from 0 to 32000 the variable is unipolar Set option to N o 347 THIS 15 AM EXAMPLE OF COMMENT STATEMENT COMMENT BE UP 1021 CHARACTERS The comment statement inserts a comment program for documentation purposes The comment statement is ignored during program execution A comment statement can contain a maximum of 1021 characters 348 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 349 505 WorkShop 13 Auditing Activity Audit The Activity Audit contains records which list programming and setting changes made by users while running WorkShop These records contain the date and time the activity occurred ageneral description of the activity the machine name of the c
226. cters 95 etc The first time a security administrator is established the password must be entered twice This original security administrator can add other security administrators through the Security Administration dialog discussed below Password d Required Figures 14 5 14 5 If a security administrator has already been established the password does need to be entered a second time for verification When a security administrator exists Verify password is disabled as illustrated below Enter the security administrator name and password then click OK If the two passwords match the Security Administration dialog below appears 360 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Choosing Security PLC WorkShop for 32 bit offers two unique security systems for use If the computer on which PLC WorkShop is installed is running under MS Windows 2000 or XP PLC WorkShop determines if the user currently logged in to the operating system is an administrator or belongs to the Administrator group To activate the security feature of PLC WorkShop click on Options followed by Security and then Administrator Options see below 505 WorkShop Figure 14 1a If PLC WorkShop is running under MS Windows 95 98 or ME the Password Required dialog appears see below This dialog allows the user to become the first security administrator Password Re 4 T
227. ction overrides the MCR or JMP when the SKP has power flow The zone of control for a SKP is limited to the task segment or subroutine in which the SJP is used the matching LBL must be defined after the SJP and be located in the same task segment or subroutine as the SKP Fora JMPE or MCRE contained within a SKP s zone of control the program functions as if the JMPE or MCRE is located at the end of the program whenever the SKP is active NOTE hen a SKP is active timers between the SKP and its LBL do not run Be careful when using timer and drum instructions if you want them to operate while a SKP is active SKP Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 1 255 294 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop LBL The 5 and LBL instructions provide a means of enabling or disabling program segments during a scan These instructions are often used when duplication of outputs is required and those outputs are controlled by different logic These instructions can be used to decrease scan time since the interactions between any active SKP and LBL instructions are not executed The SKP and LBL support the following features The SKP LBL instruction must be used together The LBL must appear before the instruction that terminates the current program segment TASK END RTN A SKP without a LBL generates a compile error If you use RLL subroutines you can use up to 255 SKP LBL instructions
228. d Application ID in the list box to go online If a file is being loaded from disk to the controller and the disk file Application ID is different than the connecting PLC s ID a warning appears describing that the loading file ID is different Select OK to continue the load or Cancel to abort 27 505 Programming Software for Windows Reading or Writing 575 Port Configuration To read or write the 575 port configuration click on the Port Settings button in the Application ID Table dialog box The Port Settings Dialog box appears Figure 3 8 MEI Pat Figure 3 8 To make changes to the port settings 1 Click on the item to be changed and either type in the change or click on the spin radio button or combo box 2 Click on Accept to send changes to the controller or Cancel to make no changes and return to the Applications ID Table dialog box NOTE the port you are changing is the port 505 WorkShop is connected to but the settings are not what 505 WorkShop uses when you press Accept the following prompt appears to confirm your action 505 WORKSHOP IS ATTACHED TO THE PROCESSOR THROUGH THIS THERE MAY BE A SHORT DELAY AS THE PORT IS RECONNECTED DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THESE PORT SETTINGS Select YES to change the port configuration and 505 WorkShop may or may not continue to communicate with the controller Select NO to abort the operation 28 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 5
229. d file as soon as data is entered into the trend window provided that the trend window is online and active If Specific time is checked then data will be read from the server and logged after the time indicated just below the radio button If the first radio button under Stop Trending is checked then any data in the trender window will be logged to the mdb file as long as the trend window is open Un checking the Online menu or checking the Pause Trending menu under the main menu item Mode will override this and suspend trending If Specific time is checked then trending will terminate after the time indicated just below the radio button If After time duration is checked then trending will occur for the duration of the time selected starting from the time indicated under the Start Trending group box If After one trend is checked then trending is terminated after the first and only trend Closing the trend window prior to the selected stop trending time will override the time and terminate all trending from the closed window A message prior to termination will warn you of the consequences of shutting down this window The Trend Days group box allows a user to select which days to apply the start and stop times from above You can apply the start time to the start day and the stop time to the stop day or by clicking on the Select day intervals check box the start and stop trend times can be applied a number of times to a n
230. d from LogSheet1 to log1 mdb t 10 00 05 AM 01 06 00 data was successfully logged from LogSheet1 to log1 mdb t 10 00 10 01 06 00 data was successfully logged from LogSheet1 to log1 mdb al 1 Current Device Batch5 Current Format U16 OFFLINE Figure 0 25 Trend Status Window Creation 240 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop This window will be created and hidden upon startup To access this window you must select the Trend Status menu under the main menu View A check mark next to Trend Status will indicate that we are currently viewing this window Clicking again on this menu will remove the check mark and hide the window Hiding the window will remove all the entries Entries will not be added to this window until is viewable or iconized If this window is full entries will be removed from the top down as new ones are appended to the bottom Trend Status Setup Dialog The trend status setup dialog can be accessed by clicking on the Trend Status menu under the main menu Setup This dialog is shown below Log Status Setup Source nk Windows Cancel th Help Status Messages Include Py Log Successes Text Color B Change Failures Miso Errors Background Color Change Status File Save Status Messages to Stop after 00 Kbytes Status File Path H SCONTROLSHOPSARELEASE SLogStat tut Brese Fig
231. dband around the setpoint for a specified period of time The END step terminates ramp soak profile When the program reaches an end step the loop remains in automatic mode and holds the setpoint constant 194 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning The Proportional Component Temperature control with PID has two regions of operation the proportional band and the saturated region The proportional band is the region above and below the setpoint where the controller output is less than 10096 The heat or cooling output is time proportioned as determined by the PID output The proportional gain value determines the proportional band A typical proportional band might be around 30 for a given machinery temperature control as shown in Figure 9 7 For example with a setpoint of 300 F a proportional band of 30 F would equate to the region between 270 F and 330 F where the controller would be in the proportional band Outside of this region on either side is the saturated region where the controller output would be 10096 which equates to 10096 heating or cooling 100 Output Prhnnniinnal Rand 100 Output Output Proportional Gain E mor Figure 9 7 Proportional Band A temperature controller using only the proportional component of the PID expression may experience a steady state error as shown in Figure 9 8 This error is induced by thermal loading on a temperature zone As the
232. defined bit patter identified by the step number loaded into Cur Ptr Ifa match is found the box output is turned on Q If no match is found and the Start input remains on the IMC checks the step selected by the Cur Ptr on every scan If the Cur Ptr value is out of range the controller automatically writes 16 to the Cur Ptr address This means that mask 16 is used anytime the Cur Ptr is out of range IMC Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 CUR PTR Word Address V W G 263 The Scan Matrix Compare Instruction SMC compares up to 16 predefined bit patterns to the current states of up to 15 discrete points If a match is found the step number that contains the matching bit pattern is entered into the memory location specified by the pointer and the output is turned on The SMC has the following properties Q The instruction is executed when the Start input is on Q If the Start input remains on the SMC instruction checks all programmed steps every scan The status of up to 15 discrete points is checked against the predefined bit patterns lfamatch is found the step number of the matching mask is entered into the memory location specified by Cur Ptr and the output is turned on Q If no match is found Cur Ptr is cleared 0 and the output is turned off SMC Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Last Constant 1 16 Cur Word
233. delete the password The programmable controller may be in one of three states of password protection Password The controller program is not protected Any authorized user may enter an initial password Disabled Password The controller program is not protected The user may change or delete the password Any authorized user may enable the password Enabled Password The controller program is protected according to the protection level assigned to the password see below If a protected operation is attempted from any communications port the operation is denied and an error response is given Only an authorized user may change delete or disable the password Three levels of access are available when a password has been entered and enabled in the controller Access The controller program cannot be read or modified Read only Access The controller program can be read but it cannot be modified Full Access The controller program is not protected 142 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Password Operational Modes There are nine online operational modes for password The following paragraphs describe online password operational modes and online disk password operations The following numbered paragraphs detail the corresponding mode number information found in Online Password Operations Table NOTE converting files from TISOFT to 505 WorkShop check to make sure that the selected program on disk
234. device The output of the instruction should control the device The DCAT timer times down from the preset value Delay which is stored in TCP memory The timer s current time is stored in TCC memory When the Open OA Close CA input to the DCAT goes from OFF to ON the followings operations occur d The time delay is set to the preset value defined by Delay both outputs and are turned off and the DCAT output turns on While the Open Close input to the DCAT remains ON the timer begins timing until the OF input turns ON or the timer times out If the OF input turns on before the timer times out the time delay is set to zero and the OA remains off If OF does not turn on before the timer times down is turned on IF OF turns on before the timer times down but then goes off again while the Open Close input is ON is turned on The is turned off if OF then turns on again When the Open OA Close CA input to the DCAT goes from ON to OFF the followings operations occur The DCAT output turns off the time delay is set to the preset value defined by Delay and both alarm outputs OA and CA are turned off While the Open Close input to the DCAT remains off the timer begins timing until the CF input turns on or the timer times out IF the CF input turns on before the timer times down the time delay is set to zero and the CA remains off If CF does not turn on before the timer times down i
235. e bit designated by LT is turned on If the time represented by the memory locations is greater than the real time value in the clock the bit designated by GT is turned on TCMP Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 TM Word Address V W G LT Bit Addr Blank Y C B Blank GT Bit Addr Blank Y C B Blank TM parameter uses 3 words to represent the actual time These are defined as ollows Hour BCD 0000 0023 TM 1 Minute BCD 0000 0059 2 Second BCD 0000 0059 304 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Load Address The Load Address instruction LDA copies the logical address of a memory location into a specified memory location a long or double word The LDA instruction can be used to before a MOVE instruction when the indirect addressing method is needed When power is passed to the LDA instruction the LDA instruction is executed The LDA instruction works as follows The address of the memory location specified in A is copied to the destination specified by BB The output is turned on after the instruction is executed unless an error occurs If the destination location is invalid bits 6 and 11 in STWO 1 are set and the STW200 address contains a value of 5 The destination address is not changed Ifthe input is off the instruction is not executed and power does not pass to the output The source address should be a direct or ind
236. e Delete to clear an item and remove the space it occupies To delete 1 Select the item or items you wish to delete 2 Select Delete from the Edit menu The Delete box appears 3 Click the items you want to delete 4 Click OK or press Enter Insert Use Insert to insert a selected object network row or column at the point of the current cursor position To insert an object 1 1 Select Insert from the Edit menu The Insert dialog box will appear 2 2 Click on the object you want to insert 3 3 Click OK or press Enter 110 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Right Mouse Button Pop Up Menus The menu items available with the right mouse button are as follows 8 a Find ue a um oe nus m Address Figure 6 5 Validate and Enter While programming in online or offline mode logic must be validated and entered before it can be saved to disk or transferred online To validate and check your logic 1 Press function key F8 click on the toolbar or select Validate and Enter from the Program menu 2 The message Validating and Enter appears on the screen 3 After logic is validated and entered and if necessary problems fixed the logic program can be saved or transferred online 111 505 Programming Software for Windows Finding Logic You can use the Find command on the Edit menu to search for the following functions within the active logic window Find elements in ladder SF
237. e Find What radio button 3 Inthe Find What box type the text you want to find Then chose the Find button to begin the search Find Next Click 39 on the toolbar or select Find Next on the Edit menu to find the next occurrence of an address or tag 113 505 Programming Software for Windows Search and Replace Address You can use the Replace command on the Edit menu to search for a specified address and replace them with another address The following logic windows support Search and Replace by address SF programs a Alarms a SF subroutines PID Loops Q Ladder Editor Use the following steps to conduct a Search and Replace Address 1 114 From the Edit menu Ctrl R select Replace and the Replace dialog box appears Figure 6 6a Figure 6 6a opecify the address number to be replaced in the Find What field and the address replacing it in the Replace With field For example to replace C1 with C2 simply type these two address numbers in the Find What and Replace With field respectively With this setting all occurrences of address C1 are Changed to address C2 for the selected logic type range opecify the logic type by clicking on the drop down box in the Where field and selecting one of the 5 logic types In the From Rung To Rung fields specify the search range for the replacement address If no range is selected the software defaults to the total number of networks lines in the target logic type Co
238. e Page Setup l 25 Start or open a logic program oelect Page Setup from the File menu or click on Page Setup in the Print Window Result The Page Setup dialog box appears Depending on which features you need to customize choose left right top and bottom margin To change the size of the margins type the measurement in inches for the margin you want to adjust in the Top Bottom Left or Right boxes If you would like to start your printout with a page number other than 1 change the Starting Page number Normally a title page does not print The title page contains the information you entered in the Title Page Print Editor If you would like to include this page as the first page in your printouts click on Include Title Page Click OK in the Page Setup dialog box to save your page settings and return to the active logic window NOTE The page setup options can also be accessed from the Print box that appears 70 after selecting Print from the File menu The page setup options are stored when saving a logic program file FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 71 505 WorkShop 5 PLC Memory 8 I O Configuration Overview This chapter shows you how to set up and configure your Siemens family PLC You must configure your PLC before you can create a ladder logic program Configuration is part of the program it performs the important function of relating the hardware components to the logic components Th
239. e also prompted with Coordinate Reset With Other Applications and Coordinate Reset With Entire System For each of these prompts press NO or YES as required for your process 153 Clearing Memory This option allows you to clear all or parts of logic memory data tags and documentation in the current program You can use clear memory in either online or offline mode When programming offline you clear the entire active program or parts When programming online you clear the PLC memory However you cannot clear memory online while the processor is in Run mode You must first stop the processor before clearing the memory online The following is a list of parts of memory that can be cleared Ladder V Data K Data Word I O Data TCC TCP Data DSP DSC Data PID Loops Analog Alarms Special Functions Programs Special Functions Subroutines U Memory To access the Clear Memory option 1 154 If you want to save the changes you ve made to your logic and documentation save them before going to Step 2 Use the Save Program or Save Program As options in the File menu Click Clear Memory from the PLC Utilities menu Alt U L A A warning message appears stating all program logic data values tags and documentation will be deleted Click Yes to clear all memory If changes to the program were not saved another warning message appears stating that changes to your prog
240. e an alternate entry in the User Name edit box To change an existing user password uncheck Retain existing password to enable the password edit boxes Enter and verify a new password Both password entries must match in order to save the new password oecurity administrator rights may be granted to or revoked from the user by checking or un checking Security Administrator Deleting Users To remove a user highlight a name in the User List box and click the Delete User button A verification message appears which asks to confirm the deletion Click OK and the user is removed User Security Setup Dialog Once the security administrator adds users their initial passwords and access privileges the User Options item of the Security Setup menu as illustrated earlier is enabled Users can select this menu item to change their passwords through the User Security Setup dialog below If the security administrator elects to request user passwords once at startup the Switch User radio button is enabled Otherwise if passwords are requested at password control points this radio button is disabled 370 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Changing the User s Password Users may change their own passwords Security administrators may also change their passwords Click the Change user password radio button and the dialog controls are set as illustrated to the left User x Security Setup Figure 14 9
241. e available Q Assign Tags Assign Addresses Q Edit and Create Documentation in Ladder Look up tags and use them in ladder These items are discussed in the following sections Assign Tags The Assign Tags option allows you to assign tags descriptions and comments to an undocumented address that you are currently using in your ladder program For example if you enter an address in an ADD instruction and that address does not have a tag or description the Edit Documentation window in Figure 7 7 will automatically appear when you move off the address Enter a tag description and comment and press OK to save the documentation This allows you to document undocumented addresses as you program without leaving the ladder editor To use this feature select Options Program Setup Alt O P Then select the Logic tab dialog Select Ladder from the Options for drop down window Then check the Assign Tag in the selection check box Assign Addresses The Assign Addresses option allows you to assign addresses descriptions and comments to tags as you use them in your ladder program For example if you enter the tag NEW TAG NEW TAG doesn t exist the Edit Documentation window in Figure 7 7 will automatically appear with the tag filled in You can enter the address description comment and press OK to save the documentation This allows you to assign addresses to tags as you program without leaving the ladder editor To acc
242. e bean left une hangad Figure 11 45 Example of PACKRS from a Table in V Memory 337 PEIWD The PETWD Pet Scan Watchdog allows you to extend the scan watchdog limit while performing an in line SF program or SF subroutine from an RLL program When the PETWD instruction executes the scan watchdog timer is reset at that instance of time during the scan therefore extending the scan watchdog limit beyond the configured scan watchdog limit A possible use would be in a large table lookup operation performed while the controlled process is at a steady state condition The RETURN format has no subfields The PETWD instruction is intended to be used in the normal RLL task TASK 1 PETWD is available only for in line compiled SF programs or subroutines in CPUs that support PowerMath The PETWD instruction allows you to place the PETWD instruction in an infinite loop therefore preventing the scan arning watchdog limit from ever being reached If the PETWD instruction is in an infinite loop the PLC would not issue a scan watchdog FATAL ERROR to shut the process down therefore leaving your process uncontrolled An uncontrolled process could result in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Ensure that the PETWD instruction is not located in an infinite loop To ensurethat the PETWD instruction is not located in an infinite loop within an SF program or subroutine place the PETWD instruction withou
243. e current operation on the left side To display status line information for a menu item or button click on the item or button and hold the left mouse button The right side of the Status Line displays the information listed below Status line Function PLC Path The first shadowed box on the status line displays the route defined for the active program If the PLC route is a direct serial connection to a PLC then Direct is displayed The online PLC route is taken directly from the controller from where you are connected The offline PLC route informs you as to the parameter saved in the PLC setup window for this particular program Logic Mode Indicates whether you are programming online or offline Num Lock Indicates if Num Lock is active for the keyboard When using the keypad which is usually on the right side of the keyboard numbers are active Num Lock is not active when indicator area is blank Character Indicates if Caps Lock is active for the keyboard When typing capital Type letters appear if Caps is indicated Caps Lock is not active when indicator area is blank n T Title Bar The Title Bar spans the top of the 505 WorkShop window Figure 3 4 Use the Title Bar to Q Identify the application you are using In Figure 3 1 the application is WorkShop Move the window Click the title bar with the mouse pointer hold down the left mouse button and drag to the desired location to move the window
244. e is only a factor when using the security server remotely When a computer is part of a Workgroup and a user enters their user name and password to log onto the operating system the user name they logged in as the rights they have and groups they belong to are known only to the local computer When local computer running a client application such as PLCWorkMod connects to a remote computer running the security server it tries to log on to the remote computer with the same user name and password If the exact user name and password cannot be found on the remote computer the client local computer gets logged onto the remote computer as Guest For this reason a guest user normally has minimal rights This account is disabled by default If a guest account is enabled anyone can log on to the computer because a password is not required for this account In general when using workgroups all users that need to get security clearance from FasTrak s security server must exist on the server machine The rights a user has on the local machine may differ than the rights they have on a remote machine Similarly the groups a user belongs to on the local machine may differ than the groups they belong to on a remote machine Domains When a computer is part of a Domain and a user logs onto any computer that s a member of the domain the user name and password they supply is stored on the domain controller vs the local machine There is no re logg
245. e located Type in the instruction mnemonic at the cursor location and press ENTER If you forget an instruction mnemonic just enter a and press enter The following mnemonic pick list will be displayed Pick the mnemonic you desire by double clicking on the mnemonic or arrow to the mnemonic and press ENTER The mnemonic pick list will also display if an illegal mnemonic is entered BITS Dh DRUM DSET EDAM END FAS GTS IMC IOA JMP LBL LDA LOL LESS LOCK MOAT MDRD MDA MIRFT MIRTT MIB MOVE MUL MWFT wl MWTT HOI HOF HOT 05 DTIC OUTE 5 POTZ FID RSO RST RSTI SBA SET SETI SFPGM SFSUB SHAB SHAW SMC SORT 55 STFE STFM SUB TAND Figure 6 1 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop The following is a list of all 505 ladder instruction mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction ABS Take absolute value of a word ADD Addition BITC Clears a specified bit BITP Examines status of a specified bit BITS Sets a specified bit J Creates Down line U Creates Up line H Draws horizontal line CBD Converts binary to BCD value CDB Converts BCD inputs to binary CMP Compare CTR Counts recurring events DCAT Discrete control alarm timer DCMP Compares current date with a specified date DIV Division DRUM Simulates electro mechanical stepper switch DSET Sets date in real time clock EDRUM Simulates electro mechanical stepper switch Can be indexed by timer ev
246. e log window with addresses that are set up in the Fill screen Figure 0 6 Fill Start Address m Start Apply Help Source i Destination C End Address NEN Count Attributes Increment f E Format Device Name Test Station Figure 0 6 Start Address holds the first address in a range of addresses Start Row will hold the starting address location in the current log window Destination can be in the form of an end address or a count For example a start address of 400001 and an end address of 400003 will display 400001 400002 and 400003 in the log window Selecting a count of 3 instead of an end address will give the same results However if increment is set to 2 and end address is selected addresses 400001 and 400003 will be displayed while addresses 400001 400003 and 400005 will be displayed if count is selected The format will determine how to display the data values for the addresses selected Clicking on the Apply button will fill the log window with the addresses specified in the Fill dialog without closing the dialog Pre existing addresses in the log window that fall within the fill range will be overwritten if OVR is enabled in the status bar After clicking on Apply the following fields will be modified Start Address This will now indicate the address at the new start row Start Row This will now indicate t
247. e machine for the new user rights to take effect 379 Configuring DCOM for NT Authentication Security The machine that the user wishes to run FTSecSvr FasTrak Security Server on must be conigured for proper server client communication Below are the needed steps for configuring the server Configuring DCOM on Windows 9x 2000 and NT DCOM enables FasTrak clients such as PLC WorkShop for Modicon to communicate with remote security servers The dialog window shown below is launched by running dcomcnfg exe from a DOS prompt or by clicking on the Windows Start button followed by clicking Run Changes made in DCOM are applied immediately and there is no need to reboot the PC LIE LEE UID dupl 5 angra Imaz 1 0 1 Agent z D WEEN Ante E vent Consumer Provider WBEM Darre Figure 14 14a 380 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Instructions for Configuration 1 In the Applications listbox scroll down and select FTSecSvr If this item is missing it was not properly installed refer to earlier sections in this manual Select the Properties pushbutton See Figure 5 14a The Properties dialog window opens Click the Security tab Figure 5 146 Under Security choose the Administrator from section Configuring User Rights and Audit P
248. e parts as found in this help manual They are 1 Installation The procedure for installing both the Security Server and Configurator on local and remote machines the Sever must be installed regardless of operating system and whether it is ran locally or remotely 2 WorkGroups and Domains Details to how both relate to NT Security 3 QConfiguring Users and Groups Procedures for adding and setting up groups for the variety of supported Operating Systems 4 Configuring User s Rights and Audit Policy Instructions for configuring specific user rights and audit policy on the machine to which the server will be running from 5 DCOM Distributed Component Object Module Configuration Instructions for configuring DCOM on the available variety of Operating Systems and how to setup the Security Administrator 6 Security Configuration Specific instructions for how to setup configure and launch the Security Configurator Also instructions for configuring the users groups and auditing features as well as the Event Viewer used to view generated logs 373 Installing the Security Server If the FasTrak client applications are installed on a machine other than the one FTSecSvr is running on remote security users may want to install FTSecCfg on the client machine s as well as the server machine so that the server can be configured locally or from the client machine FasTrak security must be installed on a machine running Windows NT 3 1 o
249. e setup and configuration process is completed in three steps in recommended order 1 1 PLC Type Setup PLC Memory Size PLC Memory Configuration Ladder Variable Constant Special User Sub Timer Counter Drums Shift Register Table Move O One Shots 2 O Configuration N PLC Type Setup available in offline mode only is how you tell 505 WorkShop what oiemens processor you are creating a logic program for PLC Memory Configuration and Configuration allow you to configure your PLC These are available in online and offline mode 73 505 Programming Software for Windows amp PLC Type Setup Offline The setup and configuration process begins with PLC Type Setup You must tell 505 WorkShop what processor you are using before you can configure the processor Valid PLC types are Simatic 520 revision 1101 Simatic 520c revision 1101 and 1102 Simatic 525 revision 1102 and 1104 Simatic 530 revision 1102 1104 and 1108 Simatic 530c revision 1104 1108 and 1112 Simatic 535 revision 1104 1108 and 1112 Simatic 560 revision 2120 Simatic 560 565 revision 2120 Simatic 560T revision 2820 Simatic 560 565T revision 2820 Simatic 545 revision 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 and 1106 Simatic 555 revision 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 and 1106 Simatic 575 revision 2102 2103 2104 2105 and 2106 To set up the PLC 1 Select PLC Type Setup from the
250. e the RLL program from the subroutines with an unconditional END instruction Q Asubroutine must be terminated by an unconditional RTN instruction or a compile error will be generated An END within a subroutine also generates an errors Q The unconditional RTN instruction separates a subroutine from a subsequent subroutine You can nest subroutines 32 levels A run time nonfatal errors occurs when you exceed 32 levels bit 7 in STW1 is set indicating a stack overflow When you pass parameters to the subroutine by calling the subroutine from a PGTS instruction refer to discrete parameters as Bn and word parameters as Wn where n is the number of the parameter in the PGTS MCRs JMPs and SKPs are effected with subroutines All MCRs and JMPs in a subroutine remain active after a if the instruction within the SBR do not turn them off before the RTN MCRs and JMPs that are active at the time that the subroutine is called remain active while the SBR is executing A SKP LBL pair must be defined within the same SBR or a compile error occurs SBR Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Subroutine Number Constant 1 255 GTS 1 32 PGTS or PGTSZ Do not use the same subroutine number more than once Assign the same subroutine number more than once can cause unpredictable machine operation 293 Skip 5 The 5 and LBL instructions provide a means of enabling or disabling program segments during a scan The
251. e the controller monitor the remote setpoint select Yes in the Monitor Remote Setpoint field If you select No the analog alarm uses the current value in the analog alarm variable 175 Setpoint oelect if there is no remote setpoint Otherwise enter address V WX or a value in the remote setpoint field Clamp Setpoint Low High Enter values for the setpoint limits in the CLAMP SETPOINT LIMITS field If there are no limits enter zeroes in the High and Low fields Alarm Deadband Enter a value in engineering units for the alarm deadband in the ALARM DEADBAND field When you specify an alarm deadband the controller can provide hysteriesis on all alarms except the rate of change alarm to prevent them from chattering when the process variable is near one of the alarm limits Special Function Enter a SF program number in the SF field Select NONE if no SF program is to be called for execution Monitor Deviation To have the controller monitor the deviation alarm limits select Yes in the Monitor Deviation field otherwise select No Deviation Yellow Alarm Enter values in engineering units for the setpoint deviation limits The deviation alarm bands are always centered around the target or setpoint i e the deviation alarm test is actually on the control error This value indicates the maximum allowable error SP PV that sets the yellow alarm deviation alarm The yellow deviation limi
252. e within the RLL program that box instruction can be used When a priority non priority or cycle SF program is called by the SFPGRM instruction the SF program is placed in a queue for execution Up to 32 SF programs of each type total 96 in 3 queues can be queued at a given time If a queue is full the request for placement in the queue is made again on the next scan This continues as long as the input to the RLL SFPGM instruction remains on Priority Non Priority SF Programs When power flow to the RLL SFPGM instruction transitions from off to on the output from the instruction is examined If the output is off and the SF program is not currently being executed the SF program is placed in the queue for execution The SFPGM instruction has the following features After the SF program is executed the output is turned on The SF Program does not executed again until the input to the SFPGM instruction transitions from off to on Ifthe controller changes from PROGRAM to RUN mode while the input to the RLL instruction is on the SF program is queued for execution Cyclic Programs When power flow to the RLL SFPGM instruction transitions from off to on the cyclic SF program is placed in the queue for execution The SF Program has the following features Q After the cyclic SF program is executed one time the output is turned on The SF program is automatically re queued for execution based on the programmed cycle time
253. ect OK and the selected range of addresses are deleted from the Documentation Window 163 searching for an Address Tag or Description You can find the documentation associated with a specific address tag or description by using the Find option To find an item select one of the following 1 From the Edit menu select Find Alt E F 2 From the Pop up menu select Find 3 Click 8 on the toolbar After you select Find the window in Figure 7 8 is displayed Figure 7 8 Enter the address tag or description you wish to find in the Find What field In the Search field select whether you are searching for an address tags or description Find will try to locate the closest match to the entered search information If you want to find the exact match click Exact Match Press OK and the search item will be located and displayed in the Documentation Window Pop Up Menus The menu items available with the right mouse button are displayed in Figure 7 9 Modify Doc Hew Doc Cut Ctrl C Paste Delete Find Figure 7 9 164 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Documenting in Ladder In addition to editing and creating new documentation in the Documentation Window you can also edit and create new documentation in the logic program as you enter and edit your logic The Documentation Window can also be used to help you program your logic In the logic editor these features ar
254. ed from the drop down box 57 505 Programming Software for Windows Serial or Modem Communication To configure your serial port or modem connection with a PLC 1 From the Communications Setup dialog box click the Serial Ports button Result The Settings for Serial Ports and Modem dialog box appears Figure 4 3 Serial Port Setup BE x Port Response T U sec E Hetries Force Tes Dial Modem Baud Hate 3600 Telephone Dialing Type Tone Initialization Commend Humber Cancel Default 58 Figure 4 3 Select the appropriate setting for each option in the dialog box d Serial Port Location where the serial communication port COM1 2 is configured for communications You do not select which port to communicate out of at this stage Response T O sec Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the software waits for a response from the PLC before returning a time out error Any whole number between 5 and 25 can be used Retries specifies Specifies the number of times the software will try to re establish communications with the PLC after a time out error Any whole number between 0 and 10 can be used Use 0 for retries Dial Modem Selected when the selected form of serial communications is through a modem The modem parameters must be set to exactly the same communication parameters th
255. ed from the table address specified by the value contained in pointer A to the memory location specified by B Q After the word is copied table A which holds the address of the next word in the table to be copied is incremented by 1 Ifthe Input and the Enable Reset remain on one word is copied every scan As each word is copied copied the table pointer is incremented until N words have been The output is trend on when the last word has been copied When the instruction is reset all table values remain unchanged and the destination address B contains the last word copied from the table MWFT Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Table Number Constant Varies with Table Move configured range A Word V W G B Word Addr V W G 5 Word V N Constant 1 256 Do not use the same reference number more than once for the MWTT and MWFT instruction Assigning the same reference number can cause unpredictable machine 276 operation FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Move Word to Table MWTT The Move Word to Table instruction MWTT copies a word from a source in memory to a destination within a table A pointer designates the memory location in the table into which the next word is copied One word is copied per scan The MWTT instruction works as follows When the Enable Reset is off the table starting address S is loaded into pointer B When the Enable Reset runs on the box in
256. ed is in progress when the PACKRS instruction executes then your process could react erratically due to the sudden replacement of values in the profile steps You can use one of the following methods to ensure that the profile update is done when the current profile is not in progress your program check the state of the profile finished bit bit 4 LRSF for the corresponding loop Do not execute the PACKRS statement unless the finished bit is set In your program place the loop in the manual mode execute the PACKRS to update the ramp soak profile then return the loop to automatic mode Remember this causes the ramp soak profile to be restarted at the initial step 334 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop When stored in memory table ramp soak profile steps are six words long and have the following format Word 1 bit 1 Step type 0 ramp step 1 soak step bit Word 1 bits 2 16 Word 2 Address of status bit special address format Words 3 4 Setpoint if ramp step or Soak time if soak step REAL number Words 5 6 Ramp rate if ramp step or Deadband if soak step REAL number The status bit address points to either an output point Y or a control relay C This address takes a short form for point numbers C1 C512 and Y1 Y1024 Higher point numbers use a long form of address If all bits of the status bit address field are 0 then no status bit is selected for the step The sh
257. eeeenans 185 Process Variable Alarm High 185 Process Variable Alarm 185 sicarios 185 Clamp Setpoint Low High esee 185 ERE E ea er 185 PNG eere 185 Rate Derivative Me 186 BIAS cet eau 186 Derivative Gain eor le 196 Limiting Coeficiente m acetate st 186 Special Calculation ec o etum 196 Special ote Pm 186 HOCK SEMON ce 186 Lock Auto Mantial eet an bd adem uM dente AA 186 LOCK cut cm 186 Eror ecc 187 eec 187 MONRO DEVIAUON MT 187 Deviation Yellow 187 Deviation Orange Alarm ep UU 2 Ree 188 Monitor Rate of Charges oa e desee iadese even 189 Rate of uestes tuisse oe nu Cote ls re Seba 189 Monitor Broken Transmitter 189 RS PF POG ANIM CG ite 189 DELELE PID OOD 190 RAMPO OAE ann ter LE DM UI Dp LM eT 191 Controlling Ramp Soak Operation
258. eir corresponding descriptions Press any key or click in this column to start an auto search for all the tags for the device indicated on the status bar if an empty row or entered in the Device Name column A tag can be assigned to an address by first entering the address in the Address column Then click in the column and type a unique tag Press Enter or the Tab key or click outside the column to enter the tag into the database and associate the new tag to the address listed in the same row Delete a tag by clicking in the column removing all the text and entering information by one of the methods described Editing a tag creates an update of all other columns Description Value An address and or tag must be present to edit this field Descriptions are stored in database files containing addresses and their corresponding tags Press a key or click in this column to display a vertically scrolling multi line edit box containing the current description if one exists Approximately six rows can be viewed at one time The edit box accepts carriage returns Press the Tab key or click outside the column to enter the description into the database Delete a description by clicking in the column removing all the text and entering the information by one of the methods described Editing a description creates an update of all other columns This column allows you to view data values When the log window is offline or online pause the last value re
259. ent or timer and event END Unconditionally terminates a scan EQU Equal to FRS Force role swap GEQ Greater than or equal to GTR Greater than GTS Calls a subroutine IMC Compares status of discrete points with a specified bit pattern in a set of patterns IORW Does immediate read or write to discrete or word I O JMP Freezes outputs in zone of control JMPE Freezes outputs in zone of control LBL Selectively enable disable program segments during scan LDA Copies the logical address of a memory location into a memory location LDC Copies the logical address of a memory location into a memory location LEQ Less than or equal to LESS Less than LOCK Used together with UNLOCK and provide a mechanism whereby multiple applications in the 575 system can coordinate access to 99 MCR MCRE MDRMD MDRMW MIRF MIRT MIRW MOVE MOVW MUL MWFT MWI MWIR MWTT NC NEQ NO NOP NOT OS OTI OTIC OUT OUTNC PGTS PGTSZ RET RSD RST RSTI SBR RTN 505 Programming Software for Windows shared resources Motor control alarm timer Master control relay Master control relay Drum uses configurable mask to control coils Drum uses configurable mask to write to words Copies a table into the control relay memory or discrete image register Copies status of control relays or discrete image register bits to table Copies bit status from control relays or discrete image register to a
260. er LOGIC tab in Program Setup the following list of the function key alternatives and the CTRL ALT functions are available Hot Keys Key PgUp PgDn 102 Comment COILS Valid if cursor is in an output column COILS Valid if cursor is in an output column COILS Valid if cursor is in an output column COILS Valid if cursor is in an output column COILS Valid if cursor is in an output column COILS Valid if cursor is in an output column CONTACTS Valid if cursor is in an input column CONTACTS Valid if cursor is in an input column CONTACTS Valid if cursor is in an input column CONTACTS Valid if cursor is in an input column CONTACTS Valid if cursor is in an input column CONTACTS Valid if cursor is in an input column CONTACTS Valid if cursor is in an input column CONTACTS Valid if cursor is in an input column Open closed contact coil toggle Delete current element Moves to last column row 1 of current rung Edit moves to next row current rung or to next rung Display moves to next row or rung Equal to Relational Contact Deletes current address and puts you into edit mode for address Deletes current address and puts you into edit mode for address Greater than or Equal to Relational Contact List mnemonics for current field Moves to column 1 row 1 of current rung Draws horizontal line Comment Deletes horizontal line Immediate contact and coil Insert Mode Less than Relational Contact Not Equal Relational Contact Create edit ou
261. er of times the software will try to re establish communications with the PLC after a time out error Any whole number between 0 and 10 can be used Use 0 for no retries 66 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 1 2 From the IP Addresses section of the TCP IP Setup dialog box click the ADD button to enter a new IP address or select an existing IP address and click the Modify button to change the IP information Result The IP Addresses dialog box appears Figure 4 8 Path puer P ah us Figure 4 8 NOTE The 505 WorkShop allows 1 000 different IP Addresses and Path Descriptions Enter the IP Address for the associated Interface Board An IP Address is a 32 bit value that is divided into four 8 bit fields each separated by a period For example 192 3 2 1 is an IP Address Each computer on a network has a unique IP Address You should consult your network administrator for the correct IP Addresses for your computer and board Enter the IP Address Path Description A Path Description is a 32 character alphanumeric description for the IP Address Click OK or press Enter to accept the settings Click Cancel to disregard changes and return to the TCP IP Setup dialog box NOTE Refer to the 2572 Ethernet TCP IP Module manual for proper settings 67 505 Programming Software for Windows setting Up and Using PRO
262. ermines which mode is printed The Network address or PLC Memory Address is printed on the top left or right of ladder and can be disabled to not print at all The selection is made in the Network Address Marker field When selecting Networks Addresses per Page as Single or Multiple use the following information When printing Single Networks addresses per Page each network begins on a new page When printing Multiple Networks Addresses per Page as many networks addresses that can fit on a single page will be printed However if the network is not the first network on the page and the network is broken across more than one page but can fit on a page and if it would start a new page then the network begins on a new page The intent is to keep the entire network on one page whenever possible The Ladder Display Size determines the Column width Description rows and Tag row size Column Width adjusts the size of the ladder grid Click the up or down arrow or enter a value between 7 and 24 Description Rows determines the number of character rows displayed for each description Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 and 12 Tag Rows determines the number of character rows displayed for each tag Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 and 4 35 505 Programming Software for Windows The SF Display Size determines the Instruction width Column One width and Column Two width Instruction Width determines the width
263. ertain to check battery switch position before using Power Up Restart To execute Power Up Restart 1 Click Power Up Restart from the PLC Operations dialog box 2 When you receive the message Execute a PLC power up restart Select either YES or NO 3 For 575 controllers you are also prompted with Coordinate Reset With Other Applications and Coordinate Reset With Entire System For each of these prompts press NO or YES as required for your process Partial Restart Use a Partial Restart to clear all discrete elements except retentive C and forced elements The word elements and presets are not reset To execute a Partial Power Up Restart 1 Click Partial Restart from the PLC Operations dialog box 2 When you receive the message Execute a Partial restart Select either YES or NO 3 For 575 controllers you are also prompted with Coordinate Reset With Other Applications and Coordinate Reset With Entire SYSTEM For each of these prompts press NO or YES as required for your process Complete Restart Use Complete Restart to clear all discrete elements and word elements including retentive C elements Complete Restart also clears controller fatal errors Forced discrete elements and forced word elements are not reset To execute Complete Restart 1 Click Complete Restart from the PLC Operations dialog box 2 When you receive the message Execute a Complete restart Select either YES or NO For 575 controllers you ar
264. es Every 2 days start logging at 1 30PM Stop logging at 2 30PM Edit gt gt Highlight text and click Edit gt gt to edit the log time The text is removed and updated in the static text box with settings that correspond to the text FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop The Log Data screen allows you to configure how the server reads the data and updates the cache that determines how data is logged Figure 0 4 Log Window Setup x Log Times Log Data Display Time Stamp Logging Methods Periodic i H sec x Deadband Percent Event Set Event Read data in the log window and log data to the log database at periodic intervals rm Logging Options Log only when data changes Go offline when idle File Path C controlshopMogl mdb Cancel Apply Figure 0 4 Logging Methods Periodic Updates the cache in time intervals specified in edit box The format is msec sec min and hour Minimum value is updates as quickly as possible and maximum value is 24 hours Deadband Data variation value or a percentage of a data variation Compares each data value from the addresses in the log window with the deadband value If a particular value fluctuates by the deadband amount or the server updates the cache for that data item Deadband then compares to the updated value for that particu
265. es can be compiled However an SF program or subroutine which contains any of the following instructions cannot be compiled The data compacting instructions PACK PACKLOOP PACKRS and PACKAA The shift register instructions SSH FTSH IN and FTSH OUT The PRINT instruction The BCD instructions BCDBIN and BINBCD Additionally the CDT and SDT instructions when used in a compiled SF program or subroutine must specify a static table that is the table s base address must be a V K G VMS or VMM adaress and the table s size must be specified as a constant oave Header changes and return to the SF Programs Subroutines dialog box by clicking on OK To disregard changes and return to the SF Programs Subroutines dialog box click Cancel 105 505 Programming Software for Windows Insert a New How You can insert a new row to a Special Function Program similar to inserting a new network In the active logic program window use the mouse or keyboard to place the cursor on an existing row in the Special Function Program To enter a new row using the mouse QU dp oe QUE due Click 3 new row on the Toolbar Notice that the new row attaches to the pointer Place the pointer in the position where you want the new row to appear Click the left mouse button and the new row is inserted Repeat Step 3 to insert additional rows Remove the new row from the pointer by clicking the arrow on the Instruction Bar To insert a new row using
266. es in the trend window will be logged on an individual basis only if the address value including format has changed or its status has changed If this box is not checked then addresses will be logged every time they are read from the server If the box labeled Go offline when idle for more than 5 minutes is checked then we will go offline with all the devices we are using in the corresponding trend window When going offline with a device the port will only be closed if no other trend windows or clients are using the ports for their own data 233 Trend Window Setup Display Trend Window Setup Display of the property sheet is listed below Log Window Setup x Log Times Log Data Display Time Stamp Columns to Display Tips to Display M Device Name Value M Address Address Time Stamp M Description Tag Status r Maximum Rows Description 5 a Cancel Columns to Display Columns to Display simply turns on and off columns in the trend window see Trend Window Appearance All the columns are checked by default except for Value Time Stamp and Status Tips to Display As we scroll through the tag combo box in a trend window the corresponding address and description if it exists of the highlighted tag will be displayed to the left and right respectively of the combo box These are referred to as doc tips and can be turned on and off by checkin
267. escriptions or Headers These selections are not used for TISOFT Click OK to export the program Figure 3 9 Use the Tag Description Text File to merge Tags or Descriptions from the ASCII text files exported by WorkShop for Windows into the currently opened program The default file extension is TXT but alternate extensions are allowed You must also select comma or tab delimited records with the following format 30 Characters 1 6 could be greater with Loops or Alarms contain the 6 digit Siemens address Character 7 is the comma or tab character Character 8 and beyond is the variable length tag followed by the comma or tab character followed by the variable length description followed by a carriage return FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Saving Logic Programs oaving Offline Use the Save Program command to save the active program contents with its existing name To save the active logic program 1 Click on the Toolbar or select Save Program from the File menu Ctrl S and previously saved logic program is saved If the program has not been previously saved the Save As dialog box appears Figure 3 10 Select the desired location to save the program and type in a name for the program in the File name field Figure 3 10 3 Click Save or press Enter to save the program If you select a file name that already exists in that directory a message appears with optio
268. ess at current step 7 8 Unused always returns 0 9 16 1 Contains step number loop is currently executing Step number is zero based Step number contains 0 when ramp soak is on step 1 1 when the ramp soak is on step 2 etc 4 Enter an address C Y V or WY in the RAMP SOAK FLAG ADDRESS field If you select NONE no data is written from the Loop Ramp Soak Flags See the following table for Loop Functions Bits 5 To edit the selected Ramp Soak step number click on the dialog box EDIT button or use the keyboard to Tab to the EDIT button and press Enter or Alt E The following dialog box appears Figure 9 5 ius 86 E 5 Be i Pon m B due p c Figure 9 5 6 Select Ramp Soak or End from the Mode field The RAMP step changes the loop setpoint you can enter the setpoint in the Setpoint field linearly from its current value to a new value at a specified rate of change you can enter the rate of change in the Ramp Rate field You can program a status bit C or Y for each step of the ramp soak This bit is set to 1 when the loop is executing this step It is reset when the loop leaves the step The SOAK step holds the setpoint constant for a specified period of time you can enter a soak time in the Soak Time field You can guarantee a soak period by entering a deadband value you can enter a deadband in the Deadband field This form of soaking ensures that the PV is within a specified dea
269. ess the Assign Address feature select Options Program Setup Alt O P Then select the Logic tab dialog Select Ladder from the Options for drop down window Then check the Assign Address in the selection check box Editing Documentation in Ladder Editor You can automatically assign documentation and edit existing documentation by pressing Ctrl L on an address in your ladder program For example if you would like to change the documentation for the address 00001 that is used on a contact move the cursor to that location and press Ctrl L The Edit Documentation window in Figure 7 7 automatically appears Enter the tag description and comment and press OK to save the documentation 165 Shared Documentation Address Documentation can be used in two ways The first is the traditional style Where a temporary DATABASE file is not shared and all edits are buffered until the file is saved If the file is not saved then any edits are lost Upon saving the temporary DATABASE file is copied to the same destination as the logic file A shared file works differently This file can be shared Opened more then once by different programs Edits are not buffered but are immediately saved Upon saving a program the Address Documentation DATABASE file does not get saved thus Save As does not affect the file at all A refresh time can be entered that causes the database to reread the file to acquire any new or changed documentation Also a shared da
270. eter N Constant Bit Number 1 16 most significant bit is 1 least significant bit is 16 Bit Shift Register SHRB The Bit Shift Register SHRB instruction creates a bit shift register using a specified number of control relays or points in the discrete image register The shift register may be up to 1023 bits long The SHRB instruction has the following features When the Enable Reset is turned on the SHRB instruction is enabled When the clock transitions from zero to one the following actions occur The last highest numbered bit of the shift register is moved to the output The data in the shift register is shifted one address The status of the Data input 0 or 1 is moved into the lower numbered point as specified in the IR field When clock does not transition from zero to one the last bit of the shift register is moved to the output The data is not shifted The Enable Reset must be kept on as long as the data is be shifted into and kept in the SHRB When the Enable Reset loses power flow the SHRB is cleared and all control relays or image register points comprising the SHRB are cleared to zero Ifthe Enable Reset does not receive power flow the instruction is not executed and the output does not turn on SHRB Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Register Number Constant Varies with configured Shift Register ranges IR Bit Address Y C B N Constant 1 1023 Do not use the same reference number more
271. ew tag description and comment see Figure 7 7 Select OK when you re finished E dit Documentation Figure 7 7 The Tag and Description fields are sized according to the Documentation Window Column Width variable in the Program Setup The font selected in your program setup will also be used for the tag and description fields This will show the documentation as it actually will be displayed in your ladder program NOTE f the font and size selected in the program setup is too large to be represented in the window a standard font will be used When this situation occurs the warning message is displayed The tag and description will NOT be shown in its actual size in this case 160 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop edit an existing tag or description you can use any of the following methods 1 From the Documentation menu select Modify Doc Alt D M 2 From the Pop up menu in the Documentation Window select Modify Doc 3 Press the Enter key Ctrl L or double click on the actual address tag or description in the Documentation Window Figure 7 6 NOTE f you double click in the description column to edit existing documentation the cursor will be placed in the description column in the Edit Documentation window Figure 7 7 Similarly if you double click in the tag column the cursor will be placed in the tag column in the Edit Documentation Window The Edit Documentation window is displayed You ca
272. ex holds its current value and the word is not moved If the Reset turns off the index resets to O Q The TTOW output remains on until the last word in the table is copied then turns off The TTOW must be reset after the output turns off in order to be executed again TTOW Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 WD Word Address Form B TS Word Address Form A IN Word Address V W G N Constant only 1 256 283 10 Table WTOT The Word to Table WTOT instruction places a copy of a word at a specified address within a table The operation of the WTOT is described as follows The Reset must be on for the instruction to be executed When the Enable turns on a copy of the source word WS is placed in the destination table TD The index IN indicates where the word is placed in the table The value contained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 where N is the length of the table If lt IN lt the word is moved If N IN or N 0 the word is not moved After the word is placed into the table the value contained by the index is incremented by one If both Enable and Reset remain on one word is moved each scan If the Enable turns off while the Reset is on the index holds its current value and the word is not moved If the Reset turns off the index resets to O The WTOT output remains on until a word is placed in the last position in the table It then
273. f Cis not zero the output is turned on when the instruction is executed If C is zero the output is turned off WAND Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 A Word Address Form A B Word Const Form A Const 32767 32767 C Word Form B 270 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Word WOR The Word OR WOR instruction logically ORs word in memory location with a word in memory location B bit for bit The result is stored in memory location C When the input is on the instruction is executed If the input remains on the instruction is executed on every scan The WOR has the following properties The word stored in the memory location specified by A is OR with the word stored in the memory location B The operation is done bit by bit The words in A and B are not affect by the WOR instruction and will retains their original values AB C 00 0 O 1 1 10 1 1 1 4 The result is stored in the memory location C If Cis not zero the output is turned on when the instruction is executed If C is zero the output is turned off WOR Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 A Word Address Form A B Word Const Form A Const 32767 32767 C Word Form B 271 Word Exclusive Or WXOR The Word Exclusive OR WXOR instruction Exclusive ORs a word in memory location A with a word in memory location B bit for bit The result is stored in memory location
274. f Points is an integer number that specifies how many points or words are to be moved To enter Number Of Points you must highlight one of the points in the dialog box and click on Edit Fora TO table D Data Start Addr specifies the starting address of the points or words that are to be written to the table For a FROM table D specifies the starting address in memory into which data is to be read from the table D C 1 must be within configured memory range To enter Data Start Addr you must highlight one of the points in the dialog box and click on Edit Fields C and D can be repeated for up 20 writes reads to and from the table Figure 7 27 TabDot T Table addressstok TabDot W100 Figure 11 27 Example of PACKing Multiple Blocks of Bits Into Table 326 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop The operation of the PACK TO statement is described below Fora TO Table data are written into a table This write operation begins with the data starting at the first Data Start Address and writes the specified number of points or words into the table beginning with the first word of the table Bits are written sequentially as illustrated in Figure 7 28 below table zT Table addrezz 4 00 Number af paintz 7 Data start addr Figure 11 28 Example of PACKing Bits Into Table You can specify multiple blocks of data to
275. fied gain lead and lag values The LEAD LAG statement can only be used with cyclic processes such as loops analog alarms and cyclic SF programs Input Output Lead Time Hin Lag Time Gain X7 Old Input Figure 11 23 Input specifies the location of the input value of the current sample period that is to be processed Output specifies the location of the output variable the result of the LEAD LAG operation Lead Time specifies the lead time in minutes Lag Time specifies the lag time in minutes Gain specifies the ratio of the change in output to the change in input at a steady state as shown in the following equation The constant must be greater than zero Old Input specifies the memory location of the input value from the previous sample period For sample time LEAD LAG algorithm uses the sample time of the loop analog alarm or cyclic SF program from which it is called The first time it executes LEAD LAG is initialized equals input The LEAD LAG algorithm uses the following equation where Yn present output Yn 1 previous output X n present input X n 12 previous input Ts sample time in minutes The output depends on the ratio of lead to lag as explained below Assume the following values in each example input and gain 1 0 324 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Real Integer Math Operation The MATH statement executes arithmetic computations involving bot
276. first resolves the address then it indexes it 305 You can specify the field B1 as an index into the destination address when you want to copy an address into a word in a table BI should designate the relative work in a table referenced by BB Element BB 0 is the first element in the table The following is a list of valid types for BI Enter a constant 0 65535 If you leave the field blank or enter a 0 then no indexing will be done Q Enter any readable word see table above The contents of this word should be an unsigned integer 0 65535 that gives the value of the index If an indirect destination address is indexed the controller first resolves the address then it indexes it Load Constant LDC The Load Data Constant instruction LDC loads a positive integer constant into the designated memory location When the input receives power the LDC instruction is executed The data constant designated by N is loaded into the memory location specified by A When the function is executed the output is turned on LDC Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 A Word Address Form B N Constant Only 0 32767 306 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Lock Memory LOCK The LOCK instruction works with the UNLCK instruction to provide a means in which multiple application in the T1575 coordinate access to shared resources generally G memory data blocks The LOCK can be either Exclusive o
277. ftware for Windows amp Print Documentation Click the Documentation check box from the Print dialog box to print the following Elements X Y WX and WY Control Relays C SKP LBL GTS SBR JMP MCR and END Q Register Tags Descriptions and Comments To change the Documentation properties click the Documentation button on the Print dialog box The Print Documentation dialog box appears Figure 3 18 Print Documentation jo fom KR ABLEISSER FT E antral Figure 3 18 Click the All check box to print the entire range of items To print a selection deselect the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box The Register Tags Descriptions and Comments can be individually turned on and off To include with the Documentation print out select the appropriate check box under Include The sort order for documentation print can be based on address Tag or Description To change the Documentation print sort orders select the appropriate check box under Sort Order 1 Click on the Doc Font button to change the Tag Description and Comments printout font of the active program Result The Font dialog box appears 2 Choose a new font font style or font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 3 Click OK in the Font dialog box to save your changes or Cancel to cance
278. g PLC Password Aliases For more on this subject see PLC Password Aliases Security Setup Password security in WorkShop is disabled by default Without password security enabled any user may access any portion of the programming package Before the password security feature can be used a security administrator must be established by clicking the Options menu followed by EI for Figure 14 4 The Security Setup menu contains two items User Options and Administrator Options The user security options allow users to change their own passwords or allow other users to enter their password without having to exit and restart WorkShop The administrator security options allow the security administrator to add edit and delete users and their access privileges to specific features in WorkShop 359 Administrator Options By default there is no security administrator and the password security feature is not enabled Therefore the User Options menu item is disabled until a security administrator is established Select Administrator Options to establish a security administrator The Password Required dialog below appears The security administrator is required to enter a name and password The administrator name can be up to twenty characters long The password can be up to fourteen characters long Valid characters for both fields are aloha numericsand the other keyboard entered chara
279. g and un checking these boxes All tips are checked by default 234 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Trend Window Setup Time Stamp Time Stamp of the property sheet is listed below Log Window Setup x Log Times Log Data Display Time Stamp Time Format Date Format Display Format date 04 47 10 510 PM 2000 01 05 05 Jan 00 January 5 2000 Cancel Figure 0 22 Time Format The Time Format list box will display the current time time at which the page was activated in a standard format or military format The default is standard format Date Format The Date Format list box will display the current date date at which you ve activated the page in four different formats month day year each represented by 2 digits year month day The year is displayed in 4 digits while the month and day are displayed in 2 digits day month year The day and year are displayed in 2 digits while the month is displayed as a 3 character abbreviation month day year The month is completely spelled out the day is displayed in minimal digits and the year is displayed as 4 digits The default is format 1 month day year each represented by 2 digits 235 Trend Window iss FTLogger File View Setup Messages Window Help IEE 8 2 LogSheet1 505Server Test Station V4 0 U16 device V5 D U16 devicel ci 1 OFFDI _ devicel
280. g may not be reliable Data questionable tuning is not reliable Sample interval too large for optimal tuning Small PV changes Step too small PV near span low Range marginal PV near span high Range marginal Small output change Step too small Output near span low Range marginal Output near span high Range marginal PV changes before output Noisy signal PV changes inconsistent with output Noisy signal Gain clamped to high low limit Reset clamped to high low limit Rate clamped to high low limit SmarTune complete with error s Unanticipated error PIN mismatch Loop would not go to Manual Mode Loop not completely under SmarTune control 199 0110 0100 0110 0101 0110 0110 0110 0111 0110 1000 0110 1001 0110 1010 0110 xx01 0110 10 0110 xx11 0110 0110 10 0110 11 0110 1 0110 1 01 SmarTune timeout Maximum time exceeded Not enough free memory Out of required system resources PV greater than high stop PV lower than low stop PV change too small Operation aborted Sample interval LTS range error allowed range 0 1 ms to 2 hours PV LPV or output LMN range error range 0 00001 Sample size too
281. gn or modify the starting module addresses of your PROFIBUS DP slaves you must import either configuration data from the binary file that you created with COM PROFIBUS described above or connect to a 505 controller that contains PROFIBUS DP slaves or open an existing 505 WorkShop program from disk that contains PROFIBUS DP slaves Follow the steps below to execute edit slaves 1 Select PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu Result The PLC Configuration dialog box appears Figure 5 2 2 Select the Profibus I O button under configuration on the PLC Configuration dialog box Result The Profibus DP I O dialog box appears Figure 5 7 3 Select the Edit S lave button on the Profibus DP I O dialog box Result The Edit Slave dialog box appears Figure 5 8 Edit Slawe Slave 14 ID 8024 Search Slave 170 State Stop Enabled 1 0 Module Definition Prev Slave Module 70 Addr A 128 128 0 128 Edit 120 Addr mM TOS WP L ompact Restore Cancel Close Figure 5 8 The Edit Slave dialog box allows you to perform the following tasks The Search Slave button allows you to go to and edit other slave addresses without going back to the Profibus DP I O dialog box The Next Slave button allows you to go to and edit the next slave address in numerical increasing order without going back to the Profibus DP I O dialog box The rev Slave button allows you to go to and edit the p
282. gure your pages for printouts Fast PLC Setup Sets up a PLC for a fast connection Program Setup Program Setup reveals different sets of tabs governing your projects layout and appearance These settings are saved with the program thus each time you open this program you do not have to reset your preferences To access the Program Setup options 1 Select Program Setup from the Options menu Result The Program Setup dialog box appears Figure 4 1 Figure 4 1 2 Click on desired tab to display setup selections A check in a box or radio button circle means that this feature or object is selected or is turned on A drop down window means that there are multiple options for the particular tab item selected Table 4 1 describes each feature in the Program Setup dialog box 3 Click Restore Defs to return each feature to the last Save as Defaults setting or the original factory setting if Save as Defs has not been used 55 505 Programming Software for Windows 4 Click OK when you are finished making your selections or click Save as Defs to save the new settings as defaults These new settings will be used for every new program created Or Click Cancel to disregard changes to the settings and return to the active window Result The screen changes based on your new settings for the current program Logic Tab General Description Ladder Grid Sticky Cursor All Headers Font Logic Tab Ladder
283. h range is set to change the new address For example one search and replace range is set to change C1 to X4 A following search and replace range is set to change X4 to B19 The search and replace process will not perform both changes C1 to X4 then change X4 to B19 Instead the first change C1 to occurs Then the process moves to the next address in the PLC program and determines if it will be replaced The Search amp replace in Combo Box The search and replace operation can be performed on 5 isolated sections of the PLC program Ladder SFS Special Function Subroutines SFP Special Function Programs Alarms and PID Loops Use the Search amp replace in combo box to select the desired section of the PLC program in which to perform the search and replace operation The From and To Edit Boxes A search range within the program area selected in the Search amp replace in combo box can be entered in the From and To edit boxes As the Search amp replace in selection changes the default values displayed in the From and To edit boxes include the entire range available in that PLC program section For example when Ladder is selected the default range displayed starts at network 1 and ends at the last network in the ladder The Special Instructions Group Box Additional actions can be performed as the search and replace operation executes These actions can be selected within the Special Instruct
284. h integers and real numbers The MATH format based on the operators in Table 11 5 is shown in Figure 11 25 Parentheses constants subscript variables and a set of intrinsic functions listed in Table 11 8 are allowed in the expressions Assignment operator is required E o Equation Figure 11 25 Operation of MATH The operation of MATH is described below and illustrated in Figure 11 25 Each time the MATH statement is executed the calculations within the statement are made The MATH computations are executed using the rules of precedence for arithmetic operations listed in Table 11 9 Functions within a group are equivalent in precedence Execution takes place from left to right for all operators except exponentiation 325 Pack Data The Pack Data statement moves discrete and or word data to or from a table You can access the image register directly by using the PACK statement PACK is primarily intended for use in consolidating data so that it can be efficiently transmitted to a host computer The PACK format is shown in Figure 7 26 To From T able Table Address Of Points Data Start Address Mone Mone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Figure 11 26 PACK Format To From Table specifies whether you are writing data to or from the table Address specifies the address of the table to or from which data are written or read Number O
285. he controller or the selected program on disk at the online prompt you will not be able to use either the Save or the Open functions You will however have partial to full access to the controller depending on the controller access level Some reads and no writes will be allowed to the selected program on disk All online password operational modes are summarized in the following table Online Password Operations Table Mode Controller Offline No Password Password 1 NO 2 NO 3 NO 4 Yes 5 6 7 8 9 144 Yes Yes NO NO Yes Yes Yes Yes User Password Not asked for User gives password for selected program on disk User does not give password for program on disk User gives controller password User does not give a password Save Allowed to Disk Yes No password Yes Selected program on disk password is retained No Selected program on disk is password protected Yes Controller password is written to disk No Controller is password protected User gives disk Yes Selected and controller password program on disk password is retained User gives disk No Controller password User gives controller password User gives no password is password protected No Selected program on disk is password protected No Open Allowed to PLC Yes No password Yes Disk password is w
286. he first empty row after the last address in the fill Fill Example 219 Below is example of how you might set up fill dialog Start Address 400001 Start Row 5 End Address 400003 Increment 1 After Apply is selected and the data window is modified the Fill dialog will have the following values Start Address 400004 Start Row 8 End Address 400006 Increment 1 220 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Editing Features Cut Copy and Paste can be performed on log window rows a variety of different ways The menu items can be found under the main Edit menu along with hot keys Alternative hotkeys shift delete ctrl insert and shift insert are supported for Cut Copy and Paste respectively Toolbar items are also provided for all three features Log window rows can be cut from one log window and pasted into another across applications provided that the log window s servers match Cut Copy and Paste will observe highlighted rows similar to excel Highlighting log window rows is also similar to excel with the exception of column highlighting Select The Select All menu item under the main Edit menu can be used to unconditionally highlight all the rows in the active log window Features such as delete format size on off cut copy and paste can be performed on the entire log window Log Status Window The log status window shown below lists successful and failed logs as well as any
287. he table to PACK data located within the table For example refer to Figure 7 32 If the data that you want to read are located in the least significant nine bits of V100 and the most significant five bits of V101 you must still PACK out the first seven bits of V100 and discard them Goat CO Figure 11 32 Ex of PACKing Multiple Blocks of Bits from a Table Words are read sequentially from the table as illustrated in Figure 11 33 You can also PACK multiple blocks of words EBREBEREIEIEREREBEBERERTI Figure 11 33 Example of PACKing Words from a Table You can PACK blocks of words and blocks of bits from a table with one PACK statement oee Figure 7 34 The data are packed according to these rules All discrete points designated in the Number of Points field are packed from the table Words are packed from the first available word in the table That is unused bits in the previous word of the table are not included as part of a word that is PACKed from the table 328 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 1415 16 17 18 1920 212223 2425 Register Word register Table Figure 11 34 Example of PACKing Bits and Words from a Table 329 Pack Analog Alarm Data The Pack Analog Alarm Data statement moves analog alarm data to or from a table PACKAA is primarily intended for use in consolidating analog alarm data to be accessed from an
288. he time out expires before the application obtains the lock the output is turned off and the scan continues When an application program attempts to acquire control of the lock the value in AA and AA 1 is examined If this value indicates that the lock is free control of the lock passes to the inquiring application program the output is turned on and RLL execution continues at the next network Q When an application program obtains control of the lock the LOCK instruction increments the value of a lock unlock counter The UNLCK instruction decrements the lock unlock count when an application program relinquished control of a lock If the counter is not equal to zero at the end of the RLL scan Bit 6 in 5 01 is set to 1 and a value of 3 is written to STW200 LOCK Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 T Constant Only time in ms 0 3276 7 AA Word Address V G W doesn t work Must be 2 words Unlock Memory UNLCK The UNLCK instruction works with the LOCK instruction to provide a means in which multiple application in the T1575 coordinate access to shared resources generally G memory data blocks UNLCK Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 AA Word Address V G W doesn t work Must be 2 words 307 Force Role Swap FRS The Force Role Swap 5 instruction allows you to design a program to switch the active controller with the standby controller in hot
289. hop oecurity Configurator The Security Configuration Application FTSecCfg EXE allows users with administrator rights to configure their centralized server based security This EXE will reside on the same machine and directory as the server Users will also be able to install FTSecCfg on client machines running Windows NT 3 1 or later 2000 XP so that they can configure their security server remotely The following features are supported 1 Ability to configure which users and or groups have access to various FasTrak features This includes users and groups from the machine running the server Separate secure features will exist for individual FasTrak applications including programming packages as well as Controlshop applications 2 Security Auditing can be configured for each specific feature on an individual or group basis Audit information will be logged to the Event Viewer in the Security Log section 3 Alink to the Event Viewer will be provided allowing quick access to the Security Log The event viewer can also be accessed under Administrative Tools in Control Panel Launching the Security Configurator The Configuration Application may be launched from either the Start menu in Windows or from within the FasTrak client should it be installed Figure 14 15a The Security Configurator application will launch and if the user is not in the client at the same time the Security Server Location dialog may open Both
290. icant half and the next consecutive word is in the least significant half Any readable data element is allowed When a word data element is specified as an IO parameter the address of the data element is passed The value of the parameter is contained at this address An XSUB in RLL with no external subroutine causes the user program error bit 6 to be set in STW1 The reason is defined as 6 in STW200 The controller remains in RUN mode XSUB Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Program Number Constant Only 1 32767 or 1 65535 software IN Bit Word Form A Word Form C Bit Bits don t work lO IN 300 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop New Task TASK The Start New RLL Task TASK instruction is used to delimit the main RLL task and the cyclic RLL task The TASK instruction is described as follows The Task instruction indicates the RLL instruction which follow it comprise an RLL task segment where Task Number 1 for segments of the main RLL task 2 designates segments of the cyclic RLL task and 8 designates segments of the interrupt task Task 1 is assumed when the first rung does not contain a TASK instruction A task can consist of multiple segments each preceded by a TASK instruction The segments do not have to be contiguous Terminate an RLL task with another TASK instruction or with the END instruction Q Task 2 is executed with a higher priority than Task 1 Therefore normal RLL execution is inte
291. ificant Word of C Flags LCFL Least Significant Word of C Flags LERR Error LHA High Alarm Limit LHHA High high Alarm Limit LKC Gain LKD Derivative Gain Limiting Coefficient Low Alarm Limit 332 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc LLLA LMN LMX LODA LPV LPVH LPVL LRCA LRSF LRSN LSP LSPH LSPL LTD LTI LTS LVF LYDA 505 WorkShop Low low Alarm Limit Output Bias Orange Deviation Alarm Limit Process Variable Process Variable High Limit Process Variable Low Limit Rate of Change Alarm Limit Ramp Soak Flags Ramp Soak Step Number Set Point Set Point High Limit Set Point Low Limit Rate Reset Sample Rate V Flags Yellow Deviation Limit Variables with an asterisk can be either a real number or an integer Variables followed by a period are real numbers Variables not followed by a period are integers When you execute PACKLOOP using real numbers two memory locations are allocated for each real number 333 Pack Ramp Soak Data The Pack Ramp Soak Data statement moves one or more elements steps of the ramp soak profile for a given loop to or from a table PACKRS is primarily intended to make the ramp soak profiles accessible to an operator interface and to provide a method for dynamic ramp soak profiling The PACKRS format is shown in Figure 7 39 To From T able NNNM Table Address Loop Humber Humber Steps Starting Step Figure 11 39 PACKRS Format A
292. il but the immediate I O module update is done when the coil is executed The immediate coil is updated any time during the controller scan and is not limited to the normal I O update portion of the timeline NOTE Both the image register and the module are updated when the immediate coil Is executed Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Immediate Bit address Y Coil 247 Immediate Closed Coil The Immediate is used similarly like the NOT coil but the immediate I O module update is done when the coil is executed The immediate coil is updated any time during the controller scan and is not limited to the normal update portion of the timeline X ao NOTE Both the image register and the module are updated when the immediate coil is executed Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Immediate address Y Closed Coil oet Coil SET The SET Coil is used to set a specified bit to ON 1 when the network passes power flow If the network does not have power the bit remains unchanged C1 SET 2 Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types SET Bit Address Form C Reset RST The RST Coil is used to set a specified bit to OFF 0 when the network passes power flow If the network does not have power the bit remains unchanged C1 RST2 Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types RST Bit Address Form C oet Immediate Coil SETI The SETI Immediate Coil is used to set a specified bi
293. in Scan Times Comparing Loops 24 mismatches in Loops 4 Comparing Alarms 24 No mismatches in Alarms 7 Comparing SF Programs SFP header mismatch mismatch mismatch 21 Sor more mismatches SFP compare aborted 54 Comparing SF Subroutines SF51 mismatch SFS missing SFS2 mismatch SFS missing Figure 6 09e 129 Displaying Processor Faults You can display the Faults of your processor while online To display the processor faults 1 Click Faults from the Diagnostics menu Alt D A 2 Theonline Faults are displayed see Figures 6 10f Figure 6 09f 130 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays Displaying Processor Status You can display the status of your processor while online or offline To display the processor status 1 Click PLC Status from the PLC Utilities menu Alt U P 2 Either the PLC Status for online or offline is displayed see Figures 6 10 and 6 11 3 Click Close to close the PLC Status box and return to the active logic program PLC Status SIMATIC 555 E 8 Communications Path B D 5 zoe Meray Byes a um Progam Networks _ ere KE Processor Status PLC Good Program Information EE Networks Figure 6 11 Online PLC Status 131 PLC Operations This menu item allows you to view
294. in the PLC Prior to connecting the first time you need to set up the PLC connection Refer to Chapter 4 Fast PLC Setup for more details NOTE Remember you cannot load a file with Fast PLC Connection To load a file Online use Open Program To connect to a PLC online click Toolbar or select Fast PLC Connection from the File menu You are set to begin programming NOTE your controller is a 575 refer to Connecting Online to 575 in this chapter for information on selecting Application ID and configuring ports 22 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Open an Existing Logic Program Offline or Online You can open an existing logic file to edit or update program information in either online or offline mode Logic programs may contain one or more of the following logic and data tags headers and descriptions and comments Several programs may be open at one time without losing memory contents Editing or modifying a program online may produce arning unexpected or hazardous results To open an existing program 4 Click on the Toolbar or select Open Program from the File menu Result The Open Program dialog box appears Figure 3 6 NOTE The last four files that were opened are saved and listed at the bottom of the File menu When you select one of these files the Open Program dialog box automatically opens with the file you selected Figure 3 6 5 Click Browse Result The
295. ination address using the optional field DI This is an index into a table when you want to copy an element into a table DI designates the relative element in a table referenced by TD into which the source is copied The element at TD 0 is the first element in the table DI can be either a constant 0 65535 blank or for no indexing or you can enter a variable index A variable index specifies any readable word The content of this address is an unsigned integer 0 65535 that gives the element number of the first element in the table to which the source elements are copied If an indirect destination address is indexed the controller first resolves the address and then it indexes it You can specify the number of elements to be copied in the count field N Count is defined as follows Constant count used to specify an unsigned integer in the range 1 32767 A variable count with any readable word The value of the count is determined the contents of this work when the MOVE executes The count range is 0 32767 where means that no elements are moved MOVE Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Constant 0 32767 TS Word Constant Form A direct or indirect Constant 2048 2047 IS Blank Constant Word Form A Blank Constant 0 65535 TD Word Address Form A Indirect addr Form B Direct Addr DI Blank Constant Word Form A Blank Const 0 65535 N Word Constant Form A Const 0 32767 274 FasTrak SoftWor
296. included with Cross reference printout Tags Descriptions Status Words Timer Variable Drum Variables One Shots Shift Registers Tables Moves SF Error Codes Loop Variables Alarm Variables G Mem VMM VMS 41 505 Programming Software for Windows amp To include Addresses Used Table with the Cross reference print out select the appropriate check box under Include 1 Click on the Doc Font button to change the Tag Description and Comments printout font of the active program Result The Font dialog box appears 2 Choose a new font font style or font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 3 Click OK in the Font dialog box to save your changes or click Cancel to cancel changes Result The Print Cross reference dialog box appears NOTE The print selection options are stored when saving a program Print to a Text File 1 To print to a text file select Output To Text File from the File menu The Result The Print Output to Text File dialog box appears Figure 3 19b See Printing Logic Programs for dialog box selections 2 Once selections are made select OK 3 Enter a file name to save to and select OK Print to Text File Fa 1 6 Inline Ref CAs 0 SF Programs 1 1023 SF Subroutines 1 1023 Analog Alarms 128 PLC Configuration wdi 505 Channel Base 1 0 1 15 Profibus DP 5Slave 1 112 291 Config Memo
297. indow Press F5 again to hide the Descriptions Address Tags Press Ctrl F5 to display address Tags in the Logic Window Press Ctrl F5 again to hide the Tags Program and Network Headers Press Shift F5 to display program and network headers in the Logic Window Press Shift F5 again to hide the headers 168 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Edit Title Page Print Only This option allows you to display descriptive information at the beginning of your printouts To access the Edit Title Page option 1 Select Title Page Print Editor from the View menu 2 The following dialog window is displayed Figure 7 10 Figure 7 10 3 Enter the text and press OK when you are done 169 170 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 8 Analog Alarms Overview The analog alarm functions allow you to monitor an analog input signal by setting standard alarm on a process variable PV and a target setpoint SP Analog alarms are referenced by user assigned number from 1 512 depending on the processor type analog alarm parameters are stored in Special Memory S Memory when you program the analog alarm The size of S Memory is user configurable Analog Alarm Editor The Analog Alarm Editor gives you the ability to display access and or modify analog alarms To access the Analog Alarm Editor 1 Click Alarm from the View menu Alt V 2 The Analog Alarm Directory dialog box appears see Figure 8 1
298. indow setup ata tees aestas esae 234 Tend Window setup CLE eoi deduxit eb beds ce b dad 235 Trend Window setup Lrend ID ata necasasadeouanbetcuaeatacnates 232 407 Trending method description ed es eR auctus adeo dieit edd 233 AU eG cese quite dte apte duet N 233 eter ere DT 233 TroubleshoO0tlli9 x 1 4 10 122 Troubleshooting 10 U UD coto MU aM MA M 78 t ccc e 47 Uo tli A 127 UnIOCK eg a eo eR bnc 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 146 147 153 Unlock Memory UNE CK ci siete WORD IE ee 307 Valle Sisari te ET 347 Up CounterE CER tetto pata dt eda sacl amm Eta tet Mid M tU D MR em E Se cedes 251 Up Down OUR e a 78 Up Down Counter 252 Updating Online Offline Profibus Configuration 90 User External Subroutine Memory
299. ing when connecting to a remote machine on a domain The rights a user has and the groups they belong to are the same amongst all the machines on the domain This eliminates the need to declare users twice Once on the local machine and once on the remote machine When setting up a server on a domain its important to choose the domain controller machine because this machine holds all the domain users and groups 376 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Adding Users and Groups to the Operating System Configuring users and groups differ depending on the operating system your on Because NT Security is based on Users and Groups the following must be done Adding Users for Windows 95 98 and ME In Windows 9x and Me users may logon to the system to get their unique user profile but they do not have any rights since the OS is unprotected and they do not belong to any groups user can be created simply by entering a unique user name and password when logging on to the OS A user may skip the login procedure altogether in which case they become the Guest user Adding Users for Windows NT In Windows NT users and groups can be created by entering Administrative Tools from Control Panel and selecting User Manager This is shown in the figure below Lomputer Management Action view Tree Computer Management Local E System Tools EH Event Viewer GE System Information i Ag Performance Logs and Aler
300. ing loop data to be accessed from an operator interface To From T able Table Address Parameters Figure 11 38 PACKLOOP Format A specifies whether you are writing data to or from the table B specifies the address of the table to or from which data are moved C specifies the number of the loop to be accessed The range for C is from 1 to the maximum number of loops D specifies the loop variables Up to eight variables can be designated See Table 7 11 for a list of the loop variables PACKLOOP Operation The operation of the PACKLOOP statement is described below PACKLOOP operates similarly to the PACKAA statement See Figure 7 36 and Figure 7 37 for an example of how the PACKLOOP statement executes When the PACKLOOP statement executes the following actions occur Fora TO Table the value of the loop variable specified in D is written into the table at the address designated by B If additional variables are specified the second variable is written to B 1 the third to B 2 and so on up to eight variables Fora FROM Table PACKLOOP writes the word in the table starting address B into the specified loop variable If additional variMables are specified the second word in the table is written to the second variable and so on up to eight variables Mnemonic Variable Name LACK Alarm Acknowledge LADB Alarm Deadband LCF C Flags 32 bits LCFH Most Sign
301. ions group box These actions are available when Ladder SFS or SFP only are selected in the Search amp replace in combo box The Copy network headers Check Box A network can be documented with a network header This network header is actually associated with the address of the network s output coil When the search and replace process changes the address of a network s coil the original network header is no longer tied to that network There are two options in this situation Either the network header if any associated with the coil s new address replaces the network s previous header Or the network header associated with the coil s original address is copied to the coil s new address As an example of the first option the address of a network s output coil is C1 The network header associated with address C1 is PROCESS 1 INDICATOR LIGHT The search and replace operation changes C1 to X44 The output coil of this network is now address X44 Address X44 has no network header associated with it As a result this particular network loses its network header In the second option when the search and replace operation changes the network output coil address from C1 to X44 the network header PROCESS 1 INDICATOR LIGHT is copied from address C1 to address X44 This allows the network to retain its original network header To select the first option do not check the Copy network header check box 118 FasTrak SoftWorks
302. ions63 Connect Your PC to Ethernet 63 Assign an IP Address to the 64 Tips for Using the PLC Start Option 65 Connect the Module to the 65 Testing the Connection with 65 TCP IP Communication 65 Communication 66 PAG GCS SOS itis ndo uu ed 67 Setting Up and Using PROFIBUS FMS in 505 WorkShop 68 Installing the PROFIBUS FMS Communications Processor 68 Fast PLC STUD M EE 69 nt nee CES 70 MM 70 5 PLC Memory 8 I O Configuration 73 Gl M 73 PLC Type Setup TOT iG UU e 74 Changing TY DCS 75 PLC Memory GonfIgurallODi 75 Accessing PLC Config rallofi reos oe ei or e pee sene 76 Controller Memory TYPOS uec es eto e eene One Neon aa chua cn seeded 77 Ladder MORET IET 77 ii FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Image Register
303. irect address specify any readable word For a direct address LDA copies the logical address for this word into the destination For an indirect address precede the address with the character The long word at this indirect address must contain another address and the LDA copies this second logical address into the destination The address that is copied to the destination is the logical address and NOT the physical address To avoid unpredictable machine operation do not use this address as a pointer within an external subroutine LDA Parameter Valid Parameter Types Type Reference Constant only 0 32767 Word Address Source address Form A Blank Word Source Index Form A Blank 32768 32767 is Word Address Destination address Form B direct addr Form A indirect BB addr Destination Index Form A Blank 32768 32767 Blank Word Bl You can specify the field Al as an index into the source address when you want to copy an address that is in a table Al should designate the relative word in the table referenced by A The element A 0 is the first element in the table The following is a list of valid types for Al Q Enter a constant 0 65535 If you leave the field blank or enter a 0 then no indexing will be done Q Enter any readable word see table above The contents of this word should be an unsigned integer 0 65535 that gives the value of the index If an indirect source address is indexed the controller
304. irectly from the I O modules into the image register For outputs the data transfer is directly from the image register to the I O modules When the instruction has power the IORW instruction is executed The IORW supports these features The data transfer takes place when the instruction is executed in RLL Q For inputs X and WX the status of the specified number of points is copied from the module to the image register For outputs Y and WY the status of the specified number of points is copied from the image register to the I O module Q Output status follows input status unless an error occurs For inputs when the module is not preset or does not match I O configuration the specified input points in the image register are cleared to zero and the output turns off For outputs when the module is not present or does not match configuration the status of the specified output points in the image register is not copied to the I O module and the output turn off NOTE When the IORW copies Y values from the image register to a module the current state of the Y points in the image register are written to the module IF you want these Ys to be controlled by an or a JMP the or JMP must be used to control the coils which write to the Ys The IORW operation is not directly affected by MCHs and JMPs IORW Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 ST Bit Address Starting
305. is incremented by one each time the Counter input transitions from off to on Counting begins at zero 0 and continues to the preset value specified by Preset Ifthe Enable Reset is turned off the count is reset to zero is saved if the Enable Reset input is on and loss of power occurs provided the controller battery backup is enabled Q The output is turned on when the current count equals the preset count specified by Preset If the Enable Reset does not receive poser flow the instruction is not executed and the output does not turn on COUNTER CTR Parameter Valid Parameter Types UF COUNTER PRESET 567 Type OUTPUT Counter Constant Depends on configured Number quantities Max 128 Preset Constant Counts to this value 0 32767 STATUS UNPROT 251 Up Down Counter The Up Down Counter UDC instruction counts the number of events up or down from 0 32767 When the counter counts up it counts to the preset value specified in Preset which is stored in TCP memory The current count is stored in memory The UDC instruction has the following properties The Enable Reset must be on for the counter to operate When the Enable Reset is on the counter is incremented by one when the Up input transitions from off to on When the Enable Reset is on the counter is decremented by one when the Down input transitions from off to on The UDC cannot be decremented to a number less than
306. itten If a C or Y is selected bit 12 is not used NOTE f you program an analog alarm and do not disable it the controller begins to monitor the programmed variable as soon as you place the controller in Run mode Sample Rate Enter a time in seconds in the SAMPLE RATE field The sample rate determines how often deviation alarm bits and associated math are evaluated Sample rates are programmable in 0 1 second increments with alarms checked at least once every two seconds The sample rate can be any floating point number between 0 1 and 1 6772 x 106 seconds Process Variable Address Enter an address V WX or WY in the PROCESS VARIABLE ADDRESS field A process variable must be specified for each analog alarm The process variable can be taken from the following A word input or output module The programming table uses a WX WY address A location in V Memory The programming table uses an address in V Memory If you select NONE the analog alarm does not read an address to obtain the Process Variable 174 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Low Process Variable Range Enter the low value of the process variable in the Process Variable Range Field You must specify the engineering values that correspond to the lower range of the input span High Process Variable Range Enter the high value of the process variable in the Process Variable Range Field You must specify the engineering values that corres
307. kShop to a local or client machine In this case installing the Security Configurator is an option After this installation is complete the user must install to the machine which will act as the remote server Installation is identical to the above with the exception that the client need not be installed and therefore may be unchecked from InstallShield It is recommended that both the Security Server FTSecSrv and Configurator FTSecCfg be installed If a client software application is already installed to the machine which the user wishes to run as the remote security server installation of security is identical to installing to a local machine in the above sectopn Installation Dialogs The following two dialogs are examples of what a user should expect to see during installation Below is the dialog whereby the user selects to install the client application security or both 374 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop PLI Werk Shop Sebup IE Figure 14 12a To add or remove which component of security the user wishes click on the Change button from the dialog above while selecting NT Security The next dialog will then open Select Sub conmmnonents Figure 14 12b These are the only two dialogs that will be needed during the installation process 375 Workgroups and Domains Workgroups NT security works slightly different in workgroups than in domains This differenc
308. ks Inc 505 WorkShop Move Word MOVW The Move Word MOVW instruction copies up to 256 contiguous words from one location to another The starting address for the words to be moved is specified by A and the starting memory location for their destination is specified by B All words are copied in a single scan When power is passed to the input of the MOVW the instruction is executed The operation of the MOVW is described as follows Q A table of up to 256 N words having a starting memory location specified by A are copied Q Ifa constant value is specified in A then the constant is copied to all destination locations The words are copied to a destination beginning at the memory location designated by B Q The output is turned on when the instruction is executed MOVW Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 A Word Const Form A Const 32768 32767 B Word Form B N Constant Only 1 256 275 Move Word From Table MWFT The Move Word from Table instruction MWFT copies a word from a table to a V memory location A table pointer designates the address of the next word in the table to be copied One word is copied during each scan The MWFT operates as follows When Enable Reset is off the table starting address 5 is loaded into pointer When the Enable Reset turns on the box is enabled When the input is turned on the following actions occur A word is copi
309. ks for the next match on the next scan as long as the Enable and Reset remains on Q Ifthe two words are equal the index is incremented by one and the next word in the table is compared to the source word Q If no mismatches are found in the table the output remains off The index contains the position of the last word in the table The entire table is searched during one scan until mismatch or no mismatch is found Ifthe Enable turns off while the Reset is on the index holds its current value If the does turn off the index resets to 1 Q After the entire table has been searched the STFN must be reset in order to executed again STFN Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 WS Word Address Form A TS Word Address Form A IN Word Address V W G WO Word Address Form B N Constant 1 256 280 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Table to Table And The Table to Table AND TAND instruction ANDs the corresponding bits in two tables and places the results in a specified third table If both bits are 1 then the resultant bit is set to 1 otherwise the result bit is O The TAND has the following properties When the input turns on a comparison is made between each bit of each word in the first T1 and second T2 tables Q Each pair of bits is ANDed and the resultant bit is placed in the third table TD If both bits are 1 then the resultant bit is set to 1 Othe
310. l your changes Result The Print Documentation dialog box appears 40 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Print Cross Reference Click the Cross reference check box from the Print dialog box to print the following Q Alllogic ladder SFS and SFP Control Relays C Selected logic ladder SFS or V Memory Selected ladder in address K Memory mode I O Elements X Y WX and Selected Special Function lines Control Relays C Alarms Tags Descriptions and Loops Comments I O Elements X Y WX and To change the Cross reference properties click the Cross reference button on the Print dialog box The Print Cross reference dialog box appears Figure 3 19 Ens TT ES Ladder from 2 E Dum iC Address Modes o ar Network Mode ee 8 P uee P ds Status Words Timer Variables Bt trom i x oo me Drum Variables Me Shots E peus 2 vt Shift Registers x Table Moves Es SE Lar are e Ws Variables zu to SM Sri Mem VMS We Addresses Used Table Figure 3 19 Click the All check box to print the entire range of items To print a selection deselect the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box The following can be individually turned on and off to be
311. lar item Event Updates only if the event created in Set Event is true and selected The Set Event screen appears Figure 0 5 Set Event Event Address Event Hange x Device Name Address T ag IF S1 is gt D read the addresses device 1 the data window Figure 0 5 Event Address Device Name Displays the device name Address Tag Displays the event address 213 Note 214 Tags Displays addresses and tags Click an item and the corresponding address tag appears in the Address Tag edit box Event Range An expression involving the event address The addresses in a data window are updated as long as the expression is true The text at the top of the edit box describes the complete expression with the event address The first combo box and adjacent edit box contain the low trigger range The combo box contains the following options lt gt lt gt and The last combo box and adjacent edit contain high trigger range The combo box contains the following options lt gt lt gt and The middle combo box represents the trigger relationship This combo box contains the following strings END When END is selected only the low trigger range 15 used in the expression Logging method description box Describes the log method that is currently checked This text changes whenever you select a different log method Logging Options Update only when
312. le Disable state NOTE view or edit documentation of a selected address Click on the Modify Doc button 2 Select the Analog Alarm number that you want to delete by using the left mouse button or the Arrow keys on the keyboard Click on the dialog box Delete button or use the keyboard to Tab to the Delete button and press Enter The following dialog box appears Figure 8 3 Figure 8 3 3 Select Yes to delete the analog alarm or No to return to the previous dialog box 172 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop and Paste Alarms To Copy and Paste an Alarm 1 Click Alarm from the View menu 2 The Analog Alarm Directory dialog box appears see Figure 8 1 The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Alarm number 1 512 depending on the processor type Alarm Title and Enable Disable state 3 Select the Alarm number that you want to Copy by using the left mouse button or the Arrow keys the keyboard The drag and left mouse button or Shift arrow key can be used to select multiple Alarm numbers Click on the dialog box Copy button to place the selected Alarm number in the clipboard 4 Move the cursor to the desired location and click on the dialog box Paste button to paste the clipboard contents into the new location Analog Parameters Figure 8 4 shows a template of the Analog Alarm Edit window Alarm Loi Flag Addr Alam
313. le disable program segments during scan Compares status of discrete points with a set of specified bit patterns Square Root Scan synchronization inhibit Searches for a word in a table equal to a specified word Searches for a word in a table not equal to a specified word Subtraction ANDs the corresponding bits in two tables Start a new RLL program segment Compares current time with a specified time Inverts status of each bit in a table Places textual information into L Memory Times events Times events ORs the corresponding bits in two tables Sets time in real time clock Copies a word from a table Does an EXCLUSIVE OR on the corresponding bits in two tables Counts events up or down Used together with LOCK and provide a mechanism whereby multiple applications in the 575 system can coordinate access to shared resources Does logical bit by bit AND on two words Does logical bit by bit OR on two words Rotates the 4 segment bits of a word Copies a word into a table ANDs bits of a word with the bits of a word in a table ORs bits of a word with the bits of a word in a table Does an EXCLUSIVE OR on the bits of a word with the bits of a word in a table Does logical bit by bit EXCLUSIVE OR on two words Calls an externally developed subroutine and passes parameters to it 101 505 Programming Software for Windows If the TISOFT mode is turned on in the program setup see Ladder options und
314. le extension and file name in the Compare File box 2 Next enter the Maximum mismatches per category Maximum mismatches per category allows you to abort the compare process if the number of mismatches exceeds the number entered in the Maximum mismatches per category selection box 3 Now click on the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to compare For each of the V or K memory address you can also choose the range for the comparison 128 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 4 f you are comparing ladder logic select the method The Comprehensive compare provides a better more detailed comparison The Basic compare is much faster 5 Then enter a result file path and name in the Result File box if the results of the compare are to be saved to a file 6 Click OK to start the compare process NOTE If there are more than one program opened the File Program Compare compares the program in the active window When the compare finishes you receive a display such as that shown in Figure 6 09E The display highlights any mismatches between the File and controller or offline program Compare Results Comparing Ladder 24 No mismatches in Ladder Comparing Forced word 120 24 No mismatches in Forced Word 120 24 Comparing Forced Bit 170 mismatches in Forced Bit IOs 94 Comparing Forced Control Relays Mamismatches in Forced Control Relays Comparing Scan Times No mismatches
315. lect YES or NO in this field to lock or not lock the CASCADE 186 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Error Operation Select SQUARED or DEADBAND in the Error Operation field The Error Squared and the Deadband options are mutually exclusive Select NONE if there is be no calculation on the error value In calculating the control equation the controller uses an error value equal to or less than 1 0 96 of PROCESS VARIABLE span over 100 Therefore selecting error squared gives a lower gain for a higher error The control equation with error squared is based on signed error squared instead of the error alone To implement a high gain for large errors and no gain for small errors incorporate an error deadband When error deadband is selected the controller does not take any action on the output if the process variable is within the yellow deviation limits oquared error calculation en SP PVn x abs SP PVn Deadband error calculation 0 if abs SP YDEV en SP PVn YDEV if SP PVn gt YDEV en SP PVn YDEV if SP PVn YDEV No error calculation en SP PVn Heverse Acting Select YES for reverse acting loop in the REVERSE ACTING field Select NO for a direct acting loop A reverse acting loop is defined to have a negative gain i e a positive change in error SP PROCESS VARIABLE results in a negative change in the output from the controller The value of the outp
316. lick on the Write button to enter the numbers Click Close to exit the Task Codes Per Scan and return to the active logic program 22 omes ee p Hed em pu puer Figure 6 12c 140 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Diagnostics on Base Diagnostics on Base is used to run diagnostics on one or all the I O bases To invoke the operation l 2 3 7 Click Diagnostics on Base from the PLC Utilities menu Alt U D The Diagnostics on Base dialog box is displayed in the format shown in Figure 6 124 To run base diagnostics on one base Q Type inthe channel and base number in their associated data field Click on the Run Current button and the data will be displayed in the dialog box To locate the Dual Media base Q Type inthe channel and base number in their associated data field Click on the Next DM button and the data will be displayed the dialog box To change the active and standby roles of RBCs a particular base Type in the channel and base number in their associated data field Click on the Swap RBCs To run base diagnostics on all bases Q Click on the Run All button and the data will be displayed in the dialog box Click Close to exit the Task Codes Per Scan and return to the active logic program Figure 6 12d Hot Backup Hot Backup is used to select the status of a hot backup unit Hot Backup is only valid for the 565 controller To execu
317. ligent or Operator Interface devices To access the Unique function Select an item in the logic window to search on Then select Unique Address from the View menu The Unique Address window appears The two results of the search are Address exists only at current network Q Address exist at network number XXXX If you have more than one program loaded the information displayed is for the program in the active window only 127 505 Programming Software for Windows Compare File Program Compare compares Ladder Q Alarms Forced Word I O Special Function Programs Forced Discrete I O Special Function Subroutines Q Forced Control Relays Sequencer Scan Time Vand K Memory Loops data of the selected program on disk to the data in the controller online or offline To perform a File Program Compare you must first have an opened online or offline program see Chapter 3 Open an Existing Logic Program Offline or Online Select File Program Compare from the File menu Result The File Program Compare window appears Figure 6 099 Program Compare 1 Emer mismnatchert per category B e P Forced yond LAD Loo Forced 141 Forced Conto Sequencer Scan Tima SPS and K Hernon Ranges Figure 6 09d 1 Click the Browse button to locate the disk file to compare or type in the fi
318. locks are being queued to run but are not running Upon returning to RUN mode execution resumes where it was halted 2 To select HALT mode Click on the Halt button on the PLC Operations dialog box The following message appears Set the loop processor to halt mode Select either YES or NO places the loop card in the RUN mode enabled control blocks are being queued and are running 3 To select LOOP RUN mode Click on the Run button on the PLC Operations dialog box The following message appears Set the loop processor to run mode Select either YES or NO The loop mode can either follow that of the discrete CPU or be in RUN mode independent of the ladder program To invoke this option select the LOCKED or UNLOCKED field Unlock frees the loop card for selection of RUN operating mode independent of the ladder CPU Q Lock locks the loop card to follow the operating mode selected for ladders To select LOOP LOCK UNLOCK mode 1 Click on the Lock Unlock button on the PLC Operations dialog box The following message appears Lock or Unlock loop processor from ladder operation mode 2 Select either YES or NO Run Controller Diagnostics Use Diagnostics to run diagnostics on your controller To execute Diagnostics 1 Click Diagnostics from the PLC Operations dialog box 2 When you receive the message Execute Diagnostics Select either YES or NO 134 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Programming EEPR
319. log box Delete button or use the keyboard to Tab to the Delete button and press Enter or Alt D The following dialog box appears Figure 9 3 505 SoftShop selected Loop will be deleted Do you wis Figure 9 3 3 Select Yes to delete the PID Loop and No to return to the previous dialog box 190 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Ramp Soak The ramp soak feature allows you to define a variation for the process variable by specifying the time characteristics of the loop setpoint Figure 9 4 The capability of varying the loop setpoint can be useful in a number of processes such as heat treating and batch cooking a E d un Figure 9 4 Example Ramp Soak Cycle You can use simple ramp operations to improve some process startup procedures For example the controllers do a bumpless transfer from manual to automatic mode This transfer holds the process at the initial state when the mode change occurs A two step ramp soak profile can then move the setpoint to a predefined value following the mode change with minimal disturbance to the process Defining Ramp Soak Steps Ramp Soak is programmed as a set of time periods or steps A step can be one of three types a ramp a soak or an end The ramp step changes the loop setpoint linearly from its current value to new value at a specified rate of change Q The soak step holds the setpoint constant for a specified peri
320. log box appears Figure 3 10 2 n the Save As dialog box click options in the necessary group boxes to designate location to save the logic program 3 Click OK or press Enter Result Your file is saved with its new name 4 f you select a file name that already exists in that directory a message appears with options Select from the following options YES saves the updated program with the current name overwriting the previous version cancels the save procedure NOTE If you are saving documentation to an online program please see Saving Online under Saving Logic Programs on the preceding pages 33 505 Programming Software for Windows amp Printing Logic Programs 505 WorkShop provides you with a number of print features that allow customization of your printouts These include Q Tags and Documentation Cross Reference Network Address Range Margins Q Starting Page Number Before you can print open a logic program Make certain that you have loaded the correct print drivers for your printer through the Windows Control Panel If you have questions regarding loading print drivers consult your printer s user s manual and the Windows User s Guide To print logic programs and or documentation 1 Click on the toolbar or select Print from the File menu Ctrl P Result The Print dialog box appears Figure 3 12 adder 1 6 Inline CAs 0 0 SF Programs 1 1023 SF Subroutines 1
321. lows up to 32 address ranges to be searched and replaced in one continuous process within an offline PLC program Search and Heplace T able ___ O sil a Figure 6 6b The Search and Replace Table Dialog Select Search amp Replace Table from the Edit menu to display the Search and Replace Table dialog below 115 505 Programming Software for Windows Search and Replace T able Search for through Replace with through Search for through Replace with through Special instructions Search amp replace in Ladder Copy network headers From network Copy address descriptions each replacement T ME M Skip errors Help Figure 6 6c The Search for Combo Boxes Each Search for combo box specifies the address type and number from which that search and replace operation will be performed The drop lists in these combo boxes contain prefixes of all valid address and instruction types Enter a number after the address prefix to designate the starting point of the address range to be searched and replaced For example the partial drop list may contain the following address prefixes EEA lt lt lt gt
322. lt The PLC Type Setup dialog box appears Figure 5 1 2 Select the appropriate PLC Type and PLC Memory Size PLC Memory Configuration Controller memory is composed of several functional types refer to Table 5 2 You can configure the amount of memory that is allotted to some these areas This is dependent upon your application and PLC type The configurable memory sizes are given in the SIMATIC 545 555 575 System Reference Manual Ladder User Program Memory adder Memory stores RLL program Special Memory stores loops analog alarms and SF Programs User Memory stores user defined subroutines User Data Data Area Memory e Variable Memory stores variable data e Constant Memory stores constant data e Global and VME Memory are used for VME data transfer applies to 575 only oystem oystem Memory RLL instruction tables drum timer counter shift register etc Image registers and control and relays e Subroutine parameter area SF program temporary memory 15 505 Programming Software for Windows Status Word memory Not Configurable Table 5 2 The configuration process begins with PLC Configuration Accessing PLC Configuration 1 2 76 Select PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu Result The PLC Configuration dialog box appears Figure 5 2 Es Processor information oe de Dee SIMATIC 58
323. ltiple controllers Easy to troubleshoot problems by swapping CP2572 modules proper IP address is loaded from ladder logic program as soon as CPU enters RUN mode Cons Must reprogram EEPROM whenever CP2572 module is replaced A CP2572 module programmed in one application and installed in another would respond to the wrong IP address unless reprogrammed Cannot swap CP2572 modules without reprogramming through serial port by a PC IP Address is not loaded unless CPU enters RUN mode if power is lost when CPU is not in RUN mode you must manually bring CPU back to RUN mode via programming device in CPU s RS 232 port to restore Ethernet communications If multiple controllers perform the same function you must modify ladder logic program for each one so that it contains a unique IP address Table 4 2 Alternatives for Loading IP Address The SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP2572 User Manual describes the Autostart and PLC Start procedures in detail follow the instructions in the manual to configure the IP address for your module NOTE New or modified IP address configurations do not take effect until you power cycle the base containing the PPX 505 CP2572 module 64 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Tips for Using the PLC Start Option The SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP2572 User Manual describes how to build a Startup Network Command
324. ly developed subroutine programs into User Memory For example you can merge compiled C Pascal assembly language and other programs into U Memory Follow these steps to prepare the external subroutine for use in the controller 1 Compile assemble the subroutines and header to create object modules 2 Link the object modules for the header and subroutines to create the load module The file name must have the extension rec The output must have the header at zero followed by the code and data constants then the variables and finally the stack 3 Select Merge from the File menu and U Memory from the list Window Result The Merge dialog box appears Figure 3 28 4 Type the program name in the Filename line or click Browse to search from valid program names 5 Click OK to merge the program U Memory Merge Ea Figure 3 28 52 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 53 505 WorkShop 4 505 WorkShop Setup Overview Before you begin programming you will probably want to spend some time configuring and customizing the software and some of the hardware attached to your computer This chapter will help you with Program Setup Shows you how to customize 505 WorkShop to fit your preferences Communications Walks you through how to tell your computer which port is attached to oetup your PLC Printer Setup Assists you in determining the correct settings for your printer Page Setup Allows you to confi
325. ly returns to the command line prompt If there are errors a report prints each error 4 Restart the computer to activate the driver Message While running 505 WorkShop the FasTrak Key was removed from the parallel port Remedy Check to see that The FasTrak Key is connected to a parallel port The FasTrak Key is the first device attached to the computer Message 505 WorkShop for Simatic 505 is not supported by attached FasTrak Key Demo mode may be entered Possible Cause The attached key is not authorized for use with Simatic 505 10 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Remedy Check to see that the correct FasTrak Key has been attached to the parallel port Call FasTrak Technical Support Message Product version is not supported by FasTrak Key Call FasTrak to update FasTrak Key Possible Cause The key date does not support the current software version Remedy Call FasTrak Technical Support Message Fas Trak KEY is corrupt Demo mode may be entered Possible Cause You purchased a partial software package and the partial package information cannot be read from the FasTrak Key Remedy Call FasTrak Technical Support Connect the Communications Cable The PLC communications cable connects the serial COM port of the personal computer to the PLC This enables you to transfer programs and data from the computer s memory Offline to the PLC and vice versa This cable has a
326. m 257 Seabee sicubi thee te M MU Teter 79 MME SEU CIS ED Mr Tpr precor Tm 304 21 11 216 Time Event Driven Drum EDRUM eese enne 258 Time Counter Memory 2 T 78 Tipstor Using the PEC Stan olla i a i lca ep dt 65 Hbri d ET EIS 98 Hle 17 18 19 20 T 169 TIWA Y ScIUp COontr9UfatlOfics ooi epo oq a tatis tA 61 ieee 78 B D Ld DONE D ER 78 Bit he demas 92 To enter instructions using mouse and Instruction 977 To Enter Mnemonic Instructions with the enn nnne enne 98 Toolbar3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 31 32 33 34 95 96 106 108 111 112 113 114 120 124 159 164 Transfer Offline Program to Online 26 Rr TT 236 Trend Window Graph 230 Trend W
327. m windows can be displayed simultaneously However only one window is active at a time In the active logic window the ladder editor allows you to enter and modify ladder logic To make a logic window active simply place the pointer on the desired window and click the left mouse button From the keyboard press Alt W and press the number of the corresponding logic window You will notice that the active window comes to the front of all other windows Insert a New Network In the active logic program window you can insert a new network using the mouse or the keyboard To insert a new network using the mouse 1 Click new network button on the Toolbar Notice that the new network attaches to the pointer 2 Bring the pointer into the active logic window Position the pointer where you want the new network 3 Click the left mouse button The new network is inserted For example if the cursor is positioned in Network 002 the new network becomes Network 002 and existing Network 002 becomes 003 4 Repeat Step to insert additional networks Remove the new network from the pointer by clicking the arrow on the Instruction Bar To insert a new network using the keyboard 1 Press Alt P and the Program menu drops down 2 Press Sor use the down arrow keys to highlight New Network and press Enter The New Network dialog box appears 3 Enter the number of the network you wish to enter If a network 002 exists and you enter 2 i
328. mally Open Immediate contact is open and does not pass power AT 41 NOTE Only the power flow for immediate X contact is updated The value the image register table is not updated Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types LDI Bit Address X 245 Normally Closed Immediate Contact When the discrete point of an I O module of a Normally Closed Immediate contact is ON the contact is open and does not pass power When the referenced address is OFF the Normally Closed Immediate contact is closed and passes power A ja NOTE Only the power flow for an immediate X contact is updated The value in the image register table is not updated Parameter Valid Parameter Types Type Bit Address X Logical Not Contact NOT The NOT instruction inverts the power flow to the state opposite its current state The NOT instruction does not have any parameters NOTH Do not program a NOT in parallel with any network that Warning does not connect to the power rail One Shot Contact OS The One Shot instruction turns on an output for a single scan The single parameter in the instruction contains the instruction reference number When the input transitions from OFF to ON the output is turned on for exactly one scan After the One Shot is executed its input must be off for at least one scan before the instruction can be executed again If the input is OFF the instruction is not executed and there is no power flow at the out
329. me The menu options displayed may change depending upon the operation in progress select File New Program or Open Program and the following Menu Bar appears Figure 3 2 SoftShop 505 olx Edt View Program Diagnostics PLC Utilities Options Window Help Figure 3 2 The Restore button appears on the Menu Bar when a program window is maximized Use the Restore button to control the size of the program window Multiple Program Windows 505 WorkShop displays more than one logic program window at a time You can open as many logic program windows as your computer s memory permits For example you may wish to copy part of a logic program to another program This saves you programming time by not having to retype similar logic statements for each program To copy a part of one logic program to another use the following procedure 1 Open both programs offline 2 Arrange the logic program windows by selecting Tile or Cascade from the Window menu 3 Highlight the data you want to copy to the other program by clicking the mouse and dragging across the data 4 Click Copy from the toolbar or from the Edit menu 5 Move the pointer to the place you want to insert the data in the other program Click Paste from the toolbar or from the Edit menu 19 505 Programming Software for Windows Status Line The Status Line spans the bottom of the 505 WorkShop window It displays information or describes th
330. member in the Windows environment there is usually more than one way to complete a task 505 WorkShop provides keyboard support to access all commands You may find that the most efficient method of programming will be through a combination of keyboard and mouse techniques Refer to Appendix A for a concise list of keyboard supported commands Online Versus Offline Programming Before you begin programming it is important that you understand the differences between programming online and programming offline While programming online you are connected to a PLC which may be running Changing logic in one network may affect logic in another network These changes may create unexpected or hazardous results Editing or modifying a program online may produce unexpected or hazardous results In the online mode PLC Status in Ladder can be displayed However some editing features are not available including Cut and Paste Using the Logic Editor The Logic Editor is where to begin programming since it allows you to display access and or modify logic in the active logic program You can view existing programs or you can create a new one To view an existing program 1 Openor Import a logic program see open program 2 If there is logic in the program but does not appear click E on the toolbar or select Logic Editor from the View menu 95 505 Programming Software for Windows Programming Ladder Several logic progra
331. meterized Go to Subroutine PGTS The PGTS instruction operates similarly to the GTS instruction The PGTS 15 used to a section of the RLL program that is preceded by a subroutine number and executes it Unlike the GTS the PGTS allows you to pass parameters to a subroutine These parameters allow you to write a generic subroutine using parameter identified IN1 IN20 instead of specific memory locations Several PGTS instruction using different memory locations as parameters can then call the same general subroutine number To Program the Instruction To program the instruction first insert the instruction into the ladder network Using the Program menu new parameters may be added or deleted by clicking the appropriate menu option Once a parameter has been added it can be selected and edited by clicking once on said parameter from within the box instruction To delete a parameter use the menu selection found in the Program menu The PGTS instruction works as follows When the input is turned on the contents of each parameter are set equal to the contents of the memory location specified in the parameter field Then the subroutine indicated the PGTS number 15 called When the subroutine returns control to the main RLL program the contents of the memory location specified in each read write IO parameter field is set equal to the contents of the parameter The contents of memory locations designated IN are not changed
332. miscellaneous errors that may occur while attempting to log data dependant upon setup criteria for all log windows that are currently logging data If no online log windows are up the message No logs are currently active will be displayed A successful log entry in this window will read At date and time of log data was successfully logged from log window name to Access log filename A failed log entry in this window will read At date and time of log data failed to log error message describing reason of failure Each message type can be displayed in a different color See section 5 2 Entries into this window may be stopped at any time by checking the Pause Logging menu under the main menu Mode Un checking the Pause Logging menu will re enable the window so that it may receive status messages once more Status messages that occurred when the window was paused are lost A floating menu brought on by a right mouse button click while the cursor is over this window can be utilized to allow a user to clear or hide the window File Edit View Data Setup Mode Window Help 21 LogSheet 505Server Value 1 VA 10 00 15 250 AM 01 06 00 Offline v5 10 00 15 250 AM 01 06 00 Offline C1 10 00 15 250 AM 01 06 00 Offline Batch5 x5 10 00 15 250 0106 00 0fline 10 00 15 250 AM 01 06 00 Offline Log Status t 09 59 51
333. n change the tag description and comment Figure 7 7 Select OK when you re finished Cut Copy Paste and Deleting Documentation Probably the most frequently used editing features are the three interrelated commands Cut Copy and Paste Use these commands to quickly copy documentation to either another location in the same program or another program The list below describes Cut Copy Paste and Deleting Documentation differences Cut Removes the selection from the program and places it on the clipboard Copy Copies the selection and places it on the clipboard Paste Inserts clipboard contents into the documentation window at the start and end address Delete Removes selected contents from the documentation window The clipboard referred to in the list above is the standard Windows clipboard Refer to your Windows User s Guide for more information To select the information you want to cut or copy click hold and drag the pointer over the desired area Selected items will be highlighted with a different color than your normal workspace color Each of the three editing commands described in detail in the following paragraphs can be accessed several ways 161 Cut To use the cut feature select the information you want to cut by l Clicking 21 on the toolbar or select Cut from the Edit menu and the Cut Range dialog box appears Enter the start and ending address to cut in the dialog box from and to location If
334. n once could cause unpredictable operation by the controller which could result in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Do not use the same reference number more than once for timer counter up down counter and discrete motor control alarm timer instructions NOTE If you use an operator interface to change the time counter values the new values are not changed in the original RLL program If the RLL presets are ever downloaded e g as the result of a complete restart or an edit of the network containing the Timer Counter instruction the changes made with the operator interface are replaced by the values in the RLL program This memory type is divided into areas for storing two types of information This information consists of Timer Counter Preset TCP data and Timer Counter Current data When you designate a preset value for one of the instructions in this group this value is stored as a 16 bit word in TCP Memory When the instruction is actually operating the current time or count is stored as a 16 bit word in TCC Memory 78 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Table Move Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for the operation of the table move instructions including the following Move Word To Table MWTT Move Word From Table MWFT When you assign a number to a table move instruction be sure that you do not use that number for any other table m
335. n the Network Number box the existing Network 002 becomes Network 003 and the new network becomes 002 4 Press Enter and the new network is inserted 5 Repeat Step 3 to enter additional networks Insert a New Row You can insert a new row to a network similar to inserting a new network In the active logic program window use the mouse or keyboard to place the cursor on an existing row in the network To enter a new row using the mouse 1 Click l new row on the Toolbar Notice that the new row attaches to the pointer 2 Place the pointer in the position where you want the new row to appear 3 Click the left mouse button and the new row is inserted 4 Repeat Step to insert additional rows 5 Remove the new row from the pointer by clicking the arrow on the Instruction Bar 96 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop To insert a new row using keyboard 1 4 Press the Insert key to turn Ins mode on See Status Line near the bottom of the screen Use the arrow keys to position the parameter cursor red or highlighted box in the last row of the network Press Enter and the new row appears as the last row Repeat Step 3 to enter additional networks Instructions You can enter instructions into your ladder logic program efficiently using either the Instruction Bar mouse or the Menu Bar mouse and or keyboard See Chapter 6 of the 545 555 575 Programming Reference Manual
336. nder 1 C2 under 2 etc You receive a display showing use of the selected elements according to the following table Blank Point does not exist Dot Point is not used in the program Asterisk Point is used in the program Scroll through the list of addresses on the right side of the Address Used Listing dialog box to select the next grouping of addresses Click on the Address input box to start usage list from another address or tag Repeat oteps 2 through 4 for each item you want to find Close the Address Used Listing window by double clicking on the Control menu box in the upper right corner of the Address Used Listing NOTE f you have Table Update checked in the Program Setup all changes made to logic that are validated and entered are automatically updated in the Address Used Listing FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Address Trace The Address Trace is an online or off line ladder scan for a specific address The search address is based on the cursor position The Trace scans for address instances based on the type of instruction the address is found If the cursor is located on an input instruction then the corresponding address for the output instruction is searched for If the cursor is located on an output instruction then the corresponding address for the input instruction is searched for Each time the Trace function is selected a new addresses search is invoked The address supported by trace are
337. nfirm When the Confirm check box is not chosen on the Replace dialog box the program automatically changes all Find What addresses to Replace With addresses When the Confirm check box is chosen on the Replace dialog box the program displays each address where the Replace is to occur The address to be replaced is surrounded by a red outlined rectangle and the following options are displayed Q Click the Replace button to perform the specified replacement Q Click the Skip button to skip the address and go on to the next item to be replaced Q Click the Stop button to Cancel the Replace operation and return to the specified logic window Skip on Error When the Skip on Error s check box is chosen on the Replace dialog box The program will skip illegal replacements and go on to the next item to be replaced automatically If skip is not chosen the program will flag illegal replacements and the following options are displayed Q Click the Skip button to skip the address and go on to the next item to be replaced Q Click the Stop button to Cancel the Replace operation and return to the specified logic window FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Search and Replace Table The Search and Replace Table feature expands the capabilities of the original Replace feature illustrated below Figure 6 6a The original Replace feature can search and replace only one address at a time The Search and Replace Table seen below al
338. ng Mode Pause Logging overrides this action and suspends logging Specific time Logging terminates after the time indicated just below the radio button After time duration Logging occurs for the duration of the time selected starting from the time indicated under the Start Logging group box After one log Logging is terminated after the first and only log Closing the log window prior to the selected stop logging time overrides the time and terminates all logging from the closed window A message appears warning you of the consequences of shutting down this window Log Days Start Day Select which days to apply the start times Stop Day Select which days to apply the stop times Select day intervals Select start and stop log times that can be applied a number of times to a number of days Options are For for consecutive days or Every for incremental days Selected Log Times Enable and disable each log time by clicking the check box next to the log description FT Logger defaults to logging data immediately after addresses entered into the log window and continues until the log window is closed 211 212 Add gt gt When log time is configured click Add gt gt to save the log time and display it in text form in the Selected Log Times list box 256 log times may be added Two examples of log times in text format are listed below etart logging at 1 30 PM on 10 25 1999 Stop logging after 5 minut
339. no subfields If there is no RETURN statement the program terminates after the last statement Scaling Values The Scale statement uses as input an integer input and converts it to engineering units scaled between high and low limits The SCALE format is shown in Figure 11 48 Binary Input Scaled Hesult Low Limit High Limit ZU Offset Bipolar Figure 11 48 SCALE Format A is the memory location of the input B is the memory location of the result after conversion C is the lower limit to which the input can be scaled D is the upper limit to which the input can be scaled E indicates if the input is 2096 offset Yes or 096 offset No F indicates if the input is bipolar Yes or not No NOTE You cannot choose both bipolar and 20 offset for an input Fields E F 341 SCALE Operation The 342 operation of the Scale statement is described below and illustrated in Figure1 1 49 Each time the SCALE statement executes an integer located in A converts to an integer or real number in engineering units scaled between high and low limits If the input is a variable that could range from 32000 to 32000 the variable is bipolar Set option F to Y es If the input is a variable that could range from 0 to 32000 the variable is unipolar Set option to If the input is a variable that has a 2095 offset ranges from 6400 to 32000 set option E to Y es If the input is
340. ns Select from the following options YES saves the updated program with the current name overwriting the previous version NO cancels the save procedure NOTE You must validate logic before saving If you have not done so a message appears stating changes to logic have not been validated or entered Changes cannot be saved until logic has been validated and entered Click Validate Logic on the toolbar or select Validate and Enter Logic from the Program menu Complete necessary changes to logic and try to save the program again 31 505 Programming Software for Windows Save Save As Online Use the online Save program command to save all the active program contents with its existing name or parts of an existing logic program One or more of the following parts can be saved Ladder Configuration Q Special Function Programs Profibus Q Special Function Subroutines V Variables PID Loops QO K Constants Analog Alarms Word I O Force States Documentation Tags Descriptions Comments and Headers To save the active logic program 1 Click amp the Toolbar or select Save Program from the File menu Ctrl S Result The Save dialog box appears Figure 3 11 agers c ms Seve s Compete Program BU p Fs a B Uu E BNE EINE a iE H Spec Saye Saye pons
341. nt 0 32767 IR Bit Address X Y C B TD Word Address Form A N Constant Only 1 256 Move Image Register to Word MIRW The Move Image Register to Word MIRW instruction copies a specified number of bits from the discrete image register or the control relay memory locations to a designated word memory location Up to 16 bits can be copied in a single scan When power is passed to the input of a MIRW the instruction is executed The operation of the MIRW is defined as follows Up to 16 bits are copied beginning with the lowers numbered address which is specified by IR The bits are moved into the work memory location specified by A beginning with the LSB of the word If fewer than 16 bits are moved the remaining bits are set to 0 bits are copied during a single scan Q The output is turned on when the instruction is executed MIRW Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 IR Bit Address X Y C B Word Address Form B N Constant Only 1 16 273 Move Byte Word Element MOVE The Move Element MOVE instruction copies data bytes word or long words from a source location to a destination location When the input is turned on the MOVE instruction is executed The operation of the MOVE is described as follows The elements are specified in TS are copied to the destination specified by TD Q The output is turned on after the instruction is executed unless an error occurs
342. nt out of the particular network header and ladder that is selected If Page None is selected there will be no page break between the current network and last network printed Page Odd prints the current selected network on the next odd page Page Before prints the current selected network on the next blank page Type in your header Select OK when you re finished To see network headers in the active logic program select Program Setup from the Options menu Select the Logic tab Then General from the drop down box and check Show Headers Header ENSE C1 Header _ None E gt 5 THIS B THE DER FOR NET JNE IT CAN L TE HEADER WINDOW CAN BE TURNED ON OFFIN THE PROG RA MS THROUGH OPTIONS ON THE MENU BAR UNIQUE HEADER BE ATTACHED TO EACH NETWORK Figure 7 3 SF Header 505 WorkShop provides a simple way to document SF while you are creating or editing your SF program The maximum number of characters you can enter for each header 15 16K Double click the SF Header Input icon in the active logic program window The Network Header Input dialog box is displayed see Figure 7 5 Type in your header Select OK when you re finished Figure 7 4 Function Header JUE DER F R SPECIA L FUNC N NUMBER 1 YOU CAN H 16 000 CHA R YOU Ci AN ALSO HAVE HEADER FOR EACH SPECIA L FUNC PROGRAM OR SUBROUTINE Figure 7 5
343. nted right justified in a six character field with a floating minus sign Real numbers are printed right justified in a twelve character field using FORTRAN G12 5 format Example PRINT PORT 1 MESSAGE THE VALUES ARE WX5 V104 Time Entries are used to print out a variable in time format The variable is printed out as hh mm ss Time entries are indicated by following the address of the variable EL or EXP with TIME Example PRINT PORT 1 MESSAGE THE TIME IS NOW STW141 TIME Date Entries are used to print out a variable in date format The variable is printed out as yy mm dd Date entries are indicated by following the address of the variable EL or EXP with DATE Example PRINT PORT 1 MESSAGE THE DATE IS NOW STW141 DATE 339 Variable Text Entries are used to print out text stored in either V or memory Variable Text Entries are indicated by following the address of the text EL or EXP to be printed with a percent sign 95 and the number of characters to be printed If the number is coded as zero PRINT assumes that the first word of the indicated variable contains the number of characters to print Example PRINT PORT 1 MESSAGE BOILER V2509616 DESCRIPTION V102 0 Boiler V250 16 causes the 16 characters in V Memory locations 250 257 to be printed Each word contains two 8 bit characters Description V102960 causes the number of characters specified in V102 to be printed If V102 contains 5 then the charac
344. o saved if the Enable Reset input is on and a loss of power occurs provided the controller battery backup is enabled Ifthe Enable Reset input is turned off the timer is reset to the preset time specified in Preset Q The output is turned on when the timer reached zero and it stays on until the timer is reset the Enable Reset input is turned off 249 Timer On Delay TMR Parameter Valid Parameter TMR 1 SEC TIMER Type Types FRESET Timer Constant Varies with configured 5 5 OUTPUT nu mber Preset OnlyConstant ranges0000 0 to Only 3276 7 STATUS Do not use same reference number more than once for timer counter up down counter and discrete motor control alarm timer instructions Using the same reference number can cause unpredictable operations 001 s Timer TMRF The Timer instruction TMR is used to time events The timer output is turned on after the timer has timed down making this an on delay timer A slow timer is denoted by a fast timer by TMRF The timer times down from the preset value specified by Preset The Preset value is stored in the TCP memory The timers current time is stored in the TCC memory area Timers have the following properties The Enable Reset must be on for the timer to operate When the Start Stop input is on and the Enable Reset is on the timer begins to time down Q Timing begins at the preset value Preset and continues down t
345. o zero Ifthe Start Stop input turns off and the Enable Reset input remains on the timer stops but it saves the current value TCC If the Start Stop input turns on again the timer resumes timing TCC is also saved if the Enable Reset input is on and a loss of power occurs provided the controller battery backup is enabled Ifthe Enable Reset input is turned off the timer is reset to the preset time specified in Preset The output is turned on when the timer reached zero and it stays on until the timer is reset the Enable Reset input is turned off 250 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Retentive Timer On Delay f TMR Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Timer number Constant Only Varies with configured T C ranges Preset Constant Only 0000 0 to 32 767 Do not use the same reference number more than once for timer counter up down counter and discrete motor control alarm timer instructions Using the same reference number can cause unpredictable operations Up Counter The Counter instruction CTR an up counter counts recurring events The counter output is turned on after the counter has counted up to a preset value The counter counts up to the preset value specified in Preset which is stored in the TCP memory The current count is stored in TCC memory The counter has these properties The Enable Reset must be on for the counter to operate When Enable Reset is ON the counter
346. od of time You can guarantee a soak period by entering a deadband value This form of soaking ensures that the process variable is within a specified deadband around the setpoint for a specified period of time The end step terminates a ramp soak profile When the program reaches an end step the loop remains in automatic mode and holds the setpoint constant You can program a status bit for each step of the ramp soak This bit is set to 1 when the loop is executing this step It is reset when the loop leaves the step This allows for easy tracking in the RLL program 191 Controlling the Ramp Soak Operation Ramp Soak operation can be controlled by two methods allowing the profile to be executed automatically or by writing values to the variables that control ramp soak Automatic Whenever the loop changes from manual to automatic mode the loop begins to execute the ramp soak profile at the initial step Step 1 The loop continues to execute the profile until an end step is encountered in the profile At this point the loop remains in automatic mode and the setpoint is held at the last value in the profile Using Ramp Soak Number Each loop ramp soak profile has a corresponding 16 bit variable LRSN that contains the current step You can monitor LRSN with a SF program and also write a step number to it with a SF program The ramp soak profile changes to the step that is currently contained in LRSN Note that the step number is zero
347. oelect a New Configuration File screen appears Figure 0 10 Enter a file name or select a name using the drop down arrow in the Look in field Select a New Configuration File Look ir AOS SoftShop f Files of type Device configuration files cfa Cancel Figure 0 10 2 206 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Q Existing File Open an Existing Configuration File Opens an existing file The list contains the Most Recently Used MRU configuration files read from the registry similar to the MRU list of files from the File menu Select More Files to browse for other existing configuration files The database file must include at least four fields address tag descrip and comment in order If these fields are not found a documentation mapping dialog appears to map user fields to FasTrak fields described above A tag is synonymous with a Workshop symbol and a description is synonymous with a Workshop label Every device configured must have a corresponding documentation file Adding Devices 1 To add a device click Add Device from the Device Source Configuration screen Result The Add Device screen appears Figure 0 11 Add Device Device Name Cancel Communications Setup com Help Server KOSS Documentation Setup File Path E Adevice2 mdb 1 Be read every k minute s Figure 0
348. olicy who will have access permission The following affects both the areas of Access and Launch For Custom security for Launch and Access Permissions follow these steps While in the Properties dialog with the Security tab being active click on Edit Q Click Add and choose the Administrator Choose the Identity tab and click the this user radio button See Figure 5 14f below Browse and select the Administrator Click OK to return to the main dialog Finally click the Default Properties tab and choose connect for Default Authentication and impersonate for Default Impersonation See Figure 5 140 below If the server is on a remote machine then for the client step 7 from above needs only be repeated Configuring DCOM for Windows XP Configuring DCOM under Windows XP begins with launching the application dcomcnfg exe from a DOS prompt or the Run dialog just as in the previous instructions The following dialog launches Component Services Pot M Component Services ql Event Veron Local iliconconer E Even Services Local du Services Loca Figure 5 14b Using the tree structure in the left most pane expand the selection of Component services to Computer and then to My Computer as shown in the dialog window below 381 Component Services Distributed Transaction C Lj Running Processes Eit
349. olumn cannot be deleted unless it is empty Data Window While working in the Data Window you can use Delete to clear all rows or one row at a time Delete is accessed through the Edit menu 49 505 Programming Software for Windows Insert Logic Logic Use Insert to insert a selected object network instruction row or column at the point of the current cursor position Access Insert from the Edit menu using the Logic Editor in either offline or online mode To insert an object 1 Select Insert from the Edit menu Result The Insert dialog box appears Figure 3 26 2 Click on the object you want to insert 3 Click OK or press Enter Figure 3 26 Ladder Insert Editor Offline Item Function Network Address Adds a new network before the current network or address where the cursor is positioned Row Line Adds a new row is before the row where the cursor is positioned If box instructions prevent insertion an error message appears Column Adds a new column before the column where the cursor is positioned If box instructions prevent insertion an error message appears Editor Online Insert is accessed in the same manner online as offline However only a network or column can be inserted while working online Item Function Network With the cursor positioned at a network Insert places a new network before the current network Column A new column is inserted before the column where the cursor
350. ommands described in detail in the following paragraphs can be accessed several ways 43 Cut 505 Programming Software for Windows To use the cut feature 1 3 Select the information you want to cut by highlighting the range instructions or networks addresses of SF lines to be cut Click and hold down the left mouse button on the item or network or SF lines to be cut then drag the mouse to the end of the item range or network or SF lines to cut Cut your selection to the clipboard with one of the following on toolbar f Address 4 44 Cut from Edit menu NOTE the start and ending networks addresses or SF lines are known then the cut from and cut to range can be entered directly into the Cut Range dialog box If a partial network is selected the Cut Range dialog box is not displayed The items selected are cut without warning Network Figure 3 20 Select OK Result The range of networks addresses or SF lines displayed are cut out of the program and placed into the clipboard FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop To use copy feature 1 Select the information you want to copy by highlighting the range instructions or networks addresses or SF lines to be copied 2 Click and hold down the left mouse button on the item or network or SF lines to be copied then drag the mouse to the end of the item range or network or SF
351. omputer on which the activity occurred and when available the name of the user who performed the activity Examples of particular Audit activities that may be recorded in the Activity Audit file include each time PLC WorkShop attaches online to PLC whenever logic is changed in the ladder program and PLC memory configuration is modified Activity Audits can be written to Microsoft Access files Structured Query Language SQL files or the Windows Activity Log when the FT Security Server is running on an accessible computer For more on the Ft Security Server please see Chapter 5 of this manual Activity Audits written to Microsoft Access and SQL files may be read with many popular viewers Audits written to the Windows Activity Logs may be read with the Windows Event Viewer which is found in the Windows NT 2000 XP Administrative Tools menu The Activity Audit feature may be used in conjunction with Password Security but can used independently from security oetup Select the Activity Audit Setup item of the Options menu as illustrated below to setup the activity audit Figure 22 1a If security is not enabled the Activity Audit Setup option is not protected and any user can access this feature When security is enabled WorkShop determines under which operating system it is running If WorkShop is running under Windows 95 98 ME the Password Required dialog below appears 351 Please enii vou
352. on the Open Program dialog box Result The Share Address Documentation dialog box appears Enter the share address documentation program name in the Shared File and Path line or select Browse to locate an existing file Click Next and enter the refresh rate time lag between updates from other users of the database Valid times are from 1 to 1440 minutes Click Next and Finish In the Program Type area select Offline or Connect to PLC If you select Connect to PLC you can use the previously saved communication port or select a new communication port by clicking the Setup button If you select Connect to PLC you can check other options such as Logic to PLC Transfers all blocks and data areas to the PLC and loads documentation NOTE To avoid overwriting the online ladder with the version stored on file and associating documentation with the online ladder do not select Transfer Logic to PLC O Read All NOPs Reads 30 consecutive NOP instructions and assumes the end of program logic This can substantially increase the time to connect online to a 520 525 530 535 560 or 565 controller when selected NOTE If you select Read All NOPS and have more than 30 NOP instructions separating user logic all logic past the 30 NOPS will not be read Click OK or press Enter to open your program NOTE your controller is 575 refer to Connecting Online to a 575 in this chapter for information on selecting Application ID and
353. ons assigned to an I O module cannot cross I O channel boundaries See your controller manual for details 505 WorkShop does not flag duplicate I O points Accessing I O Configuration 1 Select PLC Configuration from the Options menu Result The PLC Configuration dialog box appears Figure 5 2 NOTE You can Enable or Disable a base by highlighting the desired base number in the display screen then clicking on the Enable or Disable button 1 Select the 505 I O button under configuration on the PLC Configuration dialog box Result The Configuration dialog box appears Figure 5 5 1 0 Configuration x Channel 1 Enable Figure 5 5 84 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop I O Configuring Procedure 2 Use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight the desired base number on the I O Configuration dialog box to edit or configure 3 Then select the Edit Base button on the I O Configuration dialog box Result The Edit I O Base dialog box appears Figure 5 6 Edit 1720 Base Figure 5 6 NOTE If you need to select a different Base number you can do so by clicking on the Next Base or Prev Base button on the Edit Base dialog box You can also click on the Search Base button on the Edit Base dialog box and enter a different base number NOTE The individual module can be displayed with its associated Slot number Tag and Description by choosing the
354. onverts binary coded decimal to BCD inputs to a binary representation of the equivalent integer e BCD Input is the memory location of the BCD word to be converted Valid Descriptor is Integer Address address containing an integer value e g V100 or WX77 or V100 2 e Binary Result is the memory location of the integer value after conversion Valid Descriptors are Integer Address address containing an integer value e g V100 or W X77 or V100 2 and Writeable Address e g WY1000 or V23 C55 BCDBIN Operation The operation of BCDBIN is described below and illustrated in Figure 9 1 Each time the BCDBIN statement executes the four digits of the BCD value located in the address specified by A are converted to the binary representation of the equivalent integer value The result is stored in the address specified by B BCDBIHztok Tab BCD Input 01 0 TabzBinary result 17 1 contains BCD value 4193 entered fram a thumbwheel oleo tjt e o 1 o 1 contains binary 4 1 3 3 representation of integer 4193 a faf jo ojo o o 1 jo afafa Pc B 1471 1 Figure 9 1 Example of BCDBIN Operation 311 Convert Binary Inputs BCD The Convert Binary Inputs to BCD statement converts the binary representation of an integer to the equivalent Binary Coded Decimal BCD value Values up to 9999 are converted to equivalent BCD values Binary Input Resul
355. operator interface The PACKAA format is shown in Figure 7 35 To From T able H Table Address Alarm Mumber Figure 11 35 PACKAA Format A specifies whether you are writing data to or from the table B specifies the address of the table to or from which data are moved C specifies the number of the analog alarm to be accessed C may range from 1 to the maximum number of alarms D specifies the analog alarm variables Up to eight variables can be designated See Table 7 10 for a list of the analog alarm variables Parameters Mnemonic Variable Name Mnemonic Variable Name AACK Acknowledge APV Process Variable AADB Deadband APVH Process Variable High Limit ACF C Flags 32 bits Process Variable Low Limit ACFH Most Significant ARCA Rate of Change Word of C Flags Alarm Limit ACFL Least Significant ASP Set Point Word of C Flags AERR Error ASPH Set Point High Limit AHA High Alarm Limit ASPL Set Point Low Limit AHHA High High Alarm ATS Sample Rate Limit ALA Low Alarm Limit AVF V Flags ALLA Low Low Alarm AYDA Yellow Deviation Limit Alarm Limit AODA Orange Deviation Alarm Limit Variables with an asterisk can be either a real number or an integer Variables followed by a period are real numbers Variables not followed by a period are integers When you execute PACKAA using real numbers two memory locations are allocated for each real number 330 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop
356. or the output 179 PID Documentation 505 WorkShop provides a simple way to document PID Loops while you are creating or editing loops The maximum number of characters you can enter for each header is 16K 1 To Document a PID Loop Click on PID Loop from the View menu or Alt V P The PID Loop Directory dialog box appears Figure 9 1a The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Loop number 1 64 Loop Title and Enable Disable state 2 Select the PID Loop number that you want to document by using the left mouse button or the Arrow keys on the keyboard Click on the dialog box Document button or use the keyboard to Tab to the document button and press Enter or Alt O The following dialog box appears Figure 9 1 1 Figure 9 11 180 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Programming PID Loop The PID Loop Editor gives you the ability to display access and or modify PID Loops To access the PID Loop Editor 1 2 Click PID Loop from View menu The PID Loop Directory dialog box appears Figure 9 1 The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Loop number 1 512 depending on the processor type Loop Title and Enable Disable state PID Loop Directory Loop Offline Close En Dis Edi Enahled Bamp 5nak Heater Enabled Smari une Enabled Delete Copy Documentation PLC Ops S Memory Available 3514 Figure 9 1a Select the
357. ort address form is shown in Figure 7 40 LSH 1 z 5 5 T 98 a 132 d3 d 15 16 5 o jojo jojo o ojoo ojojojojojojo S Step type 0 ramp step 1 soak step Point lt tok_Tab 0 0096 control relay C etoh Tabsetoh O 96 output r Offset same as point number Figure 11 40 Address Format Short Form For example the encoded address for Y23 using the short form is shown in Figure 11 41 MSH LSH 13 14 15 1 2 3 5 T a tice 8 0 0 0 0 0 110 1 3 e Te T e e 5 Ramp Fop Point 110 CY output Offset 017 Hex 23 Figure 11 41 Short Form Address Example The long address form is shown in Figure 11 42 LSH 1 ii i2 13 14 15 1 3 4 5 T a o One m 5 Step type D ramp step 1 soak step Point ztok 0 0096 control relay C th Tabs 36 output an Number number L Page size P EI set offset within a ME Offset Point number 11 modulo Page size 1 Page size 312 for control relays C 1024 for output points Figure 11 42 Address Format Long Form 335 For example the encoded address for C514 using long form is shown in Figure 11 43 LSH i 11 12 14 15 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 09 ajia eee Gi Ot Or ee eo
358. ot been configured the Fast PLC Connection Setup window automatically displays before continuing Connecting to a PLC using Fast PLC Connection does not load any documentation or tag information If you need to load documentation or tags use Open Program 69 505 Programming Software for Windows Printer Setup Use Print Setup to select a printer and determine where and how your printouts appear To access the Print Setup l otart or open a logic program Select Print Setup from the File menu Result The Print Setup dialog box appears Depending on which printer you want to use choose either Default printer or Specific printer If you select Specific Printer choose a printer or device from the drop down box Additional setup options may be available depending on the printer you selected If an Options button is available click it and another dialog box appears Make your selections and select the OK button to return to the Print Setup dialog box Other options in the Print Setup dialog box include Orientation and Paper Source Click the desired settings Click OK in the Print Setup dialog box to save your settings and return to the active logic window NOTE The print setup options can also be accessed from the Print box that appears after selecting Print from the File menu Page Setup Use Page Setup to select page margins starting page number and whether to include a Title page in your printout To access th
359. ot use UTP but the cabling medium is IEEE 802 3 compliant you can purchase a transceiver that connects the media to the AUI port on the module Consult the SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP2572 User Manual for information about how to connect cables to the 10bT or AUI port of your module Consult the Siemens IK 10 catalog for information about how to purchase a oiemens transceiver if you need to use it with the AUI port Testing the Connection with PING Once the board has been configured you can test the settings by using a DOS command line utility called PING comes with the TCP IP stack The program sends several test messages to the IP address that you specify on the command line For example PING 201 98 1 8 will test the connection to 505 TCP IP 1 shown above There should be four successful replies to the PING command If PING is not successful there is a problem with the network settings or the 505 TCP IP board configuration If PING does not work 505 WorkShop will not be able to connect to the PLC After PING has successful replies you can configure a TCP IP connection in 505 WorkShop and open an online window TCP IP Communication Settings To configure your interface board port for communication with a PLC 65 505 Programming Software for Windows 1 From the Communications Setup dialog box click the TCP IP button Result The Settings for the TCP IP Setup dialog box appear Figure 4 7
360. ove instruction For example if you configure a Move Word To Table 1 MWTT1 do not configure a Move Word From Table 1 MWFT1 Assigning the same reference number to more than one table move instruction could cause unpredictable operation by the controller which could result in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Do not use the same reference number more than once for a table move instruction This memory type consists of one word per table move instruction configured This word is used to maintain the current count of moves done since the MWTT or MWFT instruction was last reset One Shot Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for the operation of the various instructions of the One Shot group including the following O One Shot O Time Set O Date Set When you assign a number One Shot instruction be Warning sure that you do not use that number for any other One Shot instruction type For example do not configure more than one OS11 Assigning the same number for more than one One Shot instruction type can cause unpredictable operation by the controller which could result in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Do not use the same number more than once for the same instruction type e g use it only once in One Shot in Timer Set etc This memory type consists of one byte per configured One Shot instruction This byte is
361. over the desired logic 2 Select Clear from the Edit menu or press the Delete key Result The Clear dialog box appears Figure 3 24 3 Click the items you want to clear 4 Click OK or press Enter Result The selected items are cleared Figure 3 24 Ladder Clear The following table describes the clearing items Item Function Ladder Removes all networks addresses from the block displayed Network 5 all logic from the network at the cursor position Instruction This option is available if the cursor is positioned at an instruction When cleared the instruction is removed however attached branches are not affected Branch This option is available if there is a branch to the right of the instruction with the cursor Clearing removes the branch to the right of the cursor ROW This option is available when an instruction is selected Clearing removes instructions from the row where the cursor is positioned Branches in this row are cleared only if the resulting logic contains branches unconnected to logic at one or both ends Column This option is available when an instruction is selected Clearing removes instructions and branches from the current column Logic Editor Online Using Clear in the Logic Editor while online works the same as in offline mode However row and column cannot be cleared while online Data Window While working in the Data Window you can use Clear to clear all rows or one row
362. ow 5 End Address 400003 Increment 1 After Apply is selected and the data window is modified the Fill dialog will have the following values Start Address 400004 Start Row 8 End Address 400006 Increment 1 239 Editing Features Cut Copy and Paste Cut Copy and Pastes can be performed on trend window rows a variety of different ways The menu items can be found under the main Edit menu along with hot keys Alternative hotkeys shift delete ctrl insert and shift insert are supported for Cut Copy and Paste respectively Toolbar items are also provided for all three features Trend window rows can be cut from one trend window and pasted into another across applications provided that the trend window s servers match Cut Copy and Paste will observe highlighted rows similar to excel Highlighting trend window rows is also similar to excel with the exception of column highlighting Select The Select All menu item under the main Edit menu can be used to unconditionally highlight all the rows in the active trend window Features such as delete format size on off cut copy and paste can be performed on the entire trend window Trend Status Window The trend status window shown below lists successful and failed logs as well as any miscellaneous errors that may occur while attempting to trend data dependant upon setup criteria for all trend windows that are currently trending data If no online trend
363. password in the Password edit box Verify the password by entering it again in the Verify password edit box In the PLC Password Alias group box enter the password alias in the Alias edit box Verify the alias by entering it again in the Verify alias edit box When all four edit boxes have been entered click OK The Password and Verify password entries are compared to ensure they match The Alias and Verify alias entries are also compared to ensure they match Finally the Alias is compared to the password aliases already on file Since the each password alias may be associated with only one PLC password aliases cannot be duplicated If the entered alias is found in the list an error message appears and the entered PLC Password PLC Password Alias pair is not saved But when the entered password and alias are approved this new PLC Password PLC Password Alias pair is added to the list and return to the PLC Password Alias dialog 151 To edit a PLC Password PLC Password Alias pair highlight the desired pair in the list box and click the Edit button Alternately double click a PLC Password PLC Password Alias pair in the list box The PLC password and PLC password alias selected from the list box appear in the Edit PLC Password Alias dialog below Edit Password Alias Password Password Verify password Password Alias Alias Verify alias
364. pond to the upper range of the input span Process Variable Bipolar oelect YES or NO to specify analog inputs as bipolar or not Bipolar inputs span have spans of 5 to 5 volts or 10 to 10 volts Square Root of Process Variable oelect Yes if the input for the process variable is from a device such as an orifice meter that requires a square root calculation to determine the correct value to use Monitor Low Low High High Select Yes to have the controller monitor the Low Low High High Alarm otherwise select No The Low Low High High can be entered as values requiring critical action Monitor Low High Select Yes to have the controller monitor the Low High Alarm otherwise select No The Low High Alarm can be entered as values requiring remedial action Process Variable Alarm Low Low Enter a real number in engineering units must be less than or equal to low alarm value and greater than or equal to low range of Process Variable Process Variable Alarm Low Enter a real number in engineering units must be less than or equal to high alarm value of Process Variable Process Variable Alarm High Enter a real number in engineering units must be less than or equal to high high alarm value of Process Variable Process Variable Alarm High High Enter real number in engineering units must be greater than or equal to high alarm value and less than or equal to high range of Process Variable Monitor Remote Setpoint To hav
365. put 1 4 H NOTE Do not assign the same reference number more than once for the One Shot instruction You can use the same reference number in a One Shot in another instruction in the One Shot group because they use different bits of one byte to store the previous state Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types 05 Constant A valid reference number 1 1025 246 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop The is an output instruction used to represent a field device or internal memory location that needs to be controlled Use a normal coil when your application requires the referenced address to equal ON 1 when the coil has power flow When the network logic passed power to the coil the coil turns on and the address equals 1 When the network does not pass power to the coil the coil remains OFF 0 and the address equals O C1 Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Coil Bit Address Form Coil Not The NOT coil is used similarly like the normal coil but if the referenced address equals OFF 0 the coil has power flow When the network logic does not pass power to the NOT coil the coil remains energized and the reference address equals ON 1 When the network logic passes power flow to the NOT coil the coil is de energized and the referenced address equals OFF 0 mt 5 Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Coil Not Bit Address Form C Immediate Coil The Immediate coil is used similarly like the normal co
366. put oscillation as the controller continues to eliminate the error When the PID gains are set appropriately the resulting process variable curve would take on the ideal curve appearance as shown in Figure 9 9 Figure 9 9 Ideal Process Variable Curve Many factors affect the process variable curve These factors may take the process beyond where the controller can create the ideal curve It is the function of the PID omarTune utility to determine the optimum PID gain values to achieve a response as close to the ideal curve as possible Essentially the SmarTune utility creates a disturbance by initiating a step increase of the PID output Process variable samples are collected as this increase in output precipitates a change in the process variable When the sample period is complete the data collection is analyzed for time lag gradient overshoot steady state error and oscillation Using a frequency analysis method the optimum PID gain values are determined You can choose to accept the newly calculated gain values or keep the present PID gain settings The SmarTune variable parameters are listed and described in this section Start Variable is the only variable that must be specified It names a discrete variable used to activate a SmarTune session The others may be null Variable parameters provide the coupling between a PLC program and SmarTune If only otart Variable is specified no program coupling is needed a session begin
367. r Cancel Help Figure 0 27 The Error Types list box will hold all the error situations in which a response can be pre programmed Error situations include communication timeouts device errors trend database file errors and status file errors The Error Responses group box will list all the possible responses for the item that s currently highlighted in the Error Types list box If no items are checked in the group box no action will be taken when the corresponding error situation arises The text in bottom right corner will give a more detailed description of the error response for the error type that s highlighted 242 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Documentation Once a device is configured you can specify a database file to hold and sort all documentation Multiple users can simultaneously modify documentation for the same device so regular updates can be scheduled to get the latest documentation within the database One documentation file is available for each device Documentation can be imported from comma or tab separated text files into an existing documentation database file by selecting File amp Import Documentation from the menu The Import Documentation window appears Figure 0 1 Import Documentation x Text File source Browse Documentation File destination fe CONTROLSHOPSE atch mdb Server Delimiter OSS Comma Tab Mame
368. r Shared An Exclusive lock signals other application programs that the resource is unavailable for reading or writing A shared lock signals other application programs that the resource locations are available for reading only The LOCK instruction does not specify the G memory locations that are protected nor does the LOCK actually prevent an application from reading or writing to these memory locations You should write your programs so that the G memory locations are protected when you gain control of aLOCK When you program an exclusive lock no other application program can acquire control of the lock When you program a shared lock more than one application program can acquire control of the lock Use these capabilities in programs that update the shared resource protected by the lock In order to use a lock properly follow these steps AA and AA 1 must be initialized to O prior to the first time When the input is on the application attempts to acquire the lock If the lock is not available the application continues to attempt acquisition of the lock until the lock is acquired or the specified time out has expired A value of 0 for T results in a single attempt to obtain the lock A value of 3276 7 indicates that the application should try until it obtains the lock or the scan watchdog fatal error occurs If an application obtains the lock before the time out expires the output is turned and the scan continues If t
369. r later 2000 or XP Two applications get installed to a user selected directory on the local machine These files are FTSecCfg exe and FTSecSvr exe If running Windows FTSecSvr exe can only be installed on the Professional version not on the Home version Regardless of what Operating System the user has they still must install the server FTSecSvr exe locally on the client machine as well as on the remote machine This is true even if the client machine is a non NT type machine By default all checkable items get installed including FTSecSvr exe under NT Security Server and FISecCfg exe under NT Security Configurator If installing to Win9x or NT oecurity Configurator is not listed and therefore FTSecCfg exe does not get installed Installing to a Local Machine If the user wishes to install the Security Server locally this may be achieved by installing from off of CD or from a self extracting executable file available from FasTrak s Website http www fast soft com A CD installation requires only that all items for security be checked during the InstallShield process If a client software application has been previously installed and it supports NT Security then re inserting the installation CD or running the self extracting executable and un checking the client during the InstallShield process is all that is required Installing to a Remote Machine Installation begins with the installation of the client ie PLC Wor
370. r sicusto name and H ame only pessan C Figure 22 16 This dialog verifies the entered Name and Password those of an administrator Only an Administrator is allowed to Edit Enable Audits when security is enabled If the entries are those of an administrator the Activity Audit Setup dialog below appears Activity Audit Setup Dialog If the current computer is running under Windows NT 2000 XP PLC WorkShop determines if the user logged into the operating system is an administrator If the user is an administrator the Activity Audit Setup dialog below appears If security is enabled but the user logged into the operating system is not an administrator access is not granted to the Activity Audit Setup dialog There are two types of Auditing available to the user 1 FasTrak Auditing allows for audits to be written to a database file 2 NT Activity Auditing requires the FTSecSer exe application to be installed See Chapter 5 of this manual Activity Fut Setup xj Enabl Acii Audi Figure 22 2a 352 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Check the Enable Activity Audit check box to select Auditing Then choose the method by which audit records are written Enab Acsi Audi ashes d m database Them suit sa a database e wach can be read vah mar popula Pe and
371. rak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Profibus DP I O Configuration To configure used on the PROFIBUS DP channel for your Series 505 system you must use two configuration utilities The first utility you use is COM PROFIBUS that allows you to perform the following tasks oelect a master and host thereby determining communication parameters Configure and parameterize the I O slaves including any 505 PROFIBUS DP RBCs that you wish to use the PROFIBUS DP 1 channel Save your configuration This file should be archived in case you want to make configuration changes at a later time Export your configuration to a binary file 505 WorkShop uses information from this binary file to perform further configuration If you need to add or delete slaves or modules or modify bus parameters later you must use COM PROFIBUS to modify the configuration file and adjust the necessary information before exporting and merging it into 505 WorkShop again The second program you use is 505 WorkShop 505 WorkShop allows you to perform the following tasks Use the Merge function to import information from the binary that you created with COM PROFIBUS Assign or modify starting I O addresses for the modules of all PROFIBUS DP slaves used by your Series 505 CPU Load bus parameters and slaves Toggle between operate and stop mode and between synchronous and asynchronous communications
372. ram were not saved do you wish to continue with the clear memory procedure Click Yes to clear the memory FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Selecting 575 Application When you configure a 575 controller offline you must first select the application 1 Select PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu The PLC Configuration dialog box appears Figure 5 2 2 Select the ReqApp button under the Processor Information window on the PLC Configuration dialog box The Required Application dialog box appears Figure 6 15 You can change the Application ID only during offline configuration Configuring the controller online displays the current application Figure 6 15 The following fields display information about applications Only the IDs listed in the REQUIRED or OPTIONAL fields are valid for use as G memory parameters in your RLL program APPLICATION ID displays the ID of the current application REQUIRED APPLICATIONS displays a listing of the application IDs needed for the current application to complete a process Q OPTIONAL APPLICATIONS displays a listing of the application IDs that are not required but may be present MODE LOCKED TO displays a listing of the application IDs that must transition to RUN mode at the same time Connecting online displays the current application ID configuration After modifying the configuration click OK to enter the new configuration relationships 155
373. rations listed in Table 11 6 Functions within a group are equivalent in precedence Execution takes place from left to right For example in the operation X Y Z X is multiplied by Y and the result is divided by Z A subexpression enclosed in parentheses is evaluated before surrounding operators are applied e g in X Y Z the sum of X Y is multiplied by Z Parentheses constants and subscript variables are allowed in the expressions You can use only integers in an IMATH statement Mixed mode operation integer and real numbers is not supported Denote a binary number by the prefix OB e g 0B10111 a hexadecimal number by the prefix OH e g OH7FFF The programming device checks to see if a statement is valid as you enter the statement and reports an error by placing the cursor in the field where the error occurs Table 11 6 Order of Precedence for IMATH Operators Highest Precedence Intrinsic function ABS 1 NOT Negation NOT Multiplication Division MOD MOD Addition Subtraction Shift left Shift right lt lt gt gt Relational Operators gt 1 amp Logical AND 1 Logical OR 1 Lowest Precedence Assignment 1 Supported by PowerMath CPUs only 323 Operation The statement Figure 11 23 allows filtering to be done an analog variable This procedure calculates an output based on an input and the speci
374. rce Unforce and Find except Find Address Setting Up the UNILINK HOST Adapter To communicate with 505 WorkShop the UNILINK Host Adapter must conform to the following parameters QO NITP protocol Q Full duplex Asynchronous QO Maximum Host Baud Rate 19 200 See your UNILINK Host Adapter User Manual for details on setting dip switches for the UNILINK Host Adapter TIWAY Setup Configuration 1 From the Communications Setup dialog box click the TIWAY button Result The TIWAY Setup dialog box appears Figure 4 4 Figure 4 4 61 505 Programming Software for Windows Secondary Addresses 1 62 From the TIWAY Setup screen dialog box click the ADD button to enter a new controller secondary address or the Modify button to change the controller secondary address information Result The TIWAY Path dialog box appears Figure 4 5 TIWAY Path sexes ow Figure 4 5 enter the controller secondary address for the associated controller A controller secondary address is a unique number from 1 to 254 that is used to identify a controller on the TIWAY link Each PLC on TIWAY has a controller secondary address Enter the controller secondary address Path Description A Path Description is a 32 character alphanumeric description for the controller secondary address Click OK or press Enter to accept the settings Click Cancel to disregard changes and return to the TIWAY Setup dialog box Fas
375. re 0 15 Delete Devices Server HOSS Cancel Device Names Select All Figure 0 35 Select a server from which you wish to delete a device Select a name in the Device Names field to delete devices Click Select All and OK to delete all the devices for a selected server 209 Creating Log Window To create a new Log Window perform the following steps l Launch FTLogger 2 Click the Toolbar or select New Program from the File menu T Hew Log Window Logs heet Server URS Path EScontrolshopALOGT mdb Figure 0 2 Enter a unique name up to 128 characters for the new Logger Window spreadsheet in the Name field select the appropriate communications server see appendix for listing of sever device associations The default path appears in the Log File Path field Enter a path if different from the default Click the radio button Online to select the device port Hesult Communication is established as soon as the addresses are inserted in the log window Until addresses are entered into the log window the server is not actually online Once the log window is created pause logs online by selecting Mode Pause Logging By remaining online there is a significant speed increase because the port remains open and the addresses logged remain in the server 7 Click the Setup button
376. refer to words as Wn where n the parameter number PGTS ward Bit parameter area 123458578 8310102131 41516 Word inputs Word outputs y When parameters are Other word dala specified reacd vvrite changed values are copied hack into appropriate memory areas i Figure 5 4 User External Subroutine Memory A block of memory within the controller may be allocated for storing externally developed programs written in C Pascal Assembly language etc This memory type is called User Memory U Memory The size of U Memory is user configurable 82 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Global Memory 575 Only The 575 CPU allocates a 32K word block of memory that allows you to transfer data over the VME back plane This memory type is called Global Memory G Memory Refer to Appendix of the processor manual for more information about G Memory VME Memory 575 Only The 575 controller also allows access to physical VME addresses using the VMM Memory or VMS Memory a corresponds to VME address modifier 39 standard non privileged data access VMS corresponds to VME address modifier 29 short non privileged access The 575 controller allows you to use a VME address VMM M or VMS as a parameter to most word oriented RLL arning instructions e g ADD SUB MOVW etc When a VME address is used and is not recognized by any installed board a VMEbus error occurs If the instruction that u
377. resultant bit is set to 1 Otherwise the resultant bit is set to O After a word in the table is compared the value contained by the index is incremented by one If both Enable and Reset remain on the source word and a word in the table are Ored each scan If the Enable turns off while the Reset is on the index holds its current value and the does not occur If the Reset turns off the index reset to 0 The WTTO output remains on until the last word in the table has been Ored with the source word It then turns off The WTTO must be reset after the output turns off in order to be executed again WTTO Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 WS Word Address Form A TS Word Address FormA TD Word Address Form B IN Word Address V W G N Constant Only 1 256 286 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 10 505 WorkShop Table Exclusive Or WTTXO The Word to Table Exclusive OR WTTXO instruction executes an Exclusive OR on each bit in a source word with the corresponding bit of a designated word in a table The results are placed in a destination table If the bits compared are the same the resultant bit is set to a 0 Otherwise the resultant bit is set to a 1 The WTTXO instruction is described below The Reset must be on for the instruction to be executed When the Enable turns on each bit of the source word WS and of the specified word in the table TS is compared
378. revious slave address in numerical decreasing order without going back to the Profibus DP I O dialog box The Edit I O Addr button allows you to change or program a slave s module s I O address QO The X 2WX button toggles the image register type for the selected module between discrete and word inputs To ensure that discrete are toggled to words the discrete must be on a 16 bit boundary QO The Y lt gt WY button toggles the image register type for the selected module between discrete and word outputs To ensure that discrete are toggled to words the discrete must be on a 16 bit boundary 91 505 Programming Software for Windows The Unify button moves all modules for the selected slave into the first module Unification is only allowed if all modules are either discrete or words Only the first address is retained The Compact button moves all discrete image register types to word image register types for every module of the selected slave It then unifies all the modules into the first module To ensure that discrete are toggled to words the discrete must be on a 16 bit boundary Only the first address is retained The Restore button restores modules for the selected slave according to the COM PROFIBUS configuration including the image register types Zero addresses are assumed for all but the first address which is kept Before entering your configuration be aware of the following restrictions d d For bit or
379. ricted cj Im Im Figure 6 2 6 Entera title for the program in the Program Title window The title is optional and can be left blank 7 Click Yes or No in the Continue On Error selection to have the program continue or stop when an error occurs 8 Select the Program Type from the Combo Box 104 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 10 11 12 13 505 WorkShop Enter the cycle time in seconds 0 5 6553 5 Check the Enable Program to allow exaction of the SF program You can also enable and disable the program from within the SF editor by clicking Shift F2 For the 555 1105 1106 and 575 2105 2106 CPUs the compile mode is selectable When compiled mode is selected the SF program or subroutine 15 translated to the native instruction set of the CPU s microprocessor The compiled code is then executed whenever the program or subroutine is scheduled for execution The advantages of compiled execution are Significant execution speed improvement For example MATH statement that adds two floating point values will execute in less than 10 us when compiled versus more than 100 us when executed by the SF interpreter Depending on the program s size and the placement of the target LABEL within the program a GOTO statement may take 1 ms or more when executed by the interpreter Compiled execution of a GOTO statement takes less than 1 microseconds no matter where in the program the LABEL is located This represents a 1 0
380. ritten to controller if controller supports password Only if controller supports password Yes Controller password is retained No Controller is password protected Yes Controller password is retained No Controller is password protected Yes Selected program on disk password is written to controller and enabled Comments Selected program on disk must have 5 0 format or greater There is no password for selected program on disk or in the controller Full access to controller and selected program on disk is allowed Full access to controller is allowed Some reads and no writes are allowed to selected program on disk Full access to controller and to selected program on disk is allowed Partial to full access to controller is allowed depending on access level Full access is allowed to selected program on disk Full access to selected program on disk and to controller is allowed Partial to full access to controller is allowed depending on access level Full access is allowed to selected program on disk Full access to controller is allowed Some reads and no writes are allowed to selected program on disk Partial to full access to controller is allowed depending on access level Some reads and no writes are allowed to selected program on disk FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop To invoke Password from Online or Offline 1 Click on Password from
381. rmi MN 176 188 Deviation Yellow co eti esu Ut eu ee MM Lo ELLE E 176 187 DIAG TOSUICS OTt Sed SP 134 135 136 137 138 Diaeuostics on Base ee aw eda eh ee 141 Dial Mode mi PR 58 87 89 Discrete Control Alarm 78 Discrete Control Alarm Timer 253 Dipa V E 215 Displayims Processor etd Us E MEI MEME LH LM EM EPIS 130 Displaying Processor Status a ee 131 DIY Pc 268 21 40 55 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 167 180 243 Documentation Window 21 55 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 in teneat doo eie 165 Ladder Head MNT TT a 157 P 180 PCMAG UU LE 40 TT CRM Trpo 158 5ymbols and Dabels ood 21 55 159 160 161 162 163
382. rogrammed step is the last step having an event programmed or having a non zero CNT preset value The event must be on and DCC must be zero If the event goes off after DCC reaches zero the drum output remains on and the MDRMW remains at the last programmed step until the drum is reset When the Enable Reset turns off the drum output is turned off and the drum returns to the step specified In DSP Q If the Start input turns off and the Enable Reset remains on the drum remains at the current step and DCC holds its current count All bits specified in the configurable mask maintain the condition specified by the fixed mask When the drum is at the Preset step the bits specified in the configurable mask follows the states specified by the fixed mask for that step even if the Enable Reset input is off You should program the mask with a bit pattern that is a safe state for the Preset step The drum advances to the next step immediately if the Jog input transitions from off to on and the Enable Reset input is also on The configurable mask is specified for each step by a memory location in the mask field of the instruction The configurable mask is located in 16 consecutive memory locations The first location corresponds to step 1 of the drum the second to step 2 etc The mask is defined as being configurable because you can change the mask by writing data to the memory locations MDRMW Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Drum Cons
383. rol right click on the Users folder to add users and or groups 378 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Configuring User Rights and Audit Policy Correctly configuring specific user rights and audit policy on the server machine is essential for proper security and for the server to operate correctly The following user rights need to be configured Access this computer from the network Enter all users groups that will need to access this computer from the network These users will represent the server s clients that need to request security clearance Deny access to this computer from the network Make sure that any user groups that are listed in the above right are not listed here Q Generate security audits A user with administrative rights should be added here This should be the same user that the server is launched under See DCOM in the Centralized Security Server Server Configuration of this manual This right should be configured even if security audits are not used This Administrator will be referenced later in this manual in the section dealing with DCOM Manage auditing and security log A user with administrative rights should be added here This should be the same user that the server is launched under See DCOM in the Centralized Security Server Server Configuration portion of this manual This right should be configured even if the logs are not used Note this is the same Administrator as mentioned in the
384. rovided using the controller s proportional integral derivative PID loop functions illustrated in Figure 9 1 When you program a loop you can set the same eight alarm types used by analog alarms and described in Chapter 8 High high alarm point on the process variable PV High alarm point on the PV Low alarm point on the PV Low low alarm point on the PV Yellow deviation alarm point referenced to the setpoint SP Orange deviation alarm point referenced to the SP Rate of change alarm for a PV changing too rapidly Broken transmitter for a PV outside the designated valid range w Orange w Yellow w Yellow 4 m 7 w Orange lle w Broken transmitter w Rate of change Figure 9 1 Example of Loop Control The high high high low and low low alarms are fixed absolute alarms and may correspond to warnings and shutdown limits for the process equipment itself The yellow and orange deviation alarms move up and down with the setpoint and may refer to specification tolerances around the setpoint A PV alarm deadband is provided to minimize cycles in and out of alarm chattering that generate large numbers of messages when the PV hovers near one of the alarm limits An option is also available to call a Special Function Program to initiate a special function calculation The SF program call can be scheduled on the PV the SP
385. rrupted by a cyclic RLL task Q Task 8 is executed with a higher priority than Task 1 or Task 2 Therefore both the normal RLL and the cyclic RLL are interrupted by a configured I O interrupt Ifyou specify the cycle time T for a Task 2 task as a readable word you can change the cycle time on a cycle by cycle basis When T 0 the default time of 10 ms is used When the normal RLL task fails to complete executed within the specified cycle time Bit 1 is set in STW219 and Bit 14 is set in STW1 the next Task 1 scan When the cyclic RLL task fails to completed execution within the specified cycle time Bit 2 is set in STW219 on the next Task 2 scan When a cyclic task overruns the cycle on which the overrun 15 detected is skipped Q You can display the peak execution times for a task using the Data Window and specifying TPET1 or Task 1 or TPET2 for Task 2 You can call any subroutine from a task and the normal subroutine nesting rules apply A given subroutine should be called from only one task Subroutines are not re entrant and subroutine execution initiated by a second task TASK Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Task Number Constant Only 1 2 8 T Word Const Form A Const 0 32767 301 Special Instructions Immediate Read Write IORW The Immediate Read Write IORW instruction allows you to perform an immediate read or write to a discrete or word I O module on the local base For inputs the data transfer is d
386. rt 3 are automatically reserved for the operation of the statement and make up the header of the shift register Register Start Integer Writeable Address NOTE Do not write data to the header fields The shift register does not operate correctly if any of these fields is modified by an external action These fields may be redefined in future software releases Output is the output address to which the words are moved Output Integer Writeable Address Register Length is the length of the table If a constant is used it must be greater than 0 Register Length Integer Address or value Status Bit is the status bit and can be or Y The bit specified by Status Bit is turned on when the register is full The bit Status 1 is automatically reserved as a second status bit The Bit specified by Status Bit 1 is automatically reserved as a second status bit The bit specified by Status Bit 1 is turned on when the register is empty Status Bit Bit Writeable Element Operation of the FTSR OUT FTSR OUT is used in conjunction with a FTSR IN you must use the same corresponding values for register start register length and status bit in the two FTSR statements Starting address Register Start determines the memory area in which the shift register is located The first word of user data is located in address Register Start 4 The four words Register Start through Register Start 3 are automatically re
387. rwise the resultant bit is set to O TAND Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 T1 Word Address Form A T2 Word Address Form A TD Word Address Form B N Constant Only 1 256 Table to Table Or TOR The Table to Table OR TOR instruction ORs the corresponding bits in two tables and places the results in a specified third table If either bit is 1 then the resultant bit is set to 1 Otherwise the resultant bit is set to O The TOR operation is described as follows When the input is on a comparison is made between each bit of the each word in the first T1 and the second T2 tables Each pair of bits is Ored and the resultant bit is placed in the third table TD If either bit is 1 then the resultant bit is set to 1 Otherwise the resultant bit is set to O Q The bits in all the word of the two tables are Ored each scan Q The output is turned on when the instruction is executed TOR Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 T1 Word Address Form A T2 Word Address Form A TD Word Address Form B N Constant Only 1 256 281 Table to Table Exclusive Or The Table to Table Exclusive OR TXOR instruction executes an Exclusive OR on the corresponding bits in two tables and places the results in a specified third table If the bits compared are the same the resultant bit is set to a O If the bits compared are different the resultant bit is
388. ry 1 Registers Figure 3 19b 42 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Editing Features 505 WorkShop uses a number of timesaving editing features to help you complete your programming tasks These include a Cut O Undo Copy Clear Q Paste Delete O Paste With Rewire Insert The most frequently used editing features are Cut Copy and Paste Use these commands to quickly copy logic and documentation to either another location in the same program or another program The list below describes Cut Copy and Paste differences Window Feature Function Cut Removes the selection from the program and places it on the clipboard Copy Copies the selection and places it on the clipboard Paste Inserts clipboard contents into the program at the cursor location Paste With Inserts clipboard contents into the program at the cursor location and Rewire allows the user to re address any addressable items contained in the clipboard Undo Resets the networks addresses in a segment to their original data The clipboard referred to is the standard Windows clipboard Refer to your Windows User s Guide for more information To select the information you want to cut or copy click hold and drag the pointer over the desired area Selected items are highlighted with a different color than your normal workspace color If you want to select all logic in the current window select Select All from the Edit menu Each of three editing c
389. s Form A Parameter B Word Address Constant Form or Const 32768 32767 Parameter R Word Address Form B Subtract SUB The Subtract instruction SUB subtracts a signed integer in memory location B from a signed integer in memory location A and stores the result in memory location C When the input has power the instruction is executed The operation executed is C 2 A B If the result is less than or equal 32767 or greater than or equal to 32767 the output is turned on Otherwise the output is turned off and the truncated 16 bit result is stored in R SUB Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 A Word Const Form A or Const 32768 32767 B Word Const Form A or Const 32768 32767 R Word Address Form B Multiply MUL The Multiply MUL instruction multiplies a signed integer in location A by a signed integer in location B The product is stored in on long word R and R When power is passed to the input of the MUL the instruction is executed The MUL operates as follows The values in A and B are not affected by the operation When the multiplication is executed the output is turned on MULT Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 A Word Address Form A B Word Constant Form A or Constant 32768 32767 R Word Add Form B 267 Divide DIV The Divide Instruction DIV divides a 32 bit signed word integer stored in A and 1 by a 16
390. s a Re read check box is included along with a time increment When this is checked the database will be re read and the tags and descriptions will be modified in the trend windows to reflect any changes in the database This can create a short wait time depending on how many tags are in the database Select the Comm Setup button to initialize vendor specific device settings as shown below for Siemens 505 Communication Setup x Communications Response sec Dial Modem Modem Baud Telephone Dialing Moe iz Modern Force TES Initialization Command Humber to Dial Use TWAT NO MHIUAHIL Address 0 Maximum Secondary 254 Secondary Figure 0 15 227 When is selected from the Add Device dialog the configuration is sent to the server and a connection is made to the doc database file for reading and writing If the database you are connecting to does not match specifications i e there is a mismatch between table name or field names then a dialog will be displayed to map specific fields so that the software knows where various types of documentation reside This dialog is shown below Documentation Database Mapping for nomatch mdb x The Table name andor Field settings are different from our standard Please enter the correct mappings T able M ames Field Names
391. s check box to print the entire range loops To print a selection deselect the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box To include loop headers with the printout click the Headers check box 1 Click the Doc Font button to change the Header font in the active program Result The Font dialog box appears 2 Choose a new font font style or font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 3 Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to cancel changes Result The Print Loops dialog box appears 36 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Print Alarms Click the Alarms check box from the Print dialog box to print the following All Alarms Alarms and Headers To change the Alarms properties click the Alarms button on the Print dialog box The Print Alarms dialog box appears Figure 3 15 Ent Alarms Figure 3 15 Click the All Alarms check box to print the entire range of alarms To print a selection deselect the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box To include loop headers with the printout click the Headers check box 1 Click the Doc Font button to change the Header font in the active program Result The Font dialog box appears 2 Choose a font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 3 Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to cancel changes Result The Alarms dialog box appears Print PLC Configuration
392. s clipboard contents into the program at the cursor location and Rewire allows the user to re address any addressable items contained in the Cut clipboard You can also copy tags and descriptions To use the cut feature 1 LE 5r Copy Select the information you want to cut You can cut parts of a network all of a network or multiple networks Cut your selection to the clipboard with one of the following Click on the toolbar Select Cut from the Edit menu Press Ctrl X To use the copy feature l Ooo 108 Select the information you want to cut You can cut parts of a network all of a network or multiple networks Copy your selection onto the clipboard with one of the following Click amp on the toolbar Select Copy from the Edit menu Press Ctrl C FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Paste 505 WorkShop To access the paste feature 1 2 Move cursor to the desired location Paste clipboard contents into the new location with one of the following Click amp on the toolbar Select Paste from the Edit menu Press Ctrl V NOTE When pasting clipboard contents are inserted before existing items For example if you are pasting a network and the cursor is positioned at Network 2 click paste and the clipboard contents become Network 2 The previous Network 2 becomes Network 3 Paste With Rewire Paste With Rewire allows you to past the contents of the clipboard and
393. s sorted with groups listed first followed by users A group is identified with the two person icon to the left while the user is identified with the one person icon A combination of around 16 users and groups can be configured for an application 387 Setting Permissions The lower list box in the right pane reflects the access rights and audits for individual permissions based on the highlighted name in the Users and Groups list box When the Allow box is checked the user or group will be given access by the server when requested from the client PLCWorkMod for example When the Deny box is checked the user or group will be denied access by the server when requested from the client In cases where a user has conflicting rights on a permission the denied permission will always take precedence and the user will not be able to access the feature one such example would be a user is allowed access to a specific permission but a group they belong to is denied access to the same permission If neither box is checked the user will not be granted access to the feature unless one of the groups they belong to has access to the feature Security Audits oecurity audits for individual features can be performed on user and groups by selecting the Audit Success and or Audit Failure boxes These audits will appear in the security log on the server machine and can be accessed using Microsoft s Event Viewer See the topic entitled Event Viewer or
394. s that is entered here will apply to the device in the Device Name column of the same row if one exists If a device is not listed in the Device Name column the address entered will apply to the device that is listed as the current device on the status bar Entering an address will cause an update of all other columns It is possible to enter a range of addresses by using the fill format equations below Address count increment format Address1 Address2 increment format 236 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Devices must added to edit this field Tags will be stored in database files containing addresses and their corresponding descriptions When a key is hit in this column or the user clicks in this column an auto searching floating combo box control will be displayed containing all the tags for the device indicated on the status bar if an empty row or entered in the Device Name column A tag can be assigned to an address by first entering the address in the Address column Next activate the tag combo box and type in a unique tag Selecting the enter or tab key or by clicking outside the combo box will enter the tag into the database and associate the new tag to the address listed in the same row A tag can be successfully deleted by activating the tag combo box removing all the text then entering the info by one of the methods described above Editing a tag will cause an update of all other columns
395. s turned on IF CF turns on before the timer times down but then goes off again while the DCAT input is off CA is turned on The is turned off if CF turns ON again NOTE f both OF and CF are simultaneously ON the OA and CA turn on T E DCAT Parameter Valid Parameter Types DIS CTRLALSAM TIMER T Lay ype OUTPUT Alarm Constant Only Varies with T C configured STATUS Number Constant Only range Delay Bit Addr 0000 1 3276 7 OF Bit Addr X Y C B 2 Bit Address Address Y C B 253 Use the following table for state changes Input Condition Feedback AND Timer Action Alarm Status Output 9 1 0 timing jojo 0 _ 9 0 0 mg jojo 0 _ s ome 9 e fo fol 9 LX f foem Timed Out Timer has timed a full preset value of time without a sensor closing Reset Timer is at preset value and not timing Unexpected alarm conditions may occur when the DCAT exists within the zone of control of JMP or MCR The DCAT output and alarms are under the control of the JMP or MCR 254 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Motor Control Alarm Timer MCAT The Motor Control Alarm Timer MCAT instruction is designed for use with a double input double feedback device The MCAT operates similarly to the DCAT instruction but the MCAT provides the ability to operate motor driven devices that drive in opposite direction You can use the MC
396. s when Start Variable becomes true and ends with a loop changing back to its previous mode and SP Since coupling is done with variables any program type may be used to monitor and control SmarTune relay ladder logic SFPGM or SFSUB Table 9 3 lists the variable parameters used by SmarTune The following paragraphs describe the parameters Table 9 3 Variable Parameters Name Type Allowable Variable Types Start Variable discrete XYCWXWY V Abort Variable discrete XYCWXWY V Ack Variable discrete YCWYV SmarTune Restart discrete XYCWXWY V 196 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Status Variable WY V PIN Variable Word WX WY V Previous Mode Word V Previous SP Real V Previous Output Word V Previous Gain Real V Previous Reset V Previous Rate Real V Calculated Real V Calculated Reset Real V Calculated Rate Real V Start Variable Abort Variable Ack Variable These three discrete variables allow easy activation deactivation via an RLL program as shown in Figure 9 10 StartVariable REST AbortV anable Figure 9 10Example of Activation Deactivation of Auto Tuning Process These variables could just as easily be manipulated with IF IMATH or MATH statements in an SFPGM or SFSUB Allowed discrete variables include bits in a V memory word When Start Variable transitions from a false to true a SmarTune session is activated When Abort Variable is true a SmarTune session is deactiv
397. s with T C configured ranges Time Constant Only time 0000 1 3276 7 Bit Address open feedback X Y C B CF Bit Address closed feedback Bit Address open alarm Y C B CA Bit Address closed alarm Y C B OO Bit Address open output Y C B CO Bit Address close output Do not use the same reference number more than once for timer counter up down counter and discrete motor control alarm timer instructions Using the same reference number can cause unpredictable operations 256 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Time Driven Drum DRUM The Drum Instruction DRUM simulates an electromechanical stepper switch or drum It provides 15 output coils and 26 steps which are operated on multiples of the time base setup for the drum Each step controls all 15 output coils When the drum begins to run it starts at the step specified by the Drum Step Preset which is stored in DSP memory The drum current step is stored DSC memory The counts per step set in the Count Step field is stored in L memory and cannot be changed without reprogramming the DRUM The current count counts remaining for a step is stored in DCC memory The drum has these features The drum is enabled when the Enable Reset input is ON When the Enable Reset is on and the Start input turns on the drum begins to run The drum begins at the step specified by DSP and remains at this step until DCC counts down to
398. same reference number more than once for timer counter up down counter and discrete motor control alarm timer instructions Using the same reference number can cause unpredictable operations 260 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Maskable Event Drum Drum Word MDRMW The Maskable Event Drum Word MDRMW instruction operates similarly to the event drum but the MDRMW writes the date to a word instead of to individual coils The MDRMW also is capable of specifying a configurable mask for each step The allows the selection of the bits in the work to be changed by the fixed mask in each MDRMW step When the drum begins to run it starts at the step specified by the Drum Step Preset which is stored in DSP memory The current step is stored in DSC memory The counts per step set in the CNT field is stored in DCP memory The current count is stored in DCC memory The MDRMW has the following operations The drum is enabled when the Enable Reset input is on When the Enable Reset is on and the Start input turns of the drum begins to run The drum begins at the step specified by DSO and advances to the next step based on operation of the timer and or event When the drum advances a step individual bits of the output word are turned on off based on the fixed mask and the current bit pattern in the configurable mask The drum output comes on and remains on after the last programmed step has been executed The last p
399. scription and comment to the tag Adjusts the size of the ladder grid Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 7 and 24 Determines the number of character rows displayed for each description Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 and 12 Determines the number of character rows displayed for each tag Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 and 4 Allows the use of certain TISOFT function keys to be used in windows Such as coils Y C WY V G W contacts X Y C WX WY V K G W N gt I lt U Ctrl U J U Determines the line thickness of the ladder status line Settings are between 1 and 6 Description Determines the width allocated for display of Special Function instructions on each line Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 and FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Column Column Two Data Window Tab Column Display Include Address Column Display Include Tags Column Display Include Descriptions Column Display Include Time otamp Column Display Include Status Tag Descriptions Tip Display Include Address Maximum Rows Include Documentation Window Tab Column Display Sort Order Colors Item Table 4 1 505 WorkShop 80 Determines the width allocated for display of SF first column variables after the instruction Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 and 300 Determines
400. se instructions are often used when duplication of outputs is required and those outputs are controlled by different logic These instructions can be used to decrease scan time since the interactions between any active SKP and LBL instructions are not executed The SKP and LBL support the following features The SKP LBL instruction must be used together The LBL must appear before the instruction that terminates the current program segment TASK END RTN A SKP without a LBL generates a compile error If you use RLL subroutines you can use up to 255 SKP LBL instructions within each subroutine and up to 255 SKP LBL instructions for each TASK segment in the program The reference numbers for the SKP LBL instruction range from 1 to 255 and numbers cannot be duplicated within a given subroutine or TASK segment The subroutine set distance from the main RLL program and reference numbers used in the subroutine can also be used in the main program That is SKP23 is the main program does not interfere with a SKP23 in the subroutine When the SKP receiver power flow all ladder logic between the SKP and its associated LBL is ignored by the controller Output between the SKP and the LBL are frozen in their current states All ladder logic within the SJP zone of control is executed normally when the SKP does not have power flow Fora SKP to LBL function located within the zone of control of an MCR or JMP the SKP or LBL fun
401. sed the address was other than MOVE or XSUB with the U Memory header s E bit set to 1 see Appendix H in the Programming Reference Manual the controller enters the Fatal Error mode freezes analog outputs and clears discrete outputs Use the XSUB or MOVE instruction to access the VME address 83 505 Programming Software for Windows Configuration Controller Functionality in Configuration Keep in mind that while you can configure I O either online with the controller or offline programming device only functional differences exist between the two modes When online you can perform those functions that require interfacing with the controller For instance you must be online to write your I O configuration to the controller or to read the configuration of a base from the base itself Configurations saved offline go to the selected program on disk I O Configuration Guidelines Before entering your I O configuration be sure that the I O points you select conform to the following guidelines number for the I O address must begin on an 8 point boundary An 8 point boundary is n 8 1 e g 1 9 17 etc Addresses not starting on an 8 point boundary are changed to do so when you write the values Refer to the I O module manual for the number of bit and or word points required for each module Valid entries for modules with more than 8 points are even numbers from 2 through 28 32 and 64 Locati
402. served for the operation of the shift register Register Start contains the Count which equals the current number of entries in the shift register Register Start 1 contains the Index which acts like a pointer to indicate the next available location of the shift register into which a word can be shifted When the Index equals zero the next available location is Register Start 4 when the Index equals one the next available location is Register Start 5 and so on Register Start 2 contains the length which equals the maximum size of the shift register in words Register Start 3 contains the Checkword The checkword is used internally to indicate whether the FTSR has been initialized Output is the output address into which the words are moved 318 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop The register length Register Length determines the size of the shift register The register length depends upon the memory location that you choose and how much memory you allocated if the memory is user configurable Status Bit is the status bit and can be C or Y The bit specified by Status Bit turns on to indicate that the register is full The bit Status Bit 1 is automatically reserved as a second status bit and turns on whenever the shift register is empty Use the same status bits for the FTSR OUT that you use for the FTSR IN FTSR IN sets Status Bit when the register is full FTSR OUT clears this bit as the function execu
403. servers The configured devices will be saved to the configuration file below when saving the current project This message appears when devices are attached to the server and a log window is opened One or more devices must be configured for server name gt before any addresses tags can be entered into the active trend window This message appears when no devices are attached to the server and a new log window is opened Configured Devices Lists the configured devices for all the servers If a new configuration file is selected no devices are available Q Configuration File Change the configuration file at any time by clicking on the Select button to bring up the Select Configuration File Figure 0 9 All the configured devices are saved here when selecting Save or Save As from the File menu 205 Select Configuration File Mew File Create a Mew Configuration File New Configuration Filename LSWD RKSH P PR BREAMSS amp FTEfgl cfg Browse an Existing Configuration File LSCONTR ULSH PSFTLCEI cfg C PROGRAM FILES FTCEfal cfg Figure 0 9 The Select Configuration File screen allows you to create a new configuration file or open an existing file New File Create a New Configuration File Opens a new file New Configuration Filename The path for the configuration file defaults to the same path as the executable Modify the new file or path by clicking the Browse button The
404. sk 10 Task 3 M Task 11 Task 4 I Task 12 Task 5 Task 13 Task 6 Task 14 Task 7 Task 15 Task 8 M Task 16 Figure 6 12dd Click in the task number radial box to include a task in the scan followed by clicking OK to saves the task box selection Click Single Scan on the Diagnostics menu Alt Q to execute single scan according to the single scan task configuration FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop You can display the Software number and release number while online by 1 Click PLC RBC Part Number from the PLC Utilities menu Alt U R 2 The RBC software number s and release numbers are displayed in the format shown in Figure 6 12b 3 Click Close to exit the RBC Part Number box and return to the active logic program 2596626 0401 4 0 1 Beta 1 Figure 6 12b 139 5 Task Codes Per Scan is used to the number of task codes processed per scan for SF modules on each channel To invoke the function Im pA Task Codes Per 5can Click Task Codes Per Scan from the PLC Utilities menu Alt U A The Task Codes Per Scan dialog box is displayed in the format shown in Figure 6 12c Only numbers for the channels you have configured are displayed e g if you have four channels the number goes to 4 Type in the data field the number of task codes for SF modules per scan C
405. specifies whether you are writing data to or from the table B specifies the address of the table to or from which data are moved C specifies the loop number whose ramp soak profile is involved in the pack operation D specifies the number of ramp soak steps to pack E specifies the starting step in the ramp soak profile at which the pack operation will begin PACKRS Operation The number of steps in a ramp soak profile is established when it is programmed using TISOFT or your programming package The PACKRS instruction cannot expand shorten the ramp soak profile for a given loop This instruction can only read or modify existing steps in a preexisting profile PACKRS instructions that specify operations on non existent profile steps are invalid and the execution of this instruction terminates If TO Table is specified this instruction copies the specified number of steps from the ramp soak profile of a given loop starting at the specified step number to a table in memory whose starting address is indicated in the instruction If FROM Table is specified this instruction copies the specified number of profile steps from a memory table into the ramp soak profile for the indicated loop starting at the specified step number The new step values overwrite the affected step values in the profile NOTE Care should be taken when using the PACKRS instruction with a FROM Table specified If the ramp soak profile being modifi
406. splayed in the static box on the bottom If a new configuration file is selected this window will show nothing under Configured Devices You can change the configuration file at any time by clicking on the Select button to bring up the Select Configuration File dialog shown below All the configured devices will get saved here when you attempt a Save or Save As from the File menu 225 Select Configuration File Mew File Create a Mew Configuration File New Configuration Filename Browse an Existing Configuration File UIT CIEL C PROGRAM 4 Cancel Help Figure 0 12 Within the Select Configuration File dialog you can create a new configuration file or open up an existing one If no configuration files exist the New File radio button will be checked and the edit box within this group will hold a default configuration path and file The path for the configuration file will default to the same path as the executable You can modify the new file and or path by editing this manually or select a new path and or file by clicking on the Browse button to bring up common file dialog displayed below Select a New Configuration File Look ir AOS SoftShop fe Files of type Device configuration files E Figure 0 13 The list box within the E
407. sses in a program by viewing the Cross Reference table 1 Position the cursor over the instruction address to cross reference Select Network Cross Reference from the View menu The Network Cross Reference window appears see Figure 6 9 If you have more than one program loaded the information displayed is for the program in the active window NOTE Only validated and entered logic is considered part of the current program Thus logic not entered and validated will not show in the Cross Reference Table See Validate and Enter Logic in this chapter 000001 7 000001 7 000001 4 000001 THA Figure 6 9 2 The complete address information appears in the Ladder Network Cross Reference Item box NOTE To get a complete Cross Heference list including tags and descriptions use the Cross Reference feature in Print Refer to Print in Chapter 3 for more information 3 Scroll through the list of addresses in the Cross Reference dialog box and pick the instruction address of the logic you want to view more closely 4 Click the Goto button to jump to the logic of the first occurrence of the address you have highlighted 5 Close the Cross Reference window by double clicking on the Control menu box in the upper right corner of the Cross Reference window Address Used To show if specific elements are used in your program you can build an element usage listing The following element types can be shown in the Ladder
408. ssor SUAUUS 5585s pees ota cob ai aces 131 PrFOlDUS M EE ME EUM 3 8 25 32 37 68 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 98 PONDUS Maca DU abd M 93 Profibus DP VO cep ase ae 87 Profibus DP VO Conlpuratoli onte nies nde ro a RM e bina URS 67 Prostrani se UD es t 3 15 55 120 121 126 157 158 159 160 165 ASSIM XAOUECSSES zerra aai ttu 55 165 5616 SY TD OS We 55 165 LADER ER m I 55 Ladder Grid LEVE 55 SE Display UEE 55 et uti M SUE Nn A 55 us anced sa 35 Programming EEPROMIS 33 nte cia taper a sind 135 Proerammine o ho a b d a cs EMI Ld ed 96 Programmime PID DOO i T 181 Port LOCKO0ULE oct e orat dou e in pus Oe a VEM DE 135 R BS POSE AUC Oni iet doom a tesa edd pa tet iom din 189 AMINO SOAK zer aec m a 184 189 190 191 192 193 Ramp Soak for SP d Em 184 Rate Derivauve TIM toi it abes a aan DU cesset ad assa eve tarte uus 186 Rate of Change
409. st The dialog controls for a new user are set as illustrated below administrator jn TE p oe rine Pres Em Save Figure 14 8 User names can be up to twenty characters long Passwords can be up to fourteen characters long Valid characters for both fields are aloha numerics and the other keyboard entered characters 95 etc Enter the user name then enter and re enter the password All privileges are initially checked for new users Check uncheck the privileges appropriate for the user Security administrators can create other security administrators Check the Security Administrator box to grant the new user all administrator rights and privileges Click Save Settings The list of existing users is checked to assure the new user name is not a duplicate If the new user name is unique the two password entries are compared Finally the new user name is added to the User List box 369 Editing Users There are two ways to select an existing user to edit Either double click a user name from the User List box or highlight a user name in the User List box and click the Edit User button By default Retain existing password is checked and the password edit boxes are disabled This allows the security administrator to modify privileges without needing to re enter the user identity information the user name and password To change the user name typ
410. sted below Log Window Setup Log Times Log Data Display Time Stamp rLogaing Methods Periodic H 1 Deadband Percent Event Set Event Read data in the log window and log data to the log database t periodic interval ir Logging Options Log only when data changes Go offline when idle Log File Path C controlshop log1 mdb Cancel Apply Help Figure 0 20 Within this dialog you can configure how the server reads the data and updates the cache which will dictate how data is logged 232 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Trending methods The Periodic method will update the cache in time intervals specified in edit box The combo box list four time units msec sec min and hour Minimum value is 0 updates as quickly as possible and maximum value is 24 hours Deadband is a data variation value or a percentage of a data variation if checked Each data value from the addresses in the trend window will be compared with the deadband value If a particular value fluctuates by the deadband amount or the server will update the cache for that data item Deadband will then be compared with the updated value for that particular item Event will only cause an update if the event created in Set Event is true The Set Event dialog is below Set Event Event Address Event Hange
411. struction is enabled When the input also turns on the following can occur A word is copied from the memory location specified by A to the table memory location specified by the value contained in pointer B Pointer B which holds the destination memory location in the table fro the next word is incremented by 1 If the input remains on one word is copied every scan As each word is copied the table pointer is incremented until N words have been copied The output is turned on when the last word has been copied When the instruction is reset all value in the table remain unchanged MWTT Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Table Number Constant Varies with Table Move configured range Word V W G B Word Addr 5 Word Addr V N Constant 1 256 Do not use the same reference number more than once for the MWTT and MWFT instruction Assigning the same reference number can cause unpredictable machine operation 277 Move Word with Index MWI The Move Word with Index MWI instruction allows you to copy up to 256 words from one area of V memory to another area of V memory during a single scan When power is passed to the input the instruction is executed The MWI has the following features A table of up to 256 memory locations having a starting index specified in is copied The copied words are placed in a destination table in memory beginning at the start index specified in B
412. subroutine 291 Go to Subroutine GTS The Go to Subroutine GTS allows you to write RLL programs preceded by a subroutine number and call them to be used where they are needed A reference number is entered to designate the subroutine number When power is passed to the input of the GTS instruction the RLL program calls the subroutine indicated by the reference number If there is no power flow to the GTS instruction the subroutine is not called When online it is important to create the subroutine and all arning of the instructions required to define a subroutine END RTN SBR GTS PGTS PGTSZ BEFORE placing the processor in RUN mode If you enter a call to a subroutine that does not exist unpredictable PLC results may occur GTS Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference number Constant Subroutine number 1 255 292 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Call Subroutine SBR The Subroutine SBR instruction is used before a set of RLL instructions the RLL subroutine to be executed only when they are called by the GTS PGTS or PGTSZ instruction When subroutine is called it executes until either a conditional RTN with power flow or an unconditional RTN is encountered When this occurs RLL execution returns to the instruction following the calling GTS PGTS or PGTSZ instruction Subroutines have the following features Place all subroutines at the end of the main RLL program Separat
413. t Binary Input is the memory location of the BCD word to be converted Valid Descriptor is Integer Address address containing an integer value e g V100 or W X77 or V100 2 BCD Result is the memory location of the integer value after conversion Valid Descriptors are Integer Address address containing an integer value e g V100 or WXT77 or V100 2 and Writeable Address e g WY1000 or V23 C55 BINBCD Operation The operation of BINBCD is described below and illustrated in Figure 9 2 Each time the BINBCD statement executes the integer located in the address specified by A is converted to BCD Q An error occurs if the input value contained in is less than zero or greater than 9999 The BCD value is stored the address specified by B contains BCD 1234 Wr contains binary 1 2 3 4 T 0 oh Dolo ANTT B Vr Figure 9 2 Example of BINBCD Operation 312 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Subroutine The statement calls an Special Function subroutine for execution Up to five parameters may be passed to the subroutine by the Call statement SFSub is the number of the SF subroutine to be called and ranges from 1 to 1023 Valid Descriptor is Literal Integer constant P1isa value or constant to be passed between the SF subroutine that is called and SF program or the SF subroutine that cont
414. t a label at the beginning of the SF program or subroutine 338 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Printing 505 WorkShop The Print statement sends a message to the ASCII communication ports This statement can be used to print both text and the contents of integer and real variables The PRINT format is shown in Figure 11 46 pot Message is port number You must enter 1 in this field B contains a free format message The message begins on the line following the port and message designator fields Element addresses and Expressions are separated by a space No embedded space or the assignment operator in an expression is accepted PRINT Operation The operation of the PRINT statement is described below When the PRINT statement executes the message is sent to the port s specified The maximum message length is 1019 characters with characters counted in entries as follows Each text character 1 character Each variable entry 6 characters Each variable text entry 6 characters Carriage Return amp Linefeed 2 characters Text Entries contain ASCII text to be printed Text entries are enclosed in quotation marks Example PRINT PORT 1 MESSAGE END OF SHIFT REPORT Variable Entries print the contents of variables in either integer or real format Variables must be separated by spaces Real numbers are indicated by following the address with a period Integers are pri
415. t must be within the span of the process variable and it must be less than or equal to the orange deviation alarm Deviation Orange Alarm Enter values in engineering units for the setpoint deviation limits The deviation alarm bands are always centered around the target or setpoint i e the deviation alarm test is actually on the control error This value indicates the maximum allowable error SP PV that sets the orange alarm deviation alarm The orange deviation limit must be within the span of the process variable and it must be greater than or equal to the yellow deviation alarm Monitor Rate of Change To have the controller monitor the rate of change select Yes in the Monitor Deviation field otherwise select No Rate of Change Alarm Enter a value in engineering units for the rate of change alarm 176 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Monitor Broken Transmitter Alarm To have the controller monitor the Broken Transmitter Alarm select Yes in the Monitor Broken Transmitter Alarm field otherwise select No If you program the controller to monitor for the broken transmitter condition an alarm occurs if the raw process variable is outside the valid range designated for the Process Variable Valid ranges are Bipolar 32000 to 32000 0 offset 0 to 32000 20 offset 6400 to 32000 177 178 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 9 Loops Overview Process and batch control capability is p
416. t to ON 1 when the network passes power flow and the bit is updated immediately If the network does not have power the bit remains unchanged TT SETI2 Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types SETI Bit Address Y 248 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Reset Immediate RSTI The RSTI Immediate Coil is used to set a specified bit to OFF 0 when the network passes power flow and the bit is updated immediately If the network does not have power the bit remains unchanged XRSTI2 Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types RSTI Bit Address Y Timers Counters and Drums 1 s Timer The Timer instruction TMR is used to time events The timer output is turned on after the timer has timed down making this an on delay timer A slow timer is denoted by a fast timer by TMRF The timer times down from the preset value specified by Preset The Preset value is stored in the TCP memory The timers current time is stored in the TCC memory area Timers have the following properties The Enable Reset must be on for the timer to operate When the Start Stop input is on and the Enable Reset is on the timer begins to time down Q Timing begins at the preset value Preset and continues down to zero Ifthe Start Stop input turns off and the Enable Reset input remains on the timer stops but it saves the current value TCC If the Start Stop input turns on again the timer resumes timing TCC is als
417. tWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Max Time Max Time is a time in minutes When a SmarTune session is started a timer is set to this value If that timer expires before the session has completed the session is aborted with an error see Table 9 4 Noise Band When electrical signals are converted to values they vary randomly by insignificant amounts An insignificant amount is application dependent Noise Band gives a value in engineering units denoting the boundary between a significant and an insignificant change If a PV value differs from a prior value by a Noise Band or greater amount then a PV change has occurred Otherwise the PV is considered unchanged An incorrect Noise Band setting could cause some errors and warnings in Table 9 2 A correct setting may be calculated from hardware specifications or determined by experiment and observation or both Step Change omarTune works best with a PV change of about 7 Changing Mn proportional to the ratio between Step Change and PV span accomplish this change Step Change is specified in engineering units of the PV If a PV span is O to 60 degrees and Step Change is 5 degrees then Mn would be changed by about 2667 5 60 32000 Due to round off error the actual value might be slightly different This example is based on a Mn span of to 32000 If a 20 offset on output is selected for a loop a Mn change of about 2133 Mn span of 25600 would be accomplished See Table 9 2 for possible
418. tWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Monitor Rate of Change To have the controller monitor the rate of change select Yes in the Monitor Deviation field otherwise select No Rate of Change Loop Enter a value in engineering units for the rate of change Alarm in the Rate of Change Alarm field Monitor Broken Transmitter Alarm To have the controller monitor the Broken Transmitter Alarm select Yes in the Monitor Broken Transmitter Alarm field otherwise select No If you program the controller to monitor for the broken transmitter condition an Alarm occurs if the raw process variable is outside the valid range designated for the Process Variable Valid ranges are Q Bipolar 32000 to 32000 0 offset 0 to 32000 20 offset 6400 to 32000 R S Programmed The RAMP SOAK PROGRAMMED field is a read only field and contains an X YES or blank NO to indicate the creation of a ramp soak program for the loop To create a ramp soak profile for a loop exit the PID Loop Edit window and select the Ramp Soak button on the PID Loop Directory dialog box 189 Delete PID Loop 1 To Delete a PID Loop Click on PID Loop from the View menu or Alt V P The PID Loop Directory dialog box appears Figure 9 1a The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Loop number 1 64 Loop Title and Enable Disable state 2 Select the PID Loop number that you want to delete by using the left mouse button or the Arrow keys on the keyboard Click on the dia
419. tabase can reference a database created for another purpose as long as the fields are map able to our defaults A shared file can be created at user direction but once created is the responsibility of the user to delete To modify a shared documentation file select Shared Documentation setup from the Options menu 166 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Toggling the Display of Documentation Network headers and the Tag and Description portions of address documentation can be displayed in the Logic Window Any or all three of these pieces of documentation can be shown or hidden in the ladder logic Two methods may be used through the Program Setup within PLC WorkShop or via keyboard hotkeys Both methods are described in detail below Toggling display through Program Setup To specify what portions of documentation appear in the Logic Window select Program Setup from the Options menu below SoftShop 505 File Edit View Program Diagnostics PLC Utilities Window Help Frogram Setup ERA Lu e Q setup Shared setup Rela T C D Compare BitO ps d bad E E eter Meplay Security Figure 7 1 When the Program Setup dialog box below appears click the Logic tab to display the Logic Window settings Select General in the Options for combo box Logic Data windo
420. tags are to be cut with the address the Include Tags check box must be selected Eur Figure 7 7 2 Select OK and the selected range of addresses are cut out of the Documentation Window and placed into the clipboard Copy To use the copy features l 162 Click 3 on the toolbar or select Copy from the Edit menu and the Copy Range dialog box appears Enter the start and ending address to copy into the Copy Range dialog box from and to locations If tags are to be copied with the address the Include Tags check box must be selected Hande ES Figure 7 76 Select OK and the selected range of address are copied from the Documentation Window and placed into the clipboard FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Paste To access the paste feature 1 Click Jon the toolbar or select Paste from the Edit menu and the Paste Range dialog box appears Enter the start address to paste to in the Paste Range dialog box at location Figure 7 7 2 Select OK and the addresses in the clipboard are pasted into the Documentation Window starting with the at address Delete To delete an existing address tag description and comment 1 From the Edit menu select Delete Alt E D and the delete dialog box appears Delete Range pesas mo Figure 7 7d 2 Enter the start and ending addresses to be deleted into the Delete Range dialog box from and to locations 3 Sel
421. tant Only Varies with Drum configured ranges DES Constant Only 1 16 Ed Constant Only 00 001 32 676 vom Word Address V W G Mask Do not use the same reference number more than once for arning timer counter up down counter and discrete motor control alarm timer instructions Using the same reference number can cause unpredictable operations 261 Compare Instructions Equal To EQU EQU Parameter Type Type A WX WY V K TCP TCC W STW DSP DCP DSC B DCC Not Equal To NEQ EQU Parameter Type Type A WX WY V K TCP TCC W STW DSP DCP DSC B DCC Less Than LESS EQU Parameter Type Type A WX WY V K TCP TCC W STW DSP DCP DSC B DCC Less Than or Equal To LEQ EQU Parameter Type Type A WX WY V K TCP TCC W STW DSP DCP DSC B DCC Greater Than GTR EQU Parameter Type Type A WX WY V K TCP TCC W STW DSP DCP DSC B DCC Greater Than or Equal To GEQ EQU Parameter Type Type A WX WY V K TCP TCC W STW DSP DCP B DSC DCC 262 Valid Parameter Values INT or UINT 32768 to 32767 Valid Parameter Values INT or UINT 32768 to 32767 Valid Parameter Values INT or UINT 32768 to 32767 Valid Parameter Values INT or UINT 32768 to 32767 Valid Parameter Values INT or UINT 32768 to 32767 Valid Parameter Values INT or UINT 32768 to 32767 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop The Compare instruction
422. tasks If you use and RLL subroutine place an END instruction between the last network of the main RLL program and the first network of the subroutine 289 The ENDO instruction can terminate the program scan under specific conditions instruction after the ENDC instruction are not executed When the ENDC instruction is executed the current program scan is terminated ENDC operates in conjunction with an input and is executed only when there is power at the input When the input is off the ENDC instruction is not executed and the program scan is not terminated When the instruction is active ladder logic following the ENDC is not executed and outputs following the ENDC are frozen An active ENDC functions as an end statement for and JMPS that preceded it if it is in their zones of control Outputs between the MCR and JMP and the END remain under the control of the MCR or JMP For an ENDC contained within a SKP zone of control the ENDC is overridden if the SKP receives power flow Jump JMP The Jump instruction JMP is used to freeze the values of the discrete image register points of the controlled outputs in the JMPs zone of control The instruction can be used when you need to duplicate the outputs when the outputs are controlled by different logic The JMP operates as an output update enable instruction The JMP must have power flow and cannot be nested within the zone
423. tatement may be any of the SF program statements Label is the label and can range from 0 to 65535 Label Integer Literal constant When the SF program encounters the GOTO program execution continues at the LABEL specified by Label 320 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop IF Function The IF or IIF Integer IF statement is used for the conditional execution of statements and operates in conjunction with the ELSE and the ENDIF statements When an IF statement is used a THEN result is understood The IF format is shown in Figure 11 19 NOTE nteger IF operations are available only in CPUs that support PowerMath Condition Figure 11 19 IF Format The lt Sf statement gt may be any of the SF program statements Each time the IF executes the condition defined within the statement is tested If the expression is true non zero statements in the THEN section execute any statements in the ELSE section are skipped If the expression is false zero statements in the THEN section are skipped any statements in the ELSE section execute The expression can be any MATH expression See Table 11 5 for a list of the MATH functions The use of the assignment operator in an expression is optional The If statement operates in conjunction with the ENDIF statement and an optional ELSE statement The ENDIF indicates the end of an IF THEN ELSE structure If there is no ELSE statement the statements
424. te the function l 2 3 Click Hot Backup from the PLC Utilities menu Alt U H The Hot Backup dialog box is displayed with the status of the Hot Backup There are three status modes to select from while in the Hot Backup Standby to Offline Puts the standby unit in PROGRAM mode Standby to Online Puts the standby unit in RUN mode Q Switch Switches the roles of the active unit and standby unit Click Close to exit the Hot Backup and return to the active logic program 141 Password The password feature provides protection for areas of memory that are part of the program There are two passwords one for the selected program on disk and one for the controller They do not have to be the same NOTE You do not need to enter a password to go online However if the selected program on disk is protected you must enter a password to go offline A password value consists of 1 to 8 alohanumeric digits for example 0 9 or uppercase A Z Online you can be prompted for the password for the controller program and or for the selected program on disk Offline you are prompted for a password only for the selected program on disk The selected program on disk may be in one of two states of password protection No Password The selected program on disk is not protected Any authorized user may enter an initial password Disabled Password The selected program on disk is not protected Any authorized user may change or
425. ter D is the length of the table and must be a value greater than zero E is the address of the restart status bit and can be a C or Y SDT Operation The operation of the SDT statement is described below and illustrated in Figure1 1 51 o The SDT moves words from a pre existing table The size of the table depends upon the memory location that you choose and if the memory is user configurable how much memory you allocated Before the SDT is executed pointer C contains zero You must design your program to set the pointer to zero o Each time the SDT is executed the following actions occur The table pointer is incremented by 1 Then the word in the table location specified by the pointer is moved to the destination address specified by B The process is repeated until the number of words specified in D has been moved o When the last word has been moved the pointer is reset to zero o The restart bit E is on except for the following conditions When the SDT resets the pointer the restart bit turns off Prior to the first execution of the SDT the bit could be either off or on depending upon prior usage The value of the pointer does not change when the SDT is not executing All values in the table remain the same and destination address B contains the value of the last word moved from the table You can use other logic to reset the pointer to zero but the restart bit does not turn off
426. ters in V103 V105 are printed Variable Text Entries are a valuable tool for embedding control characters to be used by the device receiving the ASCII characters The next page gives instructions about how to embed a control character in variable text The form feed indicator FF is entered as lt FF gt Follow these steps Enter the double quote character Enter the less than character Enter the F character F Enter the F character F Enter the greater than character gt Oo fF N Enter the double quote character Example PRINT PORT 1 MESSAGE THERE IS A FORMFEED AFTER THIS lt FF gt To enter a lt CR gt lt LF gt Carriage return Linefeed follow these steps 1 Enter the double quote character 2 Press the carriage return key or 3 Enter the double quote character Example PRINT PORT 1 MESSAGE THERE IS A CARRIAGE RETURN LINEFEED AFTER THIS To print the double quotes precede it with another double quote as shown in the example below Example PRINT PORT 1 MESSAGE THIS QUOTED TEXT IS PRINTED INSIDE DOUBLE QUOTE 340 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Return from SF Program Subroutine The RETURN statement is used to terminate a SF program or a SF subroutine If invoked from a SF program the program terminates If invoked from a SF subroutine control returns to the statement in the SF program following the SF subroutine call The return format has
427. ters when the input to the PGTSZ is off When the input is turned on operation is identical to that of the PGTS If the input is turned off all discrete I O parameters are turned off and the subroutine is not called PGTSZ Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Program Number Constant 1 32 IN input Word Bit Form A Word Form C Bit 10 output 297 Read Slave Diagnostic RSD The Read Slave Diagnostic instruction transfers a PROFIBUS DP slave s diagnostic buffer to user memory Field Valid Function Values 1 112 Instruction reference number The number entered indicates the address of the PROFIBUS DP slave whose diagnostic is to be read Numbers can be repeated A Any Starting memory location for the destination writeable word N 1 256 Maximum number of words to be read See Table 6 3 The diagnostic buffer whose address in user memory is specified by A is formatted as shown below Word Byte Content A 0 otatus as follows 0 Transfer successful 1 Transfer successful A previous diagnostic was signaled and not read 2 Transfer failed The specified slave has not signaled a diagnostic 1 Length in bytes of actual diagnostic A 1 A N 1 Diagnostic area NOTE The length byte 1 of word A indicates the actual diagnostic length as signaled by the PROFIBUS DP slave the size N 1 2 of the destination buffer s diagnostic area is less than the actual diagnostic length the diagnostic is tr
428. tes FTSR OUT sets Status Bit 1 when the register is empty FTSR IN clears this bit If the shift register contains one or more words the Count equals the number of current entries The Index points to the next available location of the shift register into which a word can be moved Status bit Status Bit 1 is off Status bit Status Bit is on if the shift register is full When the FTSR OUT executes the following actions occur The oldest word in the shift register shifts into memory location Output The Count decrements by one The Index is unchanged and continues to point to the next available location into which a word can be moved Each time the FTSR OUT executes another word moves out of the shift register and the Count is decremented by one The Index remains unchanged After the shift register is empty the Index and Count contain zero otatus bit D turns off and status bit Status Bit 1 turns on If you attempt to shift a word out of an empty shift register an error is generated error 86 You can use FTSR OUT to remove words from the shift register before all locations are full You can use FTSR IN to shift more words into the shift register before all words are removed 319 Goto Function The GOTO statement continues program execution at a specified LABEL statement The GOTO and the LABEL statements are always used together The format of the two statements is shown in Figure 11 17 Figure 11 17 The SF s
429. th columns that can be sized in different methods Click and hold the left mouse button when between the columns Move the cursor to the right or left to increase or decrease the column Double click between the columns This action adjusts the left column to display the largest string within this column When no strings are displayed in the column no adjustment is made Row Each row represents a single address from a single device that is configured in the server from which the log window is connected Currently rows are not sizeable Device Name The device name changes the current device on the status bar Click in this column to start an auto search for all the device names for the log window server Select the device name when it appears Address The address corresponds to the device in the Device Name column of the same row If a device name is not listed the address applies to the current device listed on the status bar Press any key or click in this column to enter text in the address field Entering an address creates an update of all other columns You can enter a range of addresses by using the fill format equations below Address count increment format Address1 Address2 increment format 217 A tag is a very short description of an address and can be used in place of address Devices must exist if you want to edit this field Tags are stored in database files containing addresses and th
430. the Data Window 1 eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenee nnne nnnm nnns 120 Customizing the 121 tones d aoc tue eub dae eMe dot L 122 F OFCIAG an EET 122 SNOW tie LM Ir oM LU Sr LR E 123 Clear a Forced 123 Complete Cross 124 Ladder Network Cross Reference 125 AOOO SSU SO dett inei E Mo Res 125 Creating an Address Used 5 126 Adress taste eatis esie atiis DE a Res 127 AdOIeSS IAC a uso soto Divorum denm o Rua dud 127 WRIGUCAGOLGSS EM 127 COMDATE c 128 Displaying Processor Faults casein e viU Re na 130 Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays 131 Displaying Processor StatUS 131 PEC Operallolis ss e lus Siete 132 Changing Ladder esu eta Eo HOM aM 133 Changing Loop Em 134 R n Controller os tases Ege HH Enea ele let cee 134 Programming ius OE dua
431. the PLC Utilities menu Alt U W 2 The Password dialog box is displayed in the format shown in Figure 6 12 CrPasWedMode c cn Figure 6 12e 145 Online Password Selection and Access Level Password Mode ENABLED Enable Password Enter Password Access Level FULL ACCESS Full Access Password Aliases Head Only Access Figure 6 13 The buttons in Figure 6 13 are defined below 146 Close Allows you to return to ladder display screen Enter Password Allows you to enter or change the password for the selected program in the controller WorkShop prompts you for the new password twice If the new passwords are not the same the password is not changed To delete a password or to make the selected program on disk unprotected enter a null password or press clear and enter a new password No Access Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for no access This option is written to the controller No Access does not work without a password Read Only Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for read only access This option is written to the controller Read Only does not work without a password Full Access Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for full read write access This option is written to the controller Full Access does not work without a password Enable
432. the keyboard l 3 4 Press the Insert key to turn the Ins mode on See the Status Line near the bottom of the screen Use the arrow keys to position the parameter cursor red or highlighted box in the last row of the Special Function Program Press Enter and the new row appears as the last row Repeat Step 3 to enter additional rows Entering Special Function Program Instructions You can enter instructions into your Special Function Program efficiently using either the Instruction Bar or Menu Bar To enter instructions using the Instruction Bar l 2 106 Move the pointer to the Instruction bar Click with the left mouse button on the desired instruction on the lower half of the Instruction Bar If the desired instruction is not displayed click the appropriate instruction group on the top half of the instruction bar Move the pointer over the Special Function Program Notice that the instruction is attached to the pointer Position the pointer where you wish to place the instruction Click the left mouse button and the instruction is placed in that location If an instruction cannot be placed in that location an error message is displayed The instruction remains attached to the pointer Click the left mouse button once for each additional instruction you want to insert Click the arrow in the middle of the Instruction Bar or another instruction to remove the instruction from the pointer FasTrak SoftWorks
433. the values of word inputs outputs Control Relay Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for control relays Control relays are single bit internal memory locations and do not represent actual hardwired devices opecial Memory A block of memory within the controller may be allocated for loops analog alarms and opecial Function programs This memory type is called Special Memory S Memory All loop and analog alarm parameters are stored in S Memory when you program the loop or analog alarm Likewise when you create a Special Function program or subroutine the program is stored in S Memory Temporary Memory A block of memory within the controller is temporarily reserved during run time whenever a Special Function program is run One block is allocated for each SF program that is being run This memory type is 16 words in length and is called Temporary Memory T Memory since it is not saved when the program has completed running The controller writes data related to the Special Function program to the first 7 words You can read this data and or write over it if you choose You can use all 16 words just as you would use Variable Memory except no data is saved when the program has completed Variable Memory A block of memory within the controller may be allocated for user operations This memory type is called Variable Memory V Memory For example you can do a math operation and store the result in V Memory You
434. the valve Once triggered the CO remains on independent of the Close input until one of the following events occurs The timer times to 0 The CA is turned on and the CO is turned off The CF turns on while the OF remains off The CO is turned off and the timer is reset If CF turns on and then turns off the CA comes on immediately the next timer the box is executed The Stop input turns on The OO CO OA and CA are turned off The Open input turns on after the Close input turns off The OO is turned on The is turned off The condition in which both the Close and Open inputs are on simultaneously is treated as a Stop The input remaining on when the other turns off is seen as a transition from off to on and the MCAT enters the appropriate state When the Stop input overlaps an Open or Close input the Stop overrides as long as it is on When the Stop turns off the remaining input is seen as a transition from off to on and drives the MCAT to the corresponding state The condition in which both Feedback signals are on simultaneously is an error condition Both open and Close are turned on and both Open and Closed Outputs are turned off Removing the conflicting feedback signals does not clear the Open and Close Alarms One of the MCAT inputs Open Close or Step must change state in order to clear the error state 255 Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types nurPur Alarm Number Constant Only Varie
435. ting Select Yes or No in the Derivative Gain Limiting field to have derivative gain limiting done If you specify No then derivative gain limiting is not done even if a value is entered in the Limiting Coefficient field Limiting Coefficient Enter a value of the Derivative Gain Limiting Coefficient in this field Typically Derivative Gain Limiting Coefficient should be in the range of 10 to 20 In the standard PID algorithm the algorithm responds excessively to the process noise if the coefficient of the derivative term rate time sample time is significantly above the 10 to 20 range This causes disturbances that lead to erratic behavior of the process To solve this problem the controller allows you the option of selecting a derivative gain limiting coefficient Using this coefficient enables the process variable to be filtered with a time constant that is proportional to the derivative time The PID equations with the derivative gain limiting coefficient follow Special Calculation On Enter PROCESS VARIABLE SETPOINT or OUTPUT in the Special Calculation On field Select NONE if no SF program is to be called for execution Special Function Enter a SF program number in the SF field Select NONE if no SF program is to be called for execution Lock Setpoint Select YES or NO in this field to lock or not lock the SETPOINT Lock Auto Manual Select YES or NO in this field to lock or not lock the AUTO MANUAL Lock Cascade Se
436. tion is described below number of digits of the BCD value located in BCD is converted to its equivalent binary integer value stored in BIN Nmayrange from 1 4 and the BCD digit count is from right to left For example if N 2 and the BCD number is A 1234 then 34 is converted and the value stored in B is 00100010 The output is turned on after the instruction is executed if the digits of the input words are valid Each digit of the BCD value in BCD must be less than or equal to 9 The binary values 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 and 1111 are invalid CDB Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Instruction reference Constant 0 32767 Parameter BCD Word Address Form A Parameter BIN Word Address Form N Constant Number of digits converted 1 4 269 Word And WAND The Word AND WAND instruction logically ANDs a word in memory location A with a word in memory location B bit for bit The result is stored in memory location C When the input is on the instruction is executed If the input remains on the instruction is executed on every scan The WAND has the following properties The word stored in the memory location specified by A is AND with the word stored in the memory location B The operation is done bit by bit The words in A and B are not affect by the WAND instruction and will retains their original values A B C 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 4 The result is stored in the memory location C I
437. tomized to display Tags Descriptions or both Tags and Descriptions Setting options in the Program Setup can customize these Program Setup The Program Setup also allows you to select the sorting method by address tags or descriptions To change the display select Options Program Setup Alt O P In the Documentation Window section click Tag to include tags and or click Descriptions to include address descriptions You must include either Tags or Descriptions in your window In the Sort Order group select Address Tag or Description to change the sort method The sort order also modifies the Documentation Window by displaying the sort order method as the first column For example if the Sort Order is defined as Tag then the first column in the Documentation Window is the Tag column The address column is always included in the display See Program Setup in Chapter 4 for more information 159 Editing and Creating New Documentation You can create a new address tag description and comment by using one of the following methods 1 From the Documentation menu select New Doc Alt D N 2 From the Pop up menu in the Documentation Window select New Doc 3 Select an address in the Documentation Window press the Enter key Ctrl L or double click on the address NOTE You can also edit documentation in the Data Window by pressing Ctrl L on the description or tag columns The Edit Documentation window is displayed You can enter a n
438. tput coil Page Up Page Down FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Ctrl L Ctrl U Edits synonym descriptor UNFORCE Usage Table Creates Down line Creates Up line Deletes vertical line 505 WorkShop 103 505 Programming Software for Windows Using the SF Program and Subroutine Editor The SF Program and Subroutine Editor gives you the ability to display access and or modify program using special functions See Chapter 7 of the 545 555 575 Programming Reference Manual Order Number PPXSS505 8101 1 for all Special Function instructions To access the Special Function Program Editor 3 Click Special Function Program Editor from the View menu F The Special Function Program dialog box appears see Figure 6 1 Special Functions PIC4100 TES 90001 LOOPCALC YES PIC4200 1 0002 LOOPCALC YES 4300 PIC4400 PIC4500 PIC4600 76 LIC3270 TIC32 75 0 Figure 6 1a 4 Select the Special Function Program that you want to enter Program 1 Program 2 etc by using the left mouse button or the Tab and Arrow keys on the keyboard Note If a Header has already been programmed skip ahead to item number 10 5 Now Click on the Header button and the following dialog box appears see Figure Special Function Program Continue on enor Mee 2 Enor Status Address None E Program Rest
439. ts Folders iaraups Disk Management be Disk Defragmenter be Logical Drives a Removable Storage DEI Services and Applications Figure 14 13a Adding Users for Windows 2000 and XP In Windows 2000 and XP users and groups can be created by entering Administrative Tools from Control Panel and selecting Computer Management Within the Computer Management application users and groups can be created by right clicking on the corresponding folders under the Local Users and Groups tree item This is shown in the figure below 377 Computer Management Consule Management Local Wystem Users and Groups a E x M Stim pesoriptic Event Viewer CR 0 VEMAROR _ Vua Liner 2 ug Shared Local Users Chai ET if d But an account For guest access Remote Deskbop Help feed Account For Providing Remoa s i Administrators Fave complete and u Backup Operators can override secu Guests Fares za Members in this group can som remet parvus cra Peerbers i thet group ane eniad Figure 14 13b Adding Users and Groups on a Domain Controller If on a domain controller select Active Directory Users and Computers from the Administrative Tools menu From the tree cont
440. ull access to the controller You will also have full access to the selected program on disk Mode 6 If both the controller and the selected program on disk have passwords and you enter a password for both at the online prompt you will be able to use the Save and the Open functions The passwords for both the selected program on disk and for the controller are retained You will also have full access to the selected program on disk and to the controller Mode 7 If both the controller and the selected program on disk have passwords and you enter a password only for the selected program on disk at the online prompt you will not be able to use the Save and Open functions You will have partial to full access to the controller depending on the controller access level You will also have full access to the selected program on disk Mode 8 If both the controller and the selected program on disk have passwords and you enter a password for the controller at the online prompt you will not be allowed to use the Save function You will however be able to use the Open function Open will write the selected program on disk password to the controller and enable the password in the controller You will also have full access to the controller Some reads and no writes will be allowed to the selected program on disk 143 Mode 9 If both the controller and the selected program on disk have passwords and you do not enter a password for either t
441. umber of days The combo box in the bottom left corner can be set to for for consecutive days or every for incremental days When trend time is configured you can click on the Add gt gt button to save the trend time and display it in text form in the Selected Trend Times list box Two examples of trend times in text format are listed below Start trending at 1 30 PM on 10 25 1999 Stop trending after 5 minutes Every 2 days start trending at 1 30PM Stop trending at 2 30PM You can enable and disable each trend time by checking and un checking the box next to the trend description To edit a trend time in the Selected Trend Times list box simply highlight the text to be edited and click on the Edit button The text in the list box will be removed and the Trend Time Setup group box will be updated with the settings corresponding to the text You can modify the settings and re enter them by clicking on the Add gt gt button at any time 256 trend times may be saved as long as they don t overlap The static text box in the lower right corner of the property page describes the currently active control This text will change whenever a different control is selected The FTTrender defaults to trending data immediately after addresses are entered into the trend window and we will continue until the trend window is closed 231 Trend Window Setup Trend Data Trend Data of the property Trend Window sheet is li
442. umber that you want to enter or edit Ramp Soak by using left mouse button or the Arrow keys on the keyboard To edit delete or insert the selected PID Loop number Ramp Soak click on the dialog box Ramp Soak button or use the keyboard to Tab to the Ramp Soak button and press Enter or Alt The following dialog box appears Figure 9 4 Ramp Soak Steps PID Loop d Figure 9 4 The first field in the table contains the ramp soak address An entry in this field causes ramp soak data to be written from the ramp soak variable LRSF to another address as described above The address can be either a bit Y or C that allocates 5 contiguous bits or a word WY or V that allocates one word for ramp soak data The format of the bits in a ramp soak flag address correspond to the individual bits making up the 16 bit word LRSF Bits are defined in Table 9 2 Table 9 2 BIT LOOP FUNCTION 1 1 Restart at the first step To restart toggle bit off on then off again The restart occurs on the trailing edge of a square wave 1 Hold at current step To hold set bit on 12 Jog to next step To jog set bit Jog occurs on the rising edge of a square wave 1 Finish Indicates ramp soak is completed 1 This bit is set during a soak period when the process variable is not within a specified deviation from the SP The loop holds the soak timer when bit 5 is set 193 6 1 Hold in progr
443. umber to a drum type instruction be sure that you do not use that number for any other drum type instruction For example if you configure a Maskable Event Drum Word 1 MDRMW1 do not configure an Event Drum 1 EDRUM1 Assigning the same reference number to more than one drum type instruction could cause unpredictable operation by the controller which could result in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Do not assign the same reference number to more than one drum type instruction Drum memory is divided into areas for storing the following types of information Drum Step Preset DSP Drum Step Current DSC Drum Count Preset DCP Drum Count Current DCC When you specify step and counts per step count preset values for a drum type the step preset is stored as a 16 bit word in DSP Memory and the counts per step values are stored as 16 consecutive 16 bit words in DCP Memory except for the DRUM For the DRUM instruction counts per step values are stored in L Memory DCP is not used NOTE you use an operator interface to change the drum preset values DSP or DCP the new values are not changed in the original RLL program If the RLL presets are ever downloaded e g as the result of a complete restart or an edit of the network containing the drum instruction the changes made with the operator interface are replaced by the values in the RLL program When the instruction is actually operating
444. uncated by the transfer 298 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop RSD Operation When the input is on the RSD box executes If the input remains on the operation executes on every scan The operation of RSD is as follows Ifthe PROFIBUS DP I O subsystem is stopped or if the indicated slave has not signaled a diagnostic since the last execution of an RSD instruction for the slave the destination buffer s status byte is set equal to 2 and the length is set equal to O Ifthe slave has signaled more than one diagnostic since the last execution of an RSD instruction for the slave the destination buffer s status byte is set equal to 0 the length byte is set equal to the length of the last diagnostic signaled and the value possibly truncated of the latest signaled diagnostic is copied to the diagnostic area Ifthe slave has signaled more than one diagnostic since the last execution of an RSD instruction for the slave the destination buffer s status byte is set equal to 1 the length byte is set equal to the length of the last diagnostic signaled and the value possibly truncated of the latest signaled diagnostic is copied to the diagnostic area If the input is off the instruction does not execute and the output is off NOTE Status words STW232 through STW238 indicate the PROFIBUS DP slaves that have signaled a diagnostic that has not been read by an RSD instruction Use a bit of word contact specifying the slave s st
445. unte Pune 266 Word FROG VVESO T ioe 266 Mathana LOGIC INSIFUCUIONS eda 267 RH c MM e 267 SUDILACL toU B 267 Multiply L810 Ee ae ee MN 267 BITS Md ES 268 Absol te Value ABS rantes T 268 og are ROO cde Bd vas Seed 268 Binary t0 BOD CBD Jarse 269 BCD E O 269 Word And WAND eR ES 270 WOT OT WOR 271 Word Exclusive Or WXOR 272 MOVE MSTUCUIONS eet Ems 272 Move Image Register From Table 272 Move Image Register to Table 273 Move Image Register to Word 273 Move Byte Word Element 2 4 Move Word MOWW cccccscccsssececeseecseseecseseesseseeseaeeeseueeensneseneeeeness 275 Move Word From Table 276 Move Word to Table 277 Move Word with Index 278 Move Word to Image Register MWIR
446. ure 0 26 This dialog allows you to select which trend windows we will be receiving status messages from Source group box as well as which status messages we wish to receive Include group box These messages can also be written to a file by checking the Save otatus Messages to a File box in the Status File group box and including a path and filename You can click on the Browse button to bring up a common file search dialog as shown above If you ve selected an existing file and click on OK the software will ask you if you would like to append the new messages to this file or clear the file and begin from scratch Writing status messages to a file vs a window allows more flexibility in two ways First a file can hold more entries than a window Seconaly status messages from one trend session can be appended to messages from a previous session 241 Error Response Dialog The Error Response dialog is accessed by clicking on the Error Response menu under the main menu Setup This dialog allows you to configure how the trender should react to a variety or error situations This dialog is displayed below Error Response x Types r Error Responses Attempt to reset the port after 2 timeout s Repeat every 5 minute s Do not attempt any reads from the device communication timeouts device errors Communications Timeout Response No response communications timeout erro
447. used to save the previous state of the instruction input Because the instructions in the One Shot group use different bits of one byte these instructions can be assigned identical reference numbers That is if you configure a One Shot 11 OS11 you can configure a Date Set 11 79 505 Programming Software for Windows Shift Register Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for the operation of the shift registers which include the following Q Bit Shift Register SHRB Q Word Shift Register SHRW This memory type consists of one byte per shift register This byte is used to save the previous state of the instruction input When you assign a number to a shift register be sure that a Warning you do not use that number for any other shift register type For example do not configure SHRB11 and SHRW11 Assigning the same number for more than one shift register could cause unpredictable operation by the controller which could result in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Do not assign the same reference number to more than one shift register instruction 80 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Drum Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for the operation of the various drum types including the following Drum DRUM Event Drum EDRUM Maskable Event Drum Maskable Event Drum Word MDRMW Discrete MDRMD When you assign a n
448. ut signal decreases as the value of the error increases A direct acting loop is defined to have a positive gain i e a positive change in error SP PROCESS VARIABLE results in a positive change in the output from the controller The value of the output signal increases as the value of the error increases Monitor Deviation To have the controller monitor the deviation Loop limits select Yes in the Monitor Deviation field otherwise select No Deviation Yellow Alarm Enter values in engineering units for the setpoint deviation limits The deviation Alarm bands are always centered around the target or setpoint i e the deviation Alarm test is actually on the control error This value indicates the maximum allowable error SP PROCESS VARIABLE that sets the yellow Alarm deviation Alarm The yellow deviation limit must be within the span of the process variable and it must be less than or equal to the orange deviation Alarm 187 Deviation Orange Alarm Enter values in engineering units for the setpoint deviation limits The deviation Alarm bands are always centered around the target or setpoint i e the deviation Alarm test is actually on the control error This value indicates the maximum allowable error SP PROCESS VARIABLE that sets the orange Alarm deviation Alarm The orange deviation limit must be within the span of the process variable and it must be greater than or equal to the yellow deviation Loop 188 FasTrak Sof
449. utton to start the search and replace process The Cancel Button Click the Cancel button to exit the Search and Replace Table dialog without performing the search and replace process The Help Button Click the Help button to display general help text about the Search and Replace Table dialog 119 505 Programming Software for Windows Using the Data Window The Data Window menu item opens a new window and allows you to view and change the data values of your program Once you display addresses in the Data Window you can enter specific values If monitoring data online you can enter a value for a particular address send it directly to the processor and you can force I O address on and off You can also create tables of addresses store them on a disk and transfer them to the PLC at a later time 1 With a logic program open click E3 on the toolbar or select Data Window from the View menu The Data Window dialog box appears Figure 6 7 2 Use the Program Setup from the Options menu or the right mouse menu to change which columns are displayed in the Data Window See Program Setup in Chapter 4 E DATAT E Conveyor Offline x iC fe 2 2 C2 LOAD OOSTN DDAUTO ON D1 Ofline 3 C3 LOAD OOSTN OOMAN OFF D1 Ofline 4 164 ULOAD OOSTN OOAUTO ON D1 Ofline 5 C5 OOSTN OOMAN OFF D1 Ofline 6 PRE HDPROD OOSELCT OFF D1 Ofline 7 C7 PROD OOSELCT nn OFF D1 Ofline 8 C8 ST
450. ve Status Messages to a File Stop after i 00 E bytes Status File Path H SCONTROLSHOPSARELEASE SLogStat tut Brese Figure 0 8 This dialog allows you to select which log windows we will be receiving status messages from Source group box as well as which status messages we wish to receive Include group box These messages can also be written to a file by checking the Save Status Messages to a File box in the Status File group box and including a path and filename You can click on the Browse button to bring up a common file search dialog as shown above If you ve selected an existing file and click on OK the software will ask you if you would like to append the new messages to this file or clear the file and begin from scratch Writing status messages to a file vs a window allows more flexibility in two ways First a file can hold more entries than a window Secondly status messages from one log session can be appended to messages from a previous session 222 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Error Response Dialog The Error Response dialog is accessed by clicking on the Error Response menu under the main menu Setup This dialog allows you to configure how the logger should react to a variety or error situations This dialog is displayed below Error Response x Error Types Eror Responses communication meos Attempt to reset the after E timenaut s Repeat een E
451. vision is truncated Modulo arithmetic The expression X mod Y returns the remainder of X after division by Y Addition Subtraction unary minus negation Equal The expression X Y returns 1 if X equals Y and zero if not 2 Not equal The expression X Y returns 1 if X is not equal to Y and zero if so 2 Less than The expression X Y returns 1 if X is less than Y and zero otherwise 2 Less Than or Equal The expression X lt Y returns 1 if X is less than or equal to Y and zero otherwise 2 Greater Than The expression X Y returns 1 if X is greater than Y and zero otherwise 2 Greater Than or Equal The expression X Y returns 1 if X is greater than or equal to Y and zero otherwise 2 Logical AND The expression X AND Y returns 1 if both X and Y are non zero and zero otherwise Logical OR The expression X OR Y returns 1 if either X or Y is non zero and zero otherwise Bit by bit AND of two words Bit by bit OR of two words Bit by bit exclusive OR of two words2 Assignment2 Math intrinsic function Absolute Value 2 Supported by PowerMath CPUS only Table 11 5 IMATH Operators 2 Figure 11 22 Figure 11 22 illustrates the operation of the IMATH statement described below 322 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Each time statement executes the calculations within statement are made The IMATH computations are executed using the rules of precedence for arithmetic ope
452. w Documentation Window Update Times Colors Options for Individual Program Settings v Show Grid v Show All Headers Sticky Cursor Update Cross Ref Table Logic Font Application Wide Settings Number of Backup Files Saved jo Cancel Save as Restore Figure 7 2 Check uncheck the Show Headers box to display or hide the program and network headers Select Ladder in the Options for combo box 167 Lagic Data window Documentation window Update Times Colors Individual Program Settings Options for W Show Addresses Column width W Show Tags Tag Rows 2 2 Show Descriptions Description Rows Assign Tags Assign Addresses Status Thickness v Use TISOFT Keys Cancel Save as Restore Figure 7 3 Check or uncheck the Show Tags and Show Descriptions boxes to display or hide the Tag and Description portions of address documentation Click OK to activate the documentation display selections Toggling display with keyboard hotkeys Network headers and the Tag and Description portions of address documentation can be displayed or hidden by pressing a set of hot keys while viewing the Logic Window hot key combinations which display and hide documentation use the F5 key as described below Address Descriptions Press F5 to display address Descriptions in the Logic W
453. warnings and errors associated with Step Change Wait Time The SmarTune sample algorithm looks for a PV to change by Step Change or to quit changing Wait Time is required to determine when a PV has quit changing If a PV value does not change by a Noise Band amount within a Wait Time period then it has stopped changing PIN PIN and PIN Variable are provided to force a two step procedure to be followed before a loop is tuned To use this feature PIN and PIN Variable must both be set If PIN is a zero or PIN Variable is a null then SmarTune activation is a one step procedure dependent only on Start Variable If both are specified PIN Variable must equal PIN or a SmarTune session will not be started or queued Automatic Download If Automatic Download is true a loop tuning session is accomplished with minimum additional support After tuning values are calculated three actions are taken Calculated Kc Ti and Td are written to a loop The loop is changed to its prior mode Q The loop s SP is assigned its prior value Calculate Derivative If Calculate Derivative is false only Kc and Ti are calculated and Td is set to zero If Calculate Derivative is true Kc Ti and Td are calculated 201 Safe Output oafe Output is a Mn value that will not cause any harm to a process The default is to use the loop Mn value just prior to a tuning session start High Stop If a PV goes above High Stop Mn is set to Safe Output
454. wer cycle as long as the battery is good Control Force attribute bit relay i Ig Du g C4 CX OD A a MA e Figure 6 8a You can force an element from either Data Window or Ladder logic editor complete the following steps From the Data Window 1 Click on the right mouse button while in the Data field of an Element or the Data menu while in the Data field of an Element 2 From the menu select the type of forcing action you would like to do From the Ladder Logic 1 1 From the Ladder Editor select the element to force 2 2 While on the element select the Diagnostics menu From the menu select the type of forcing action you would like to do 122 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Show Forces To show all forced elements complete the following steps 1 Select the Data Window from the Veiw menu 2 Oncein the Data Window click on the right mouse button or left click on the Data menu 3 Select Show Forces from the menu Clear a Forced Element To Clear a Forced Element from either Data Window or Ladder logic editor complete the following steps From the Data Window 1 Click on the right mouse button while in the Data field of an Element or the Data menu while in the Data field of an Element 2 From the menu select the type of forcing action you would like to do From the Ladder Logic 1 While on the element select the Diagnostics menu From
455. windows are up the message No logs are currently active will be displayed A successful trend entry in this window will read At date and time of trend data was successfully logged from trend window name to Access trend filename A failed trend entry in this window will read At date and time of trend data failed to trend error message describing reason of failure Each message type can be displayed in a different color See section 5 2 Entries into this window may be stopped at any time by checking the Pause Trending menu under the main menu Mode Un checking the Pause Trending menu will re enable the window so that it may receive status messages once more Status messages that occurred when the window was paused are lost A floating menu brought on by a right mouse button click while the cursor is over this window can be utilized to allow a user to clear or hide the window in FTLogger File Edit View Data Setup Mode Window Help 21 5 5055 erver Batch57 10 00 15 250 AM 01 06 00 Batch57 10 00 15 250 01 06 00 10 00 15 250 AM 01 06 00 Batch57 10 00 15 250 AM 01 06 00 Batch57 10 00 15 250 AM 01 06 00 Log Status t 09 59 51 AM 01 06 00 data was successfully logged from LogSheet1 to log1 mdb t 09 59 55 AM 01 06 00 data was successfully logged from LogSheet1 to log1 mdb t 10 00 00 01 06 00 data was successfully logge
456. within each subroutine and up to 255 SKP LBL instructions for each TASK segment in the program The reference numbers for the SKP LBL instruction range from 1 to 255 and numbers cannot be duplicated within a given subroutine or TASK segment The subroutine set distance from the main RLL program and reference numbers used in the subroutine can also be used in the main program That is SKP23 is the main program and does not interfere with a SKP23 in the subroutine When the SKP receiver power flow all ladder logic between the SKP and its associated LBL is ignored by the controller Output between the SKP and the LBL are frozen in their current states All ladder logic within the SJP zone of control is executed normally when the SKP does not have power flow Fora SKP to LBL function located within the zone of control of an MCR or JMP the SKP or LBL function overrides the MCR or JMP when the SKP has power flow The zone of control for a SKP is limited to the task segment or subroutine in which the SKP is used the matching LBL must be defined after the SKP and be located in the same task segment or subroutine as the SKP Fora JMPE or MCRE contained within a SKP s zone of control the program functions as if the JMPE or MCRE is located at the end of the program whenever the SKP is active LBL Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 1 255 295 scan Synchronization Inhibit SSI 560 565 only Para
457. words are copied into the destination table each scan Q The output is turned on when the instruction is executed If either the source or the destination pointer plus table size exceeds memory size instruction is not executed The output is turned off and bit 11 in Status Word 1 is set MWI Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 A Word Addr V W G B Word Addr V W G N Word Addr V W G Move Word to Image Register MWIR The Move Word to Image Register instruction MWIR copies a specified number of bits from a word memory location to the discrete image register or into the control relay memory locations All bits are copied in a single scan When power is passed to the input the instruction is executed The instruction has the following features Q Up to 16 bits in word memory location A are copied beginning with the least significant bit of the word Bits are copied into the discrete image register or into the control relay memory locations starting at the address designated by IR The bits are copied during a single scan Q The output is turned on when the instruction is executed MWIR Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 A Word Addr Form A IR Bit Addr Y C B N Constant Only 1 16 278 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop search Table for Equal STFE The Search Table for Equal STFE instruction locates the next occurrence of a word in a table
458. xisting File group box will hold the most recently used MRU configuration files read from the registry similar to the MRU list of LGR files under the File menu The database file must include at least 4 fields ADDRESS TAG DESCRIP and COMMENT in order If these fields are not found a documentation mapping dialog will be displayed to map user fields to FasTrak fields described above A tag is synonymous with a Workshop symbol and a description is synonymous with a Workshop label Every device configured must have a corresponding doc file 226 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Adding Devices To add a device select the Add Device button and the dialog below will be displayed Add Device Device Name OK Cancel Communications Type Setup com Help ill Server KOSS Documentation Setup File Path E Adevice2 mdb every minute s Figure 0 14 The first running server alphabetically will be displayed in the Server combo box along with any other running servers Modification of the device name will automatically update the doc filename so that they mirror one another You can select a different doc path and or file by manually editing this string or by selecting a new or existing doc file by clicking on the button to bring up a common file select dialog Since database files can be shared with other application
459. you attach to FasTrak Key is a parallel printer make sure the printer is turned on before starting 505 WorkShop NOTE The FasTrak Key must be the first device attached to the parallel port Other devices or cables can then attach to the FasTrak Key 505 Programming Software for Windows Troubleshooting the FasTrak Key The following is a list of error messages associated with the FasTrak Key possible causes and ways to remedy the situation Message FasTrak Key was not found Check to see if the FasTrak Key is attached to your parallel port and retry The demo mode may be entered without a FasTrak Key Possible Cause 1 WorkShop was started without the FasTrak Key attached to the parallel port 2 parallel port driver may be missing 3 f you are running Windows NT the NT driver may not be loaded Remedy Check to see that The FasTrak Key is connected to a parallel port The FasTrak Key is the first device attached to the computer Q That the parallel printer attached to one of the parallel printer ports is turned on Q Add the port driver 1 Goto the DOS prompt of 505 WorkShop directory 2 Type RNBODRVS and press enter This will create five subdirectories and extract three files Readme txt Sentinel ddp and Setup exe 3 Type SETUP and press enter The setup program automatically installs the proper drivers for your particular operating system If there are no errors the program immediate
460. you to allow either timer or an event to advance the drum a step The EDRUM provides 15 coils and 16 steps which are operated on multiples of the drum time base Each step controls all 15 output coils When the drum begins to run it starts at the step specified by the Drum Step Preset which is stored in DSP memory The drum current step is stored in DSC memory The counts per step set in the Count Step field is store in DCP memory The drum current count is stored in DCC memory The drum in enabled when the Enable Reset input is on When Enable Reset is and the Start input turns on the drum begins to run The drum begins at the step specified by DSP and advances to the next step depending upon operation of the timer and or event When drum advances a step coils are turned on or off according to the mask for the new step Each 1 in the mask designates that a coils to be turned on while each 0 designates that a coils is to be turned off The drum output turns on and remains on after the last programmed step has been executed The last programmed step is the last step having an event programmed or having a non zero Count Step preset value The event must be on and the DCC must be zero If the event turns off after DCC reaches zero the drum output remains on and the EDRUM remains at the last programmed step until the drum is reset When the Enable Reset turns off the drum output is turned off and the drum returns
461. zero TCC does not change if the Up and Down inputs both change from off to on during the same scan Ifthe Enable Reset turns off is reset to zero The output specified in Z is turned on whenever TCC equals zero This output is turned off when TCC does not equal zero The box output is turned on whenever TCC equals zero or Q After having counted to the preset value TCP the box does not require resetting in order to resume counting in the opposite direction TCC does not ever exceed TCP Q You can protect the preset values from being changed in the Data Window by the new TCP values are not changed in the original RLL program until the entire program is downloaded to the PLC COUNTER 12 UDC Parameter Valid Parameter Types UP DOWN COUNTER Type PRESET 587 OUTPUT Counter Constant Only Varies with T C configured Number Constant Only range Preset Bit Addr 0 32767 2 Y C B L3 STATUS UNPROT Do not use the same reference number more than once for timer counter up down counter and discrete motor control alarm timer instructions Using the same reference number can cause unpredictable operations 252 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop Discrete Control Alarm Timer The Discrete Control Alarm Timer DCAT instruction is used with a single input double feedback device The input to the DCAT instruction should be derived from the preceding logic that determines the state of the
462. zero When DCC for a step reaches zero the drum advances to the next step and the coils are turned on off according to the drum mask for the new step Each 1 in the mask designates that a coil is to be turned on while each 0 designates that a coil is to be turned off When the Enable Reset turns off the drum output is turned off and the drum returns to the step specified in the DSP IF the Start input is turned off but the Enable Reset remains on the rum remains at the current step and DCC holds its current count All coils maintain the condition specified by the drum mask for this step When the drum is at the Preset step the output coils follow the states specified by the drum mask for that step even if the Enable Reset input is off Take care to program the mask with a bit pattern that is a safe state for the Preset step DRUM Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Drum Constant Varies with drum memory ONSE Constant 1 16 8 Constant 0 0 32 767 Sec Do not use the same reference number more than once for arning timer counter up down counter and discrete motor control alarm timer instructions Using the same reference number can cause unpredictable operations 257 Time Event Driven Drum EDRUM The Time Event Driven Drum EDRUM instruction simulates an electromechanical stepper switch or drum The EDRUM can be indexed by a timer only an event contact only or a time and event A job input enables

PLC WorkShop - FasTrak SoftWorks, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents